IPS Tempo: User Manual

IPS Tempo™
USER MANUAL
Important User Information
Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment. Safety
Guidelines for the Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls (Publication SGI-1.1 available
from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/literature)
describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices.
Because of this difference, and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment, all persons
responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is
acceptable.
In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting
from the use or application of this equipment.
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many
variables and requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume
responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams.
No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment,
or software described in this manual.
Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell
Automation, Inc. is prohibited.
Throughout this manual, when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations.
WARNING: Identifies information about practices or

! circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous
environment, which may lead to personal injury or death, property
damage, or economic loss.
Important: Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product.
ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices or

! circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property
damage, or economic loss. Attentions help you identify a hazard,
avoid a hazard, and recognize the consequences.
Shock Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment

(e.g., drive or motor) to alert people that dangerous voltage may be
present.
Burn Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment

(e.g., drive or motor) to alert people that surfaces may be at
dangerous temperatures.
DriveExplorer, DriveExecutive, DPI, and SCANport are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies.
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction
Reference Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
Manual Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Getting Assistance from Flowserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Chapter 2 About the IPS Tempo

Identifying the IPS Tempo by Model Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1
Power Enclosure Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1
CE Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1
IPS Tempo Components and Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
IPS Tempo Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
IPS Tempo Communication Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Operator Interface Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Regulator and Encoder Board Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
PC-Based Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Chapter 3 Mounting, Grounding, and Wire Routing

General Requirements for the Installation Site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
Lifting the IPS Tempo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22
Mounting the IPS Tempo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Routing Input, Motor Output, Ground, and Control Wiring for the IPS Tempo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Grounding the IPS Tempo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26
Chapter 4 Wiring Requirements for the IPS Tempo

Power Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1
Control and Signal Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Meeting Encoder Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Recommended Motor Lead Lengths. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Selecting Input Line Branch Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Chapter 5 Installing Power Wiring

Removing and Replacing the Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1
Power Terminal Block Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Installing Output Power Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Installing Input Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Chapter 6 Installing Regulator Board Control Wiring

Stop Circuit Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1
Wiring the Signal and Control I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Wiring the Encoder Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Hardware Enable Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
I/O Wiring Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
Wiring Diagram - Control and Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
Speed and Process Reference Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
Remote HIM Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11
Publication 20B-UM004C
toc-ii
Chapter 7 Using the LCD HIM

Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1
Installing and Removing the Local LCD HIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Display Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
LCD HIM Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5
Powering Up and Adjusting the LCD HIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6
Selecting a Device in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7
Using the LCD HIM to Program the IPS Tempo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7
Monitoring with the Process/Status Display Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10
Controlling the IPS Tempo From the LCD HIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-11
Chapter 8 Programming Basics

About Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1
How Parameters are Organized. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1
Accessing the Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4
Using the Write-Protect Password to Ensure Program Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Chapter 9 Parameter Descriptions

Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
IPS Tempo Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-101
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting the IPS Tempo

Verifying that DC Bus Capacitors are Discharged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-1
Determining IPS Tempo Status Using the Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
IPS Tempo HIM Status Line Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Determining Precharge Board Status (Frames 5 & 6 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-5
About Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6
About Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Testpoint Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-19
Common Symptoms and Corrective Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-20
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-22
Troubleshooting the IPS Tempo Using the LCD HIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-23
Appendix A Technical Specifications
Appendix B Logic Command/Status Words

Logic Command Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Logic Status Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Appendix C Record of User Sets
Index
Chapter 1
Introduction
The IPS Tempo is pre-engineered specifically for pumps, making the benefits
of variable frequency drive (VFD) technology more accessible to pump users. It
incorporates pump-specific system optimization software, an industrial grade
drive, and a menu-driven user interface, offering protection, reliability, and ease
of use not possible with other variable frequency drives.
ATTENTION: You must read these instructions prior to installing,

operating, using, and maintaining the IPS Tempo in any region
worldwide. Importantly, the use of the IPS Tempo Pump
Condition Monitors may cause a change in the operating
conditions such as turning the pump off, going to a pre-determined
speed, and ignoring the process variable of the IPS Tempo. You
must not put the equipment into service until you understand all
IPS Tempo features and control capabilities. You must also
understand the effect they can have on the pump system. Finally,
you must ensure that the pump system is configured safely. Failure
to observe this precaution could result in loss of equipment, severe
bodily injury, or loss of life.
This manual is intended for qualified electricians familiar with installing,

programming, and maintaining the IPS Tempo.
This manual contains information on:
• Installing and wiring the IPS Tempo
• Programming the IPS Tempo
• Troubleshooting the IPS Tempo
For more information regarding the IPS Tempo features and control
capabilities, refer to IPS Tempo Parameters on page 9-101.
Reference Materials The following manual is recommended for detailed IPS Tempo information:
Title Publication Available
IPS Tempo Application Manual 20B-AT001 Shipped with the product
Manual Conventions Parameter names: In most instances, parameter names are shown as the
parameter name followed by the parameter number. For example: Ramped
Speed (22).
1-2 Introduction
General Precautions
ATTENTION: Only qualified electrical personnel familiar with
the construction and operation of this equipment and the hazards
involved should install, adjust, operate, or service this equipment.
Read and understand this manual and other applicable manuals in
their entirety before proceeding. Failure to observe this precaution
could result in severe bodily injury or loss of life.
ATTENTION: DC bus capacitors retain hazardous voltages after
input power has been disconnected. After disconnecting input
power, wait five (5) minutes for the DC bus capacitors to discharge
and then check the voltage with a voltmeter to ensure the DC bus
capacitors are discharged before touching any internal components.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in severe bodily
injury or loss of life.
ATTENTION: The IPS Tempo can operate at and maintain zero
speed. The user is responsible for assuring safe conditions for
operating personnel by providing suitable guards, audible or visual
alarms, or other devices to indicate that the IPS Tempo is operating
or may operate at or near zero speed. Failure to observe this
precaution could result in severe bodily injury or loss of life.
ATTENTION: Do not install modification kits with power applied
to the IPS Tempo. Disconnect and lock out incoming power before
attempting such installation or removal. Failure to observe this
ATTENTION: The IPS Tempo start/stop/enable control circuitry
includes solid state components. If hazards due to accidental
contact with moving machinery or unintentional flow of liquid, gas
or solids exist, an additional hardwired stop circuit may be required
to remove the AC line to the IPS Tempo. An auxiliary braking
method may be required
ATTENTION: The IPS Tempo contains ESD- (Electrostatic
Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies. Static control
precautions are required when installing, testing, servicing, or
repairing the IPS Tempo. Erratic machine operation and damage
to, or destruction of, equipment can result if this procedure is not
followed. Failure to observe this precaution can result in bodily
injury.
ATTENTION: The user is responsible for conforming with all
applicable local, national, and international codes. Failure to
observe this precaution could result in damage to, or destruction
of, the equipment.
Getting Assistance from For questions about the products described in this instruction manual, contact
Flowserve your local Flowserve Sales Office. For assistance in determining your local
sales contact, call 1-800-526-3569.
Chapter 2
About the IPS Tempo
This chapter describes how to identify the IPS Tempo assembly and power
module and shows the major IPS Tempo components.
Identifying the IPS Tempo Each IPS Tempo can be identified by its model number, as shown in Figure 2.1.
by Model Number The model number is located on the shipping label and the IPS Tempo
nameplate. The model number includes the IPS Tempo and any
factory-installed options. Model numbers and IPS Tempo power ratings are
provided in Figure 2.1.
CNB B 028 A 3 A Y N B N D 0 NN BH
Special Firmware
AC Drive Family BH = IPS Tempo
Input Voltage Reserved
B = 240 VAC
D = 480 VAC Feedback
E = 600 VAC 0 = None
Current Rating (Amps) Digital Input Voltage
A = 24 VDC
Enclosure B = 115 VAC
A = IP20, NEMA/UL Type 1
Communication Option
HIM N = None
3 = Full Numeric LCD
Emission Class
Documentation A = CE Filter and CM Choke
A = User Manual B = CE Filter
Brake Brake Resistor

Y = Included N = None
N = None
Figure 2.1 – Identifying the IPS Tempo by Model Number
Power Enclosure Ratings The IPS Tempo has a NEMA 1 enclosure rating. NEMA 1 enclosures are
vented and are intended for general purpose indoor applications. See Tables 4.4
through 4.8 for power ratings.
CE Conformity Conformity with the Low Voltage (LV) Directive and Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC) Directive has been demonstrated using harmonized
European Norm (EN) standards published in the Official Journal of the
European Communities.
The IPS Tempo 240 VAC and 480 VAC ratings comply with the EN standards
listed below when installed according to the User and Reference Manual. Note:
600 VAC rated IPS Tempos are not CE compliant.
CE Declarations of Conformity are available online at:
http://www.ab.com/certification.
2-2 About the IPS Tempo
Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC)

• EN50178 Electronic equipment for use in power installations.
EMC Directive (89/336/EEC)
• EN61800-3 Adjustable speed electrical power IPS Tempo systems Part 3:
EMC product standard including specific test methods.
General Notes
To be CE compliant, the motor cable should be kept as short as possible in
order to avoid electromagnetic emission as well as capacitive currents.
The IPS Tempo may cause radio frequency interference. The user is required to
take measures to prevent interference, in addition to the essential requirements
for CE compliance listed in section 2.3.1, if necessary.
If the adhesive label is removed from the top of the IPS Tempo, the IPS Tempo
must be mounted in a cabinet with side openings less than 12.5 mm (0.5 in) and
top openings less than 1.0 mm (0.04 in) to maintain compliance with the Low
Voltage Directive.
Conformity of the IPS Tempo with CE EMC requirements does not guarantee
an entire machine or installation complies with CE EMC requirements. Many
factors can influence total machine/installation compliance.
Use of line filters in ungrounded systems is not recommended. The IPS Tempo
can generate conducted low frequency disturbances (harmonic emissions) on
the AC supply system.
When operated on a public supply system, the user is responsible for ensuring,
by consultation with the distribution network operator and Rockwell
Automation, if necessary, that applicable requirements have been met.
Essential Requirements for CE Compliance

All conditions listed below must be satisfied for the IPS Tempo to meet the
requirements of EN61800-3:
• Standard IPS CE-compatible IPS Tempo.
• Grounding as described in section 3.4 of this manual.
• Output power, control (I/O) and signal wiring must be braided, shielded
cable with a coverage of 75% or better, metal conduit or equivalent
attenuation.
• All shielded cables should terminate with the proper shielded connector.
Table 2.1 – IPS Tempo EN1800-3 EMC Compatibility
Frame
First Environment Restricted

IPS Tempo Description Second Environment1 Distribution
0-6 IPS Tempo with any options • Restrict motor cable to 30 m (98 ft) • Restrict motor cable to 150 m (492 ft)
• Install External filter
1. Motor cable limited to 30 m (98 ft) for installations in the second (industrial) environment without additional external line filters.
About the IPS Tempo 2-3
IPS Tempo Components and Terminal Block Locations

Locations Figure 2.2 shows locations for the Power Terminal Block. Table 2.2 identifies
the IPS Tempo connections show.
➌
! DANGER
➍ Use 75C Wire Only

➍ ➍ Optional
#10-#14 AWG Optional Communications
Torque to 7 in-lbs Communications Module
Module
➎
BR1
➎ ➎
BR2
WIRE
DC+ STRIP
POWER
CONTROL
DC–
75C Cu Wire
2
PE 6 AWG [10MM ] Max.
12 IN. LBS.
➌
1.4 N-M } TORQUE
PE B
U/T1 BR1 B V/T2 W/T3 PE R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
➊
V/T2 PE A
AUX IN+ AUX OUT–
W/T3
R/L1
➊
S/L2
T/L3
SHLD SHLD
➌ WIRE
STRIP
POWER
➋
BR1 BR2
CONTROL
➊
75C Cu Wire 75C Cu Wire
6 AWG [10MM2] Max. 3 AWG [25MM2] Max.
12 IN. LBS. 16 IN. LBS.
1.4 N-M } TORQUE 1.8 N-M } TORQUE
AUX IN
+ – BR1 BR2 DC+ DC- U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
Frames 0 & 1 Frame 2 / PE

➋ PE
SHLD
➋
SHLD
Frames 3 & 4
➋ ➋
➍ Optional
Communications
Module
Optional
Communications
Module
➍
➎
➎
POWER TERMINAL RATINGS 300 VDC EXT PWR SPLY TERM (PS+, PS-)
WIRE RANGE: 14-1/0 AWG (2.5-35 MM2) WIRE RANGE: 22-10 AWG (0.5-4 MM2) 0 120 240
TORQUE: 32 IN-LB (3.6 N-M) TORQUE: 5.3 IN-LB (0.6 N-M)
STRIP LENGTH: 0.67 IN (17 MM) STRIP LENGTH: 0.35 IN (9 MM) VAC VAC VAC
USE 75° C CU WIRE ONLY
17 9
GROUND TERMINAL RATINGS (PE)
WIRE RANGE: 6-1/0 AWG (16-35 MM2)
TORQUE: 44 IN-LB (5 N-M)
STRIP LENGTH: 0.83 IN (21 MM)
➌
21
OUTPUT INPUT AC
➌
PS+
PS–
WIRE STRIP
22-10
AWG
5.3 IN-LB
(0.6 N-M) BR2 BR1 DC+ DC–
USE 75°C COPPER WIRE ONLY, TORQUE 52 IN-LB (6 N-M)
➊
➊ USE 75°C
COPPER WIRE
ONLY
TORQUE
52 IN-LB T1 T2 T3 L1 L2 L3
(6 N-M) OUTPUT INPUT
Frame 5
Frame 6
Figure 2.2 – Typical Terminal Block Locations - Frames 0-6
DC+
! DANGER
Blower TB
(Frame 9 Only)
➎
! CAUTION
HOT SURFACES
Phase Monitor ➎
(Frame 9 Only)
! DANGER
RISK OF SHOCK
REPLACE AFTER
SERVICING
➏ TB9
8 AMPERES RMS
MAXIMUM
➌➍
CAUTION
➌➍
! DANGER
RISK OF SHOCK
REPLACE AFTER
SERVICING
TB11
25 AMPERES RMS 2 T1 4 T2 6 T3 DANGER
MAXIMUM
PE
Fan
ALLEN-BRADLEY
MADE IN U.S.A.
MOV
TB11
Transformer
25 AMPERES RMS
MAXIMUM
TE
MOV
(under boards)
PE
! DANGER
RISK OF SHOCK
REPLACE AFTER
SERVICING
➊ Fan Transformer
U V W
DC+ R S T DC-
+DC -DC PE PE R-L1 S-L2 T-L3 U-M1 V-M2 W-M3
USE 75° COPPER WIRE ONLY TORQUE LARGE TERMINALS TO 10 N-m (87LB-IN)
GND
➊
PE & MOV Wire
Frame 7 DANGER
DC+
Frames 8 & 9
➊
➎
DANGER
➏
DANGER
! DANGER
RISK OF SHOCK
REPLACE AFTER
SERVICING
TB9
8 AMPERES RMS
MAXIMUM
MOV Wire
➌➍
120
IN1
120
IN2
! DANGER
RISK OF SHOCK
REPLACE AFTER
SERVICING
TB11
25 AMPERES RMS
MAXIMUM
PE
➊
! DANGER
RISK OF SHOCK
REPLACE AFTER
SERVICING
➏
! DANGER
RISK OF SHOCK
REPLACE AFTER
SERVICING
U V W
120
IN1
120
IN2
4
TB10
8 AMPERES RMS
MAXIMUM
5
GND
Fan Transformer
➏
TB10
8 AMPERES RMS
MAXIMUM
120
IN1
120
IN2
GND
3
PE & MOV Wire

5
Frame10
Figure 2.3 – Typical Terminal Block Locations - Frames 7-10
Refer to pages 2-3 and 2-4 for typical locations.

Table 2.2 – Terminal Block Locations
No. Name Frame Description

➊ Power Terminal 0&1 Input power and motor connections
Block 2 Input power and motor connections
3 Input power and motor connections
BR1, 2 terminals
4 Input power and motor connections
5 Input power, DC+, DC–, BR1, 2, PE, motor
75HP, 480V/ connections
100HP, 600V
5 Input power, DC+, DC– and motor
100HP BR1, 2, PE terminals
6 Input power, DC+, DC–, BR1, 2, PE, motor
connections
7 Input power, DC+, DC–, PE, motor connections
10 Input power, DC+, DC–, PE, motor connections
➋ SHLD Terminal 0-6 Terminating point for wiring shields
➌ AUX Terminal 0-4 Auxiliary Control Voltage

Block 5-6 PS+, PS– 12
7, 10
➍ I/O Terminal Block 0-6 Signal & control connections
7-10
➎ Encoder Terminal 0-10 Encoder power & signal connections
Block
➏ Fan Terminal Block 5-6 User Supplied Fan Voltage
7
8-10
1. External control power: UL Installation-300V DC, ±10%, Non UL Installation-270-600V DC, ±10% (0-3
Frame-40W, 165 mA, 5 Frame-80W, 90 mA).
2. An Auxiliary Control Power Supply such as the 20-24V-AUX can be used with 400/480 and 600/690 Volt drives
with Vector Control. However, consult the factory before using an auxiliary power supply in these instances.
Important: The Auxiliary Control Power Supply Must Not be used with any 200/240V drive.
I/O Control Cassette

Figure 2.4 shows I/O Control Cassette and its terminal block locations. Each
IPS Tempo is provided with a removable I/O Cassette. The I/O cassette is a
plastic case which houses the regulator and input/output, and encoder
electronics. Table 2.3 identifies the IPS Tempo connections shown with the
corresponding number in Figure 2.4.
B
➋
C ➌ Pin 1
B
➊
A
D
Detail
BR 2
1
DC
BR
DC- +
PE
U/T
V/T 1
W/ 2
R/L T3
L2 1
Figure 2.4 – I/O Control Cassette and Terminal Blocks (Frame 0 Shown)
Table 2.3 – I/O Cassette and Terminal Block Locations
Number Name Description

➊ I/O Cassette Removable I/O Cassette
➋ I/O Terminal Block Signal and control connections
➌ Encoder Terminal Block Encoder power and signal connections
Removing the I/O Control Cassette

Table 2.4 identifies the steps for removing the I/O Control Cassette. Refer to the
alpha markers in Figure 2.4.
Table 2.4 – Removing the I/O Control Cassette
Step Description
A Disconnect the two cable connectors.
B Loosen the two screws latches.
C Slide the cassette out.
D Remove screws securing cassette cover to gain access to the boards.
IPS Tempo Connections Figure 2.5 shows the locations of the connectors used to set up and operate the
IPS Tempo. Table 2.5 identifies the IPS Tempo connections shown with the
corresponding number in Figure 2.5.
1or3
2
➌
➊
➋
➍
! DANGER
Use 75C Wire Only

#10-#14 AWG
Optional
Torque to 7 in-lbs Communications
Module
BR1
BR2
DC+
DC–
PE
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
F 0 Sh
Figure 2.5 – IPS Tempo Connections (Frame 0)
Table 2.5 – IPS Tempo Connection Descriptions
Number Connector Description

➊ DPI Port 1 HIM connection.
➋ DPI Port 2 Cable connection for handheld and remote options.
➌ DPI Port 3 or 2 Splitter cable connected to DPI Port 2 provides additional port.
➍ DPI Port 5 Cable connection for optional communications module.
IPS Tempo Communication The flat-ribbon cable connector (labeled ➍ in Figure 2.5) is a parallel bus
Options connection port that provides a means of attaching optional communication
modules.
See Table 2.6 for a list of available communication options.
Table 2.6 – Standard Communication Kits and Options
Description Model Number

ControlNet Communication Module 20-COMM-C
DeviceNet Communication Module 20-COMM-D
EtherNet/IP Communication Module 20-COMM-E
Interbus Communication Module 20-COMM-I
PROFIBUS Communication Module 20-COMM-P
Remote I/O Communication Module 20-COMM-R
RS-485 DF1 Communication Module 20-COMM-S
Operator Interface Options Table 2.7 lists the available operator interface options for the IPS Tempo.
Table 2.7 – Operator Interface Options

Full Numeric HIM E1KYPD-FN-BH
Remote Mounted NEMA 4 HIM E1KYPD-N4-BH
Blank HIM Insert 20-HIM-A0
Remote Mounted NEMA 1 HIM Bezel Kit 20-HIM-B1
Regulator and Encoder Table 2.8 lists the available regulator board options for the IPS.
Board Options Table 2.8 – Regulator Board Option Kits

24 VDC Input Regulator Board1 20B-VECTB-C0-BH
115 VAC Input Regulator Board1 20B-VECTB-D0-BH
1. The IPS Tempo is shipped with one of the above regulator boards installed. The
user can purchase one of the above regulator board kits to field replace a
damaged board or to change the digital input voltage from 24 VDC to 115 VAC
(or vice versa). If encoder feedback or the input of a frequency signal is needed,
the encoder board kit can be added to the IPS Tempo.
PC-Based Utilities The IPS Tempo can be programmed using DriveExplorer™ or DriveTools™ SP
software and a personal computer.
Chapter 3
Mounting, Grounding, and Wire Routing
This chapter provides information that must be considered when planning an

IPS Tempo installation and provides IPS Tempo mounting information.
Installation site requirements, IPS Tempo requirements, and wiring
requirements are presented.

ATTENTION: Use of power correction capacitors on the output
of the IPS Tempo can result in erratic operation of the motor,
nuisance tripping, and/or permanent damage to the IPS Tempo.
Remove power correction capacitors before proceeding. Failure to
observe this precaution could result in damage to or destruction of
the equipment.
the equipment.
General Requirements for It is important to properly plan before installing a IPS Tempo to ensure that the
the Installation Site environment and operating conditions are satisfactory.
Note that no devices are to be mounted behind the IPS Tempo. If air-cooled
devices are mounted near the unit, the hot air exhaust may raise the ambient
temperature level above what is allowed for safe operation.
The area behind the IPS Tempo must be kept clear of all control and power
wiring. Power connections may create electromagnetic fields that may interfere
with control wiring or components when run in close proximity to the IPS
Tempo.
Read the following recommendations before continuing with IPS Tempo
installation.
Verifying Power Module Input Ratings Match Available Power

IPS Tempos are suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering a maximum
of 200,000 rms symmetrical amperes and a maximum of 600 volts (nominal).
ATTENTION: To guard against personal injury and/or equipment

damage caused by improper fusing or circuit breaker selection, use
only the recommended line fuses/circuit breakers specified in
chapter 4.
3-2 Mounting, Grounding, and Wire Routing
Unbalanced, Ungrounded, Resistive or B Phase Grounded Distribution

Systems
ATTENTION: IPS Tempos contain protective MOVs and
common mode capacitors that are referenced to ground. These
devices must be disconnected if the IPS Tempo is installed on an
ungrounded, resistive or B phase grounded distribution system.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to or
destruction of the equipment.
Disconnecting MOVs, Common Mode Capacitors and Input Filter Capacitors

IPS Tempos contain protective MOVs and common mode capacitors that are
referenced to ground. To guard against drive damage, these devices must be
disconnected if the drive is installed on a resistive grounded distribution
system, an ungrounded distribution system, or B phase grounded distribution
system. On ungrounded distribution systems where the line-to-ground voltages
on any phase could exceed 125% of the nominal line-to-line voltage, an
isolation transformer should be installed. To disconnect these devices, remove
the jumper(s) listed in Tables 3.1 and 3.2.
Table 3.1 – Jumper/Wire Removal - Frames 0-6
Frame Jumper Component Jumper Location No.

0, 1 PEA Common Mode Cap. Remove the I/O Cassette (page 2-6). Jumpers ➊
PEB MOV’s located on the Power Board (Figure 3.1). ➋
2-4 PEA Common Mode Cap. Jumpers are located above the Power Terminal ➌
PEB MOV’s Block (see Figure 3.1). ➍
5 Wire Common Mode Cap. Remove the I/O Cassette as described on page 2-6. ➎
All except The green/yellow jumper is located on the back of
140A, chassis (see Figure 3.1 for location). Disconnect,
400V & insulate and secure the wire to guard against
600V unintentional contact with chassis or components.
MOV’s 1 Note location of the two green/yellow jumper wires ➏
Input Filter Cap. next to the Power Terminal Block (Figure 3.1). ➏
Disconnect, insulate and secure the wires to guard
against unintentional contact with chassis or
components.
5 Wire Common Mode Cap. Note location of the green/yellow jumper wire shown ➐
140A, MOV’s1 in Figure 3.1. Disconnect, insulate and secure the ➑
400V, wire to guard against unintentional contact with
600V
Input Filter Cap.
chassis or components.
➑
6 Wire Common Mode Cap. Remove the wire guard from the Power Terminal ➒
MOV’s 1 Block. Disconnect the green/yellow wires from the ➓
Input Filter Cap “PE” terminals shown in Figure 3.1. Important: Do
Not Disconnect the larger green/yellow wire.
On 600V drives locate and disconnect a third
green/yellow wire at the top right side of the chassis.
Insulate/secure the wires to guard against
unintentional contact with chassis or components.
1. When removing MOV’s, the input filter capacitor must also be removed.
Mounting, Grounding, and Wire Routing 3-3
➌
PE A PE B
ER
Optional
Communications
Module
➍
➍
NG
DA
➌
!
ly
On
Wire
G
e 75C 4 AW
Us bs
-#1
#10 7 in-l
to
que
Tor
PE B
PE 2 PE 1
➋
PE A
BR1
PE 4 PE 3
BR2
DC+
DC– MOV-PE JMPR
PE DC FILTER CAP-PE JMPR WIRE
STRIP
POWER
BR1 BR2
CONTROL
1
U/T 75C Cu Wire 75C Cu Wire
2 6 AWG [10MM2] Max. 3 AWG [25MM2] Max.
V/T 12 IN. LBS. 16 IN. LBS.
1.4 N-M } TORQUE 1.8 N-M } TORQUE
W/T3
1 AUX IN
R/L BR1 BR2 DC+ DC- U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
2 + –
S/L
3
T/L
Optional
PE B PE A Communications
Module
PE
➊
WIRE
STRIP
POWER
SHLD
CONTROL
75C Cu Wire
6 AWG [10MM2] Max.
12 IN. LBS.
1.4 N-M } TORQUE
BR1 B V/T2 W/T3 PE R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
AUX IN+ AUX OUT–

SHLD
Frames 0 & 1
SHLD SHLD
(I/O Cassette Removed)

Frames 3 & 4
Frame 2
➓ 600V
Optional
Communications
Module
Optional
Communications
Module
➐
WIRE RANGE: 14-1/0 AWG (2.5-35 MM2) WIRE RANGE: 22-10 AWG (0.5-4 MM2)
STRIP LENGTH: 0.67 IN (17 MM) STRIP LENGTH: 0.35 IN (9 MM)
USE 75 C CU WIRE ONLY
17 9
21
OUTPUT INPUT AC
PS+
PS–
WIRE STRIP
22-10
AWG
5.3 IN-LB
USE 75C COPPER WIRE ONLY, TORQUE 52 IN-LB (6 N-M)
USE 75C
COPPER WIRE
ONLY
TORQUE
52 IN-LB T1 T2 T3 L1 L2
x2 L3
➑
➏ x3
Frame 5 ➒ PE PE
PE PE 600V
208/240/
400/480V
Frame 6
Figure 3.1 – Typical Jumper Locations
Table 3.2 – Jumper/Wire Removal - Frames 7-10
Frame Jumper/Wire Location

7 Remove the wire guard from the Power Terminal Block. Locate the green/yellow MOV wire
connected to the chassis. Disconnect the end connected to the chassis. Insulate and secure
the wire end to guard against unintentional contact with chassis or components. Refer to
Figure 2.3 for locations.
8 Locate the green/yellow MOV wire connected to the PE bus bar. Disconnect the end
connected to the bus bar. Insulate and secure the wire end to guard against unintentional
contact with chassis or components. Refer to Figure 2.3 for locations.
10 Locate the MOV wire connected to the chassis. Disconnect, insulate
and secure the wire end to guard against unintentional contact with
chassis or components. Refer to Figure 2.3 for locations.
Input Power Conditioning

Certain events on the power system supplying an IPS Tempo can cause
component damage or shortened product life.
All IPS Tempos

• The power source has power factor correction capacitors switched in and out
of the system, either by the user or by the power company.
• The power source has intermittent voltage spikes in excess of 6000 volts.
These spikes could be caused by other equipment on the line or by events
such as lightening strikes.
• The power source has frequent interruptions.
5 HP or Less (includes all factors above)

• The nearest supply transformer is larger than 100kVA or the available short
circuit (fault) current is greater than 100,000 A.
• The impedance in front of the drive is less than 0.5%.
It is recommended that the user install a minimum amount of impedance
between the drive and the source if any of the above conditions exist. This
impedance can come from the supply transformer, the cable between the
transformer and the drive or an additional transformer or reactor.
AC Input Phase Selection for Single Phase Operation (Frames 5-7 Only)
The IPS Tempo is typically used with a three-phase input supply. Frames 5-7
have been listed to operate on single-phase input power with the requirement
that the output current is derated by 50% of the three-phase ratings identified on
pages 4-9 through 4-12.
ATTENTION: Ensure that all power to the IPS Tempo has been
removed before performing the following. Failure to follow this
precaution could result in a shock hazard.
Moving the “Line Type” jumper shown in Figure 3.2 (or on the Precharge
Board for Frame 7) will allow single or three-phase operation.
Important: Frames 8-10 are not designed for single-phase operation.
Important: When selecting single-phase operation, input power must be

applied to the R (L1) and S (L2) terminals only. This ensures that
the fan will be properly powered. Refer to Figure 2.2 and Table 2.2
for the terminal block location and Figure 5.2 for the terminal
layout.
3-PH 1-PH
LINE
TYPE
SPARE 1
Optional SPARE 2
Communications
Module Phase Selection
Jumper
USE 75 C CU WIRE ONLY
17 9
OUTPUT
21
INPUT AC Fan Voltage
690 Volt Tap
600 Volt Tap
480 Volt Tap
400 Volt Tap
Figure 3.2 – Typical Locations - Phase Select Jumper and Transformer (Frame 5 Shown)
Fan Circuit Power Supply
Important: Some drives utilize a fan transformer to power the internal fan(s).
This transformer is sized specifically for the internal fan(s) and
must not be used to power other circuitry.
Frames 5 & 6 Fan Connections
No. of
Enclosure Rating (120VAC) Fans Connect at …
IP00, NEMA/UL Type Open 100 VA (Frame 5) 1 N/A (Connected internally)
138 VA (Frame 6) A transformer (located behind Power
IP20, NEMA/UL Type 1 100 VA (Frame 5) 1 TB) matches the input line voltage to 690 Volt Tap
138 VA (Frame 6) the internal fan voltage. If line voltage 600 Volt Tap
is different than the voltage class 480 Volt Tap
specified on the drive nameplate, it 400 Volt Tap
may be necessary to change

transformer taps (see below).
Frame 6 Transformer Tap Access
ATTENTION: Ensure that all power to the IPS Tempo has been
removed before performing the following. Failure to follow this
precaution could result in a shock hazard.
The transformer is located behind the Power Terminal Block shown in Figure
3.2. Access is gained by releasing the terminal block from the rail. To release
terminal block and change tap:
Step 1. Locate the small metal tab at the bottom of the end block.
Step 2. Press the tab in and pull the top of the block out. Repeat for next block
if desired.
Step 3. Select appropriate transformer tap.
Step 4. Replace block(s) in reverse order.
Frame 7 Fan Connections

No. of
IP00, NEMA/UL Type Open 250 VA 1 N/A (Connected internally)
IP20, NEMA/UL Type 1 250 VA 1

No. of
IP00, NEMA/UL Type Open 500 VA 1 TB9
IP20, NEMA/UL Type 1 500 VA 1 A transformer matches the input Input Line Voltage
line voltage to the internal fan 480/400V AC, 50/60 Hz
voltage. If line voltage is different F1 F2
than the voltage class specified
on the drive nameplate, it may be H1 H2 H3
necessary to change transformer 480 400 0

taps (see below).
115 JMP 0
F3
X1 XF X2
to TB9

No. of
IP00, NEMA/UL Type Open 500 VA 2 TB9
IP20, NEMA/UL Type 1 500 VA 2 A transformer (see page 2-4 for Input Line Voltage
location) matches the input line 480/400V AC, 50/60 Hz
voltage to the internal voltage F1 F2
used for the capacitor fan and
H1 H2 H3
phase detector module. If the line
voltage is different than the 480 400 0
voltage class specified on the
drive nameplate, it may be 115 JMP 0
necessary to change transformer F3
X1 XF X2
taps (as shown).
to TB9
Frame 9 Blower Operation

Frame 9 drives use a single-phase capacitor bank fan and a three-phase blower
for cooling. Proper phasing must be supplied to terminals R, S, and T of the
Power Terminal Block (AC drives) or the Blower Terminal Block (DC drives)
to assure correct blower rotation. To verify this, a Phase Monitor (see page 2-4
for location) is used.
When wiring is complete, apply drive power. If
phasing is correct, a solid triangle will be displayed on
the Phase Monitor. v ~
L1 L2 L3
If the blower does not operate:
Step 1. Remove all input power and wait 5 minutes
for the DC bus to discharge. Verify that the DC bus has discharged by
measuring across the + and – DC bus terminals. The reading must be
less than 50 volts.
Step 2. Verify blower fuses and replace if necessary.
Step 3. Switch any two input power leads at the top of the blower fuse block.
Step 4. Apply power and verify proper operation.
Fan/Blower Terminal Blocks

TB9, TB10 Blower TB TB12
Line
120V R S T Line
120V
120V 120V
AC Input 120V AC Input 120V
Neutral Neutral
N To Fan(s) N To Fan(s)
N N
Ground Ground
PE PE
PE PE
NC 7 NC 7
Frames 8-10 Frame 9 Only Frame 10, AC Input, IP20 Only
Fan Transformer Specifications/Fusing
Recommended Fuses
Frame Rating Primary (Quantity 2) Secondary (Quantity 1)
8&9 500 VA 2.8A, 600V AC, KLDR/ATQR Type 6.25A, 250V AC, Time Delay
10 1000 VA 6A, 600V AC, KLDR/ATQR Type 9A, 250V AC, Time Delay
Three-Phase Blower Fusing

Frame Recommended Fuses (Quantity 3)
9 5A, 600V AC, Time Delay

No. of
IP00, NEMA/UL Type 1000 VA 3 TB9, 10 & 12
Open Requires user supplied 120V AC. See Table 5.2 for TB locations
and the figure below for terminal designations.
IP20, NEMA/UL Type 1 1000 VA 3 TB9, 10 & 12 Input Line Voltage
A transformer matches the input 480/400V AC, 50/60 Hz
line voltage to the internal fan F1 F2
voltage. If line voltage is different
H1 H2 H3
than the voltage class specified on
the drive nameplate, it may be 480 400 0
necessary to change transformer

taps (see below). 115 JMP 0
F3
X1 XF X2
to TB9
Additional Frame 10 Wiring Requirement for IP00 AC Input Drives

The Inverter and Converter sections of Frame 10 AC Input IP00, NEMA/UL
Type Open drives are shipped separately. Once installed, the following
connections will be required.
• DC Link Choke Wiring
DC link chokes are supplied loose for customer mounting and wiring in
IP00 drives.
• Thermistor Wiring
Thermistor wiring will be coiled loose in the Converter section for shipping.
The wire must be routed through the enclosure wall and connected to the
mating connector located above the HIM cradle.
Making Sure Environmental Conditions are Met
Important: Failure to meet the following conditions may result in erratic

operation and/or IPS Tempo damage.
Before deciding on an installation site, consider the following guidelines:
• Verify that NEMA 1 enclosure IPS Tempos can be kept clean and dry.
• The area chosen should allow the space required for proper air flow as
defined on page 3-9.
• Be sure that the NEMA 1 enclosure is installed away from oil, coolants, or
other airborne contaminants.
• Do not install the IPS Tempo above 1000 meters (3300 feet) without
derating output power. For every 91.4 meters (300 feet) above 1000 meters
(3300 feet), derate the output current 1%.
• Verify that the IPS Tempo location will meet the environmental conditions
specified in Appendix A.
Minimum Mounting Clearances
Frames 0-6
Be sure there is adequate clearance for air circulation around the enclosure. For
best air movement, do not mount IPS Tempos directly above each other. Note
that no devices are to be mounted behind the IPS Tempo. This area must be
kept clear of all control and power wiring. Refer to Figure 3.3 for recommended
air flow clearances.
101.6 mm 101.6 mm 101.6 mm 101.6 mm

(4.0 in.) (4.0 in.) (4.0 in.) (4.0 in.)
PWR PWR
PWR PWR RDY RDY
RDY RDY
DRIVE
MS
50.8 mm DRIVE
MS
DRIVE
MS
NET A
DRIVE
MS
NET A
(2.0 in.)
NET A NET A
NET B NET B
NET B NET B
101.6 mm 101.6 mm 101.6 mm 101.6 mm

(4.0 in.) (4.0 in.) (4.0 in.) (4.0 in.)
With Adhesive Label Over Adhesive Label is Removed from

Cooling Vents the Cooling Vents
Figure 3.3 – Minimum Mounting Clearances
Frames 7-10
The drive must be mounted vertically with sufficient space at the top, sides, and
front of the cabinet to allow for proper heat dissipation.
Frame Recommendations
7 Allow a minimum of 152 mm (6.0 in.) at the top and bottom of the enclosure and 102 mm (4.0
in.) on the sides.
8-10 Allow a minimum of 152 mm (6.0 in.) at the top of the enclosure. Additionally, allow a
minimum of 102 mm (4.0 in.) on each side OR 152 mm (6.0 in.) in the back.
IPS Tempo Dimensions and Weights

Overall dimension and weights are illustrated in Figures 3.4 through 3.7 as an
aid in calculating the total area required by the IPS Tempos. Weights include
HIM.
A
15.0 (0.59) D
5.8 (0.23) dia. see below
C
B
E
CAUTION
HOT surfaces can cause severe burns
5.5 (0.22) - Frames 0-1

8.0 7.0 (0.28) - Frames 2-3
(0.31) 3 Places
A B C D E Weight
Frame HP mm (in) mm (in) mm (in) mm (in) mm (in) kg(lb)
0 5.0 to 7.5 @ 480 VAC 90.0 336.0 200.0 80.0 320.0 5.22
5.0 to 7.5 @ 600 VAC (4.33) (13.23) (7.87) (3.15) (12.60) (9.5)
1 5.0 to 7.5 @ 240 VAC 135.0 336.0 200.0 105.0 320.0 7.03
10 to 15 @ 480 VAC (5.31) (13.23) (7.87) (4.13) (12.60) (15.5)
10 to 15 @ 600 VAC
2 10 @ 240 VAC 222.0 342.5 200.0 192.0 320.0 12.52
20 to 25 @ 480 VAC (8.74) (13.48) (7.87) (7.56) (12.60) (27.6)
20 to 25 @ 600 VAC
3 15 to 20 @ 240 VAC 222.0 517.5 200.0 192.0 500.0 18.55
30 to 50 @ 480 VAC (8.74) (20.37) (7.87) (7.56) (19.69) (40.9)
30 to 50 @ 600 VAC
Figure 3.4 – IPS Tempo Dimensions Frames 0 - 3
A
15.0 (0.59)
7.0 (0.28) dia. D
C
7.0 (0.28)
8.0 3 Places
(0.31) Lifting Holes
4 Places
A B C D E Weight
4 25 to 30 @ 240 VAC 220.0 758.8 201.7 192.0 738.2 24.49
60 @ 480 VAC (8.66) (29.87) (7.94) (7.56) (29.06) (54.0)
60 @ 600 VAC
Figure 3.5 – IPS Tempo Dimensions Frame 4
6.5 (0.26)
A
259.1 (10.20) 15.0 (0.59)
37.6 (1.48)
D Detail C
B
E
CAUTION
Lifting Holes - 4 Places

6.5 (0.26) 12.7 (0.50) Dia.
12.5
(0.49)
A B1 C D E Weight
5 40 to 50 @ 240 VAC 308.9 644.5 275.4 225.0 625.0 37.19
75 to 100 @ 480 VAC (12.16) (25.37) (10.84) (8.86) (24.61) (82.0)
75 to 100 @ 600 VAC
75 to 100 @ 650 VDC
1. When using the supplied junction box (100 HP IPS Tempos only), add an additional 45.1 mm (1.78 in.) to this
dimension.
8.5 (0.33)
A
18.0 (0.71)
95) 360.6 (14.20)
Detail
D C
A B C D E Weight
6 60 to 75 @ 240 VAC 60 403.9 850.0 275.5 300.0 825.0 71.44
to 75 @ 325 VDC (15.90) (33.46) (10.85) (9.81) (32.48) (157.5)
125 to 150 @ 600 VAC
125 to 150 @ 650 VDC
6 100 @ 240 VAC 403.9 850.0 275.5 300.0 825.0 85.04
100 @ 325 VDC (15.90) (33.46) (10.85) (9.81) (32.48) (187.5)
6 200 @ 480 VAC 403.9 850.0 275.5 300.0 825.0 88.64
200 @ 650 VDC (15.90) (33.46) (10.85) (9.81) (32.48) (165.5)
Bottom View Dimensions

Frame Rating Dimensions
0 All 96.0 (3.78)
75.0 (2.95)
55.0 (2.17)
35.0 (1.38) 22.2 (0.87) Dia. – 4 Places
30.2
(1.19)
187.5
(7.38) 185.0
(7.28)
132.9
(5.23)
41.9 (1.65)
56.1 (2.21)
75.9 (2.99)
96.0 (3.78)
1 All 108.5 (4.27)

87.5 (3.44)
67.5 (2.66)
47.5 (1.87) 22.2 (0.87) Dia.
28.6 (1.13) Dia. 3 Places
25.5
(1.00)
162.3
187.6 (6.39)
(7.39) 185.1
(7.29)
133.3
(5.25)
43.0 (1.69)
70.0 (2.76)
75.9 (2.99)
96.0 (3.78)
2 All 167.5 (6.59)

156.9 (6.18) 28.7 (1.13) Dia.
3 Places
22.4 (0.88) Dia.
2 Places
157.5 184.8
(6.20) (7.28)
150.9
(5.94)
112.1
(4.41)
39.3 (1.55)
57.2 (2.25)
72.7 (2.86)
106.0 (4.17)
139.4 (5.49)
177.4 (6.98)

3 All except 105.3 (4.15)
94.7 (3.73) 37.3 (1.47) Dia.
50HP, 480 V, 22.2 (0.87) Dia.
2 Places
28.7 (1.13) Dia.
(37 kW, 400V) 2 Places
184.5
165.1 (7.26)
(6.50)
151.1 160.1
(5.95) (6.30)
127.7
(5.03)
22.7 (0.89)
29.0 (1.14)
66.0 (2.60)
97.0 (3.82)
137.2 (5.40)
187.0 (7.36)
50 HP, 480V 105.3 (4.15)

34.9 (1.37) Dia.
2 Places
(37 kW, 400 V) 94.7 (3.73) 46.7 (1.84) Dia.
2 Places
Normal Duty 28.7 (1.13) Dia.
2 Places
IPS Tempo
184.5
(7.26)
165.1
(6.50) 160.1
(6.30)
127.7
(5.03)
Vent Plate
22.7 (0.89)
29.0 (1.14)
66.0 (2.60)
130.0 (5.12)
186.0 (7.32)
4 All 76.0 (2.99) 28.7 (1.13) Dia. 47.0 (1.85) Dia.

2 Places 2 Places
65.3 (2.57) 54.1 (2.13) Dia.
22.2 (0.87) Dia. 2 Places
189.7
(7.47)
177.9
(7.00)
157.9
(6.21)
141.9
(5.59)
105.1
(4.14)
26.8 (1.06)
36.8 (1.45)
50.7 (2.00)
63.8 (2.51)
112.0 (4.41)
180.0 (7.09)

5 75 HP, 480V, 104.0 (4.09) 34.9 (1.37) Dia.
22.2 (0.87) Dia.
(55 kW, 400V) 93.2 (3.67) 2 Places
2 Places
Normal Duty
IPS Tempo 62.7 (2.47) Dia.
2 Places
241.9
(9.52)
229.5
(9.04)
220.0
(8.66)
184.0
(7.24)
159.5
(6.28)
96.0
(3.78)
28.0 (1.10)
45.0 (1.77)
85.0 (3.35)
150.0 (5.91)
215.0 (8.46)
255.0 (10.04)
100 HP, 480 V 34.9 (1.37) Dia.

62.7 (2.47) Dia.
Normal Duty 42.6 (1.68) 22.2 (0.87) Dia.
2 Places
2 Places
IPS Tempo 31.9 (1.26) Removable Junction Box
241.9
(9.52)
223.5
(8.80)
188.5
(7.42)
184.3
(7.26)
153.5
(6.04)
96.0
(3.78)
28.0 (1.10)
44.0 (1.73)
66.4 (2.61)
128.0 (5.04)
232.3 (9.15)
6 All 34.9 (1.37) Dia. 22.2 (0.87) Dia.

56.2 (2.21) 3 Places 62.7 (2.47) Dia. 4 Places
45.6 (1.80) 3 Places
Removable Junction Box
242.0 219.0
(9.53) (8.62)
222.3
185.4
(8.75)
(7.30)
148.5
(5.85) 151.8
116.6 (5.98)
(4.59)
47.1 (1.85)
52.1 (2.05)
69.1 (2.72)
130.1 (5.12)
230.1 (9.06)
280.1 (11.03)
330.1 (13.00)
609.6 (24.00)
25.4 (1.00) 558.8 (22.00)
105.5 (4.15)
Air
Outlet
1574.8
(62.00) DANGER
REMOTE SOURCE(S) OF POWER.
DISCONNECT ALL SOURCES OF POWER
BEFORE OPENING THE DOOR.
DANGER
1543.0 ±1.5 ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD FROM

ENERGY STORAGE CAPACITORS.
VERIFY LOW VOLTAGE DISCHARGE
BEFORE SERVICING.
SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
(62.75 ±0.06)
1061.5
(41.79)
140.0
(5.51)
16.8 (0.66) 13.5 (0.53) Dia. 12.7 (0.50) Dia.

4 Places (See Note A) Lifting Holes
450.7
(17.75) Max. Note A:
425.5 Mount with 0.50 Inch UNC Grade 5 or Higher Screws
(16.75) or
287.0 M12 Material Class 5.6 or Higher Screws
(11.30) Use Flat Washer with each Fastener
Air Inlet
Figure 3.8 – Frame 5 NEMA/UL Type 12 Standalone (400-690V drives only
Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches)
Approx. Weight 1 kg (lbs.)

Frame
Description Drive Drive & Packaging

5 Standalone 102.51 (226.0) 154.68 (341.0)
1. Weights include HIM and Standard I/O.
711.3 (28.00)
24.1 (0.90) 663.1 (26.10)
123.6 (4.90)
1828.8
(72.00)
1795.2
(70.70)
1279.5
(50.40)
283.3
(11.20)
16.8 (0.66) 13.5 (0.53) Dia. 12.7 (0.50) Dia.

4 Places (See Note A) Lifting Holes
Note A:
487.8 Mount with 0.50 Inch UNC Grade 5 or Higher Screws
(19.20) Max. or
M12 Material Class 5.6 or Higher Screws
Use Flat Washer with each Fastener
Air Inlet
8.0
(0.30)
Figure 3.9 – Frame 6 NEMA/UL Type 12 Standalone (400-690V drives only)
Approx. Weight 1 kg (lbs.)

Frame
Description Drive Drive & Packaging

6 Standalone 176.90 (390.0) 229.07 (505.0)
1. Weights include HIM and Standard I/O.
514.4 (20.25)
477.3 (18.79)
440.2 (17.33) 406.9 (16.02)
1424.2
(56.07)
1447.8
PORT
(57.00)
MOD
NET A
NET B
1498.6
(59.00)
Lifting Holes
4 Places
406.9
(16.02)
352.8
261.6
(13.89)
(10.30)
406.9 210.8
134.6
(12.30) (8.30)
(5.30)
41.2 (1.62)
90.4 (3.56) 59.2
(2.33)
179.3 (7.06)
304.8 (12.00)
431.8 (17.00)
Figure 3.10 – IP20, NEMA/UL Type 1 – Frame 7
Approximate Weight 170 kg (375 lbs.) + 26 kg (58 lbs.) for shipping materials
Depth
Drive A B
Catalog No. (Behind Backplane) (Total Depth) B
20Bx365, 415, 481 254.0 (10.00) 889.0 (35.00)
20Bx535, 600, 730 381.0 (15.00) 1016.0 (40.00)
2373.9
(93.46)
757.7
(29.83)
Figure 3.11 – IP20, NEMA/UL Type 1 – Frames 8 & 9
Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches).

889.0
(35.00)
2373.9
(93.46)
757.7 503.7
(29.83) (19.83)
1267.7
(49.91)
Figure 3.12 – IP20, NEMA/UL Type 1 – Frame 10

Lifting the IPS Tempo Refer to the following for guidelines in lifting Frames 4-10.
ATTENTION: To guard against possible personal injury and/or

equipment damage...
• Do Not allow any part of the drive or lifting mechanism to make
contact with electrically charged conductors or components.
• At no time should a person or their limbs be directly underneath
the items being lifted.
• Do not subject the load to high rates of acceleration or
deceleration.
• Inspect all lifting hardware for proper attachment before lifting
drive unit.
Frames 4-6
❑
45
>1/2 A
❑ Frame 4
(x4)
Frame 4 – 24.49 kg (54.0 lbs.)
❑ Frames 5 and 6 – IP20, NEMA/UL Type 1
(x4)
Frame 5 – 37.19 kg (82.0 lbs.)

Frame 6 – 71.44 kg (157.5 lbs.)
Frame 7
❑ IP20, NEMA/UL Type 1
Lifting Holes - 4 Places
Frames 8-10
Important: Braces attached to the front of Frame 8 or Frame 10 IP20,

NEMA/UL Type 1 drives are required for structural integrity. If
necessary, the braces can be removed for wiring, but must be
replaced upon completion.
❑ IP20, NEMA/UL Type 1
Approximate Frame 8 509 kg (1122 lbs.) + 47 kg (103 lbs.) for shipping materials
Weight Frame 9 526 kg (1159 lbs.) + 47 kg (103 lbs.) for shipping materials
Frame 10 867 kg (1912 lbs.) + 91 kg (200 lbs.) for shipping materials
Important: a lifting angle must be used. Do Not use the

lifting holes on the side of the cabinet
>A
>60°
A
Mounting the IPS Tempo Refer to Figures 3.4 through 3.12 for IPS Tempo mounting dimensions.
Attach the IPS Tempo to the vertical surface using the mounting holes
provided.
Note: IPS Tempo dimension mounting hole centers are located on rear of IPS
Tempo for reference.
Verifying the IPS Tempo’s Watts Loss Rating

When mounting the IPS Tempo inside another enclosure, determine the watts
loss rating of the IPS Tempo from Tables A.1 and A.2. These tables list the
typical full load power loss watts value at a carrier frequency of 4 kHz.
Routing Input, Motor All wiring must be installed in conformance with applicable local, national and
Output, Ground, and Control international codes, such as NEC/CEC. Signal wiring, control wiring and
Wiring for the IPS Tempo power wiring must be routed in separate conduits to prevent interference with
IPS Tempo operation.
Note: No wires are to be routed behind the IPS Tempo. Use grommets, when
hubs are not provided, to guard against wire chaffing.
Figures 3.13 and 3.14 show the wire routing, grounding terminal and power
terminal blocks of the IPS Tempos.
ATTENTION: Do not route signal and control wiring with power

wiring in the same conduit. This can cause interference with IPS
Tempo operation. Failure to observe this precaution could result in
damage to or destruction of the equipment.
Do not route more than three sets of motor leads through a single conduit. This
will minimize cross-talk that could reduce the effectiveness of noise reduction
methods. If more than three IPS Tempo/motor connections per conduit are
required, shielded cable must be used. If possible, each conduit should contain
only one set of motor leads.
ATTENTION: Unused wires in conduit must be grounded at both

ends to avoid a possible shock hazard caused by induced voltages.
Also, if an IPS Tempo sharing a conduit is being serviced or
installed, all IPS Tempos using this conduit should be disabled to
eliminate the possible shock hazard from cross-coupled motor
leads. Failure to observe these precautions could result in bodily
injury.
Signal and Control

Terminal Block
Optional
Communications
Module
Power
Terminal Block WIRE
STRIP
POWER
CONTROL
75C Cu Wire
6 AWG [10MM2] Max.
12 IN. LBS.
1.4 N-M } TORQUE
BR1 B V/T2 W/T3 PE R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
AUX IN+ AUX OUT–
SHLD SHLD
Terminal
Shield
Motor Wiring
I/O and Signal Wiring
Input Power Wiring
(Frame 2 shown)
Figure 3.13 – Wire Routing and Terminal Block Locations (Frame 2 Shown)
Terminal
Shield
Signal and Control Optional

Communications
Terminal Block Module
USE 75° C CU WIRE ONLY
17 9
Power Terminal
21
OUTPUT INPUT AC
Block
I/O and Signal Input Power Wiring I/O and Signal

Wiring Wiring
Motor Wiring
60 to 75 HP, 480V 100 HP, 480V

Figure 3.14 – Wire Routing and Terminal Block Locations (Frame 5 Shown)
Grounding the IPS Tempo

applicable local, national and international codes. Failure to
the equipment.
The IPS Tempo Safety Ground - PE terminal must be connected to system

ground. Ground impedance must conform to the requirements of national and
local industrial safety regulations and/or electrical codes. The integrity of all
ground connections should be periodically checked.
For installations within a cabinet, a single safety ground point or ground bus bar
connected directly to building steel should be used. All circuits including the
AC input ground conductor should be grounded independently and directly to
this point/bar.
U (T1)
R (L1) V (T2)
S (L2) W (T3)
T (L3)
PE
SHLD
Figure 3.15 – Typical Grounding
Safety Ground - PE
This is the safety ground for the IPS Tempo that is required by code. This point
must be connected to adjacent building steel (girder, joist), a floor ground rod
or bus bar. Grounding points must comply with national and local industrial
safety regulations and/or electrical codes.
Shield Termination - SHLD

The SHLD terminal located on the cable entry plate provides a grounding point
for the motor cable shield.
The motor cable shield should be connected to this terminal (IPS Tempo end)
and the motor frame (motor end). A shield-terminating cable gland may also be
used.
When shielded cable is used for control and signal wiring, the shield should
be grounded at the source end only, not at the IPS Tempo end.
RFI Filter Grounding
ATTENTION: Using an optional RFI filter may result in relatively

high ground leakage currents. Therefore, the filter must only be
used in installations with grounded AC supply systems and be
permanently installed and solidly grounded (bonded) to the
building power distribution ground. Ensure that the incoming
supply neutral is solidly connected (bonded) to the same building
power distribution ground. Grounding must not rely on flexible
cables and should not include any form of plug or socket that would
permit inadvertent disconnection. Some local codes may require
redundant ground connections. The integrity of all connections
should be periodically checked. Failure to observe this precaution
could result in damage to equipment, severe bodily injury or loss
of life.
Notes
Chapter 4
Wiring Requirements for the IPS Tempo

the equipment.
Wire size should be determined based on the size of conduit openings, and
applicable local, national, and international codes, such as NEC/CEC. Evaluate
wire sizes, branch circuit protection, and E-stop wiring before continuing with
the IPS Tempo installation.
Power Wiring
ATTENTION: National codes and standards (NEC, VDE, BSI,
etc.) and local codes outline provisions for safely installing
electrical equipment. Installation must comply with specifications
regarding wire types, conductor sizes, branch circuit protection and
disconnect devices. Failure to do so may result in personal injury
and/or equipment damage.
Input power wiring should be sized according to applicable codes to handle the
IPS Tempo’s continuous rated input current. Output wiring should be sized
according to applicable codes to handle the IPS Tempo’s continuous rated
output current.
Cable Types Acceptable for 200-600 Volt Installations

A variety of cable types are acceptable for IPS Tempo installations. For many
installations, unshielded cable is adequate, provided it can be separated from
sensitive circuits.
As an approximate guide, allow a spacing of 0.3 meters (1 foot) for every 10
meters (32.8 feet) of length. In all cases, long parallel runs must be avoided. Do
not use cable with an insulation thickness less than or equal to 15 mils (0.4
mm/0.015 in). Use copper wire only. Wire gauge requirements and
recommendations are based on 75 degrees C. Do not reduce wire gauge when
using higher temperature wire. Refer to Table 4.1.
Unshielded
THHN, THWN or similar wire is acceptable for IPS Tempo installation in dry
environments provided adequate free air space and/or conduit fill rates limits
are provided. Do not use THHN or similarly coated wire in wet areas. Any wire
chosen must have a minimum insulation thickness of 15 mils and should not
have large variations in insulation concentricity.
4-2 Wiring Requirements for the IPS Tempo
Shielded/Armored Cable
Shielded cable contains all of the general benefits of multi-conductor cable
with the added benefit of a copper braided shield that can contain much of the
noise generated by a typical IPS Tempo. Strong consideration for shielded
cable should be given in installations with sensitive equipment such as weigh
scales, capacitive proximity switches, and other devices that may be affected by
electrical noise in the distribution system. Applications with large numbers of
IPS Tempos in a similar location, imposed EMC regulations, or a high degree
of communications/networking are also good candidates for shielded cable.
Shielded cable may also help reduce shaft voltage and induced bearing currents
for some applications. In addition, the increased impedance of shielded cable
may help extend the distance that the motor can be located from the IPS Tempo
without the addition of motor protective devices such as terminator networks.
Consideration should be given to all of the general specifications dictated by
the environment of the installation, including temperature, flexibility, moisture
characteristics, and chemical resistance. In addition, a braided shield should be
included and be specified by the cable manufacturer as having coverage of at
least 75%. An additional foil shield can greatly improve noise containment.
A good example of recommended cable is Belden 295xx (xx determines
gauge). This cable has four (4) XLPE insulated conductors with a 100%
coverage foil and an 85% coverage copper braided shield (with drain wire)
surrounded by a PVC jacket. Refer to Table 4.1.
Other types of shielded cable are available, but the selection of these types may
limit the allowable cable length. Particularly, some of the newer cables twist 4
conductors of THHN wire and wrap them tightly with a foil shield. This
construction can greatly increase the cable charging current required and
reduce the overall IPS Tempo performance. Unless specified in the individual
distance tables as tested with the IPS Tempo, these cables are not recommended
and their performance against the lead length limits supplied is not known.
Table 4.1 – Recommended Shielded Wire
Location Rating/Type Description

Standard 600V, 90°C (194°F) • Four tinned copper conductors with XLPE insulation.
(Option 1) XHHW2/RHW-2 • Copper braid/aluminum foil combination shield and
Anixter tinned copper drain wire.
B209500-B209507, • PVC jacket.
Belden 29501-29507,
or equivalent
Standard Tray rated 600V, • Three tinned copper conductors with XLPE
(Option 2) 90° C insulation.
(194° F) RHH/RHW-2 • 5 mil single helical copper tape (25% overlap min.)
Anixter OLF-7xxxxx or with three bare copper grounds in contact with
equivalent shield.
• PVC jacket.
Class I & II; Tray rated 600V, 90° C • Three bare copper conductors with XLPE insulation
Division I & II (194° F) RHH/RHW-2 and impervious corrugated continuously welded
Anixter 7V-7xxxx-3G aluminum armor.
or equivalent • Black sunlight-resistant PVC jacket overall.
• Three copper grounds on #10 AWG and smaller.
Wiring Requirements for the IPS Tempo 4-3
Power Wire Sizes

Input power wiring should be sized according to applicable codes to handle the
IPS Tempo’s continuous-rated input current. Output wiring should be sized
according to applicable codes to handle the IPS Tempo’s continuous-rated
output current. Refer to Table 5.2 for minimum and maximum wire sizes.
Using Input/Output Contactors

Input Contactor Precautions
ATTENTION: A contactor or other device that routinely

disconnects and reapplies the AC line to the IPS Tempo to start and
stop the motor can cause IPS Tempo hardware damage. The IPS
Tempo is designed to use control input signals that will start and
stop the motor. If an AC input disconnect device is used, operation
must not exceed one cycle per minute or IPS Tempo damage will
occur.
to disconnect the AC line from the IPS Tempo. An auxiliary braking
method may be required.
Output Contactor Precaution

w
ATTENTION: To guard against IPS Tempo damage when using

output contactors, the following information must be read and
understood. One or more output contactors may be installed
between the IPS Tempo and motor(s) for the purpose of
disconnecting or isolating certain motors/loads. If a contactor is
opened while the IPS Tempo is operating, power will be removed
from the respective motor, but the IPS Tempo will continue to
produce voltage at the output terminals. Disconnecting a motor
under load can cause damage to the contactor as well as the IPS
Tempo because the DV/DT (change in voltage/Change in time) is
severe causing a rapid increase in current at the contacts and the
resultant current draw from the IPS Tempo. If at all possible, a
control scheme should send a stop signal to the IPS Tempo to
minimize any energy being sent to the motor before opening the
contactors. In addition, reconnecting a motor to an active IPS
Tempo (by closing the contactor) could produce excessive current
that may cause the IPS Tempo to fault. If any of these conditions
are determined to be undesirable or unsafe, an auxiliary contact on
the output contactor should be wired to a IPS Tempo digital input
that is programmed as “Enable.” This will cause the IPS Tempo to
execute a coast-to-stop (cease output) whenever an output contactor
is opened, helping to prevent the IPS Tempo from operating without
the contactors’ prior closure.
Common Bus/Precharge Notes

The following notes must be read and understood.
Important: If IPS Tempos are used with a disconnect switch to a common DC

bus, then an auxiliary contact on the disconnect must be connected
to a digital input of the IPS Tempo. The corresponding input
(parameters 364-366) must be set to option 30, “Precharge
Enable.” This provides the proper precharge interlock, guarding
against possible damage to the IPS Tempo when connected to a
common DC bus.
Control and Signal Wiring

Table 4.2 – Control Terminal Block Specifications
Wire Size Range1

Name Frame Description Max Min Torque
I/O Terminal Block All Signal & Control 2.1mm 0.3 mm 0.6 N-m
Connections (14 AWG) (22 AWG) (5.2 in-lb)
Encoder Terminal All Encoder Power & Signal 0.75 mm 0.196 mm 0.6 N-m
Block Connections (18 AWG) (24 AWG) (5.2 in-lb)
1. Maximum/minimum sizes that the terminal block will accept. These are not recommendations.
ATTENTION: Verify the voltage rating of the I/O Interface board

before wiring any user devices. Failure to observe this precaution
could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment.
Table 4.3 – Recommended Signal and Control Wire
Min.
Signal Type/ Belden Wire Type(s) Insulation
Where Used (or equivalent) Description Rating
Analog I/O & PTC 8760/9460 0.750 mm2 (18AWG), twisted pair, 300V,
100% shield with drain 1 75-90° C
Remote Pot 8770 0.750 mm2 (18AWG), 3 cond., (167-194° F)
shielded
Encoder/Pulse I/O Combined: 9730 2 0.196 mm2 (24AWG), individually
<30 m (100 ft.) shielded
Encoder/Pulse I/O Signal: 9730/9728 (2) 0.196 mm2 (24AWG), indiv. shielded
30 to 152 m Power: 8790 3 0.750 mm2 (18AWG)
(100 to 500 ft.) Combined: 9892 4
0.330 mm2 or 0.500 mm2 (4)
(2)
Encoder/Pulse I/O Signal: 9730/9728 0.196 mm2 (24AWG), indiv. shielded
152 to 259 m Power: 8790 (3) 0.750 mm2 (18AWG)
(500 to 850 ft.) Combined: 9773/9774 0.750 mm2 (18AWG), indiv. shielded
5
pair
1. If the wires are short and contained within a cabinet which has no sensitive circuits, the use of shielded wire may
not be necessary, but is always recommended.
2. 9730 is 3 individually shielded pairs (2 channel + power). If 3 channel is required, use 9728.
3. 8790 is 1 shielded pair.
4. 9892 is 3 individually shielded pairs (3 channel), 0.33 mm2 (22 AWG) + 1 shielded pair 0.5 mm2 (20 AWG) for
power.
5. 9773 is 3 individually shielded pairs (2 channel + power). If 3 channel is required, use 9774.
Minimum
Type Wire Type(s) Description Insulation Rating
Unshielded Per US NEC or applicable national – 300V,
or local code 60 degrees C
Shielded Multi-conductor shielded cable 0.750 mm2 (18AWG), 3 (140 degrees F)
such as Belden 8770(or equiv.) conductor, shielded.
Meeting Encoder IPS Tempos can utilize an encoder for closed loop operation. Encoder
Specifications specifications are provided in Appendix A. IPS Tempos set up for V/Hz or SVC
regulation can utilize an encoder for closed loop speed regulation, but it is not
required.
Recommended Motor Lead Important: To reduce nuisance tripping and possible equipment damage,
Lengths motor lead length should not exceed (91 meters) 300 feet for any
or any non-inverter duty motor.
The length of cable between the IPS Tempo and motor may be limited for
various application reasons. The primary areas of concern are:
• Insulation damage due to reflected wave
• Cable charging
When total lead length exceeds 300 feet, nuisance trips caused by capacitive
current flow to ground can occur. Note that these capacitively-coupled currents
should be taken into consideration when working in areas where IPS Tempos
are running. If the motor lead length must exceed these limits, the addition of
output reactors or other steps must be taken to avoid problems.
Your application may be restricted to a shorter lead length due to:
• The type of wire (shielded or unshielded)
• The placement of wire (for example, in conduit or a cable tray)
• The type of output reactor
• The type of motor (voltage class, 1000 V, 1200 V, or 1600 V)
• IPS Tempo carrier frequency
Figure 4.1 illustrates how to calculate motor lead lengths. The examples shown
assume a maximum lead length of 300 feet.
Reflected Wave Compensation

You must understand the effects and restrictions when applying the IPS Tempo
to extended motor lead length applications. Proper cable type, motor and IPS
Tempo selection is required to minimize the potential risks.
The reflected wave phenomenon, also known as transmission line effect,
produces very high peak voltages at the motor terminals due to voltage
reflection. Voltages in excess of twice the DC bus voltage (650 V DC nominal
@480 V input) result at the motor and can cause motor winding failure.
While Allen-Bradley drives have patented software that limits the voltage peak
to two times the DC bus voltage and reduce the number of occurrences, many
motors have inadequate insulation systems to tolerate these peaks.
IPS IPS IPS IPS

Tempo Tempo Tempo Tempo
50′
150′ 150′ 200’ 300′
250′
Motor
Motor Motor
50′ 50′
Motor Motor
Motor Motor
Figure 4.1 – How to Calculate Motor Lead Lengths
The correction software modifies the PWM modulator to prevent PWM pulses
less than a minimum time from being applied to the motor. The minimum time
between PWM pulses is 10 microseconds (ms). The modifications to the PWM
modulator limit the overvoltage transient to 2.25 per unit volts line-to-line peak
at 600 feet of cable.
• 400 V Line = 540V DC bus (max) x 2.25 = 1200 V
Parameter Compensation (56) is used to enable or disable this feature. Refer to
the parameter description in chapter 9 for more information.
Figure 4.2 shows the inverter line-to-line output voltage (top trace) and the
motor line-to-line voltage (bottom trace) for a 10 HP, 460 V AC inverter and an
unloaded 10 HP AC induction motor at 60 Hz operation. 500 ft. of #12 AWG
PVC cable connects the IPS Tempo to the motor.
500 Inverter
V/div
<Tα
0
1670 Vpk
500 Motor
V/div
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
Time (µsec)
Figure 4.2 – Inverter and Motor Line-to-Line Voltages
Initially, the cable is in a fully charged condition. A transient disturbance

occurs by discharging the cable for approximately 4 ms. The propagation delay
between the inverter terminals and motor terminals is approximately 1 ms. The
small time between pulses of 4 ms does not provide sufficient time to allow the
decay of the cable transient. Thus, the second pulse arrives at a point in the
motor terminal voltage’s natural response and excites a motor overvoltage

transient greater than 2 per unit (pu).
The amplitude of the double pulsed motor overvoltage is determined by a
number of variables. These include the damping characteristics of the cable,
bus voltage, the time between pulses, the carrier frequency, modulation
technique, and duty cycle.
Figure 4.3 shows the per unit motor overvoltage as a function of cable length.
This is for no correction versus the modulation correction code for varied
lengths of #12 AWG PVC cable to 600 feet for a 4 kHz and 8 kHz carrier
frequencies. The output line-to-line voltage was measured at the motor
terminals in 100 feet increments.
Without the correction, the overvoltage increases to unsafe levels with
increasing cable length for both carrier frequencies.
The patented modulation correction code reduces the overvoltage for both
carrier frequencies and maintains a relatively flat overvoltage level for
increasing cable lengths beyond 300 feet.
No Correction vs Correction Method at 4 kHz and 8 kHz Carrier
Frequencies - Vbus = 650, fe = 60 Hz
2.6
No Correction 4 kHz Carrier
2.5 Corrected 4 kHz Carrier
2.4 No Correction 8 kHz Carrier
Corrected 8 kHz Carrier
per Unit Vout/Vbus
2.3
2.2
2.1
2
1.9
1.8
1.7
1.6
0 100 200 300 400 500 600
Cable Length (Feet)
Figure 4.3 – Motor Overvoltage as a Function of Cable Length
Selecting Input Line Branch

Protection ATTENTION: Most codes require that upstream branch circuit
protection be provided to protect input power wiring. Install the
fuses or circuit breakers recommended in Tables 4.4 through 4.8.
Do not exceed the fuse or circuit breaker ratings. Failure to observe
this precaution could result in a dangerous condition and/or damage
to equipment.
Input line branch circuit protection fuses or circuit breakers must be used to
protect the input power wiring. Tables 4.4 through 4.8 provide recommended
AC line input fuse and circuit breaker information. Both types of short circuit
protection are acceptable for UL and IEC requirements. The input fuse or
circuit breaker ratings listed in the tables are applicable for one IPS Tempo per
branch circuit. No other load may be applied to that circuit. Sizes listed are the
recommended sizes based on 40° C and the U.S. N.E.C. Other country, state or
local codes may require different ratings.
Fusing
If fuses are chosen as the desired protection method, refer to the recommended
types listed below. If available amp ratings do not match the tables provided,
the closest fuse rating that exceeds the IPS Tempo rating should be chosen.
• IEC – BS88 (British Standard) Parts 1 & 21 EN60269-1, Parts 1 & 2, type
gG or equivalent should be used.
• UL – UL Class CC, T or J must be used.
Circuit Breakers
The circuit breakers listed in Tables 4.4 through 4.8 are for inverse time circuit
breakers.
IEC and UL - devices are acceptable for IEC and UL installations.
1. Typical designations include, but may not be limited to, the following: Parts 1 & 2: AC,
AD, BC, BD, CD, DD, ED, EFS, EF, FF, FG, GF, GG, GH.
Table 4.4 – 208 Volt AC Input Protection Devices (See page 4-12 for Notes)
Motor
Dual Circuit Circuit
Drive HP PWM Temp. Input Element Time Non-Time Breaker Protector 140M Motor Protector with Adjustable Current
Frame
Catalog Rating Freq. (11) Ratings Output Amps Delay Fuse Delay Fuse (3) (4)
Range (5)(6)
Number ND HD kHz °C Amps kVA Cont. 1 Min. 3 Sec. Min. (1) Max. (2) Min. (1) Max. (2) Max. (8) Max. (8) Available Catalog Numbers - 140… (7)
208 Volt AC Input
2P2 0 0.5 0.33 4 50 1.9 0.7 2.5 2.8 3.8 3 6 3 10 15 3 M-C2E-B25 M-D8E-B25 – –
4P2 0 1 0.75 4 50 3.7 1.3 4.8 5.6 7.0 6 10 6 17.5 15 7 M-C2E-B63 M-D8E-B63 – –
6P8 1 2 1.5 4 50 6.8 2.4 7.8 10.4 13.8 10 15 10 30 30 15 M-C2E-C10 M-D8E-C10 M-F8E-C10 –
9P6 1 3 2 4 50 9.5 3.4 11 12.1 17 12 20 12 40 40 15 M-C2E-C16 M-D8E-C16 M-F8E-C16 –
015 1 5 3 4 50 15.7 5.7 17.5 19.3 26.3 20 35 20 70 70 30 M-C2E-C20 M-D8E-C20 M-F8E-C20 –
022 1 7.5 5 4 50 23.0 8.3 25.3 27.8 38 30 50 30 100 100 30 M-C2E-C25 M-D8E-C25 M-F8E-C25 -CMN-2500
028 2 10 7.5 4 50 29.6 10.7 32.2 38 50.6 40 70 40 125 125 50 – – M-F8E-C32 -CMN-4000
042 3 15 10 4 50 44.5 16.0 48.3 53.1 72.5 60 100 60 175 175 70 – – M-F8E-C45 -CMN-6300
052 3 20 15 4 50 51.5 17.1 56 64 86 80 125 80 200 200 100 – – – -CMN-6300
070 4 25 20 4 50 72 25.9 78.2 93 124 90 175 90 300 300 100 – – – -CMN-9000
080 4 30 25 4 50 84.7 30.5 92 117 156 110 200 110 350 350 150 – – – -CMN-9000
104 (12) 5 40 – 4 50 113 40.7 120 132 175 150 250 150 475 350 150 – – – –
– 30 4 50 84.7 30.5 92 138 175 125 200 125 350 300 150 – – – -CMN-9000
130 (12) 5 50 – 4 50 141 44.1 130 143 175 175 275 175 500 375 250 – – – –
– 40 4 50 113 35.3 104 156 175 125 225 125 400 300 150 – – – –
154 (12) 6 60 – 4 50 167 60.1 177 195 266 225 350 225 500 500 250 – – – –
– 50 4 50 141 50.9 150 225 300 200 300 200 500 450 250 – – – –
192 (12) 6 75 – 4 50 208 75.0 221 243 308 300 450 300 600 600 400 – – – –
– 60 4 50 167 60.1 177 266 308 225 350 225 500 500 250 – – – –
260 (12) 6 100 – 2 45 255 91.9 260 286 390 300 575 300 750 750 400 – – – –
– 75 2 50 199 71.7 205 305 410 225 450 225 600 600 400 – – – –
Motor
Frame
Range (5)(6)
240 Volt AC Input
2P2 0 0.5 0.33 4 50 1.7 0.7 2.2 2.4 3.3 3 6 3 10 15 3 M-C2E-B25 M-D8E-B25 – –
4P2 0 1 0.75 4 50 3.3 1.4 4.2 4.8 6.4 5 8 5 15 15 7 M-C2E-B63 M-D8E-B63 – –
6P8 1 2 1.5 4 50 5.9 2.4 6.8 9 12 10 15 10 25 25 15 M-C2E-C10 M-D8E-C10 M-F8E-C10 –
9P6 1 3 2 4 50 8.3 3.4 9.6 10.6 14.4 12 20 12 35 35 15 M-C2E-C10 M-D8E-C10 M-F8E-C10 –
015 1 5 3 4 50 13.7 5.7 15.3 16.8 23 20 30 20 60 60 30 M-C2E-C16 M-D8E-C16 M-F8E-C16 –
022 1 7.5 5 4 50 19.9 8.3 22 24.2 33 25 50 25 80 80 30 M-C2E-C25 M-D8E-C25 M-F8E-C25 -CMN-2500
028 2 10 7.5 4 50 25.7 10.7 28 33 44 35 60 35 100 100 50 – – M-F8E-C32 -CMN-4000
042 3 15 10 4 50 38.5 16.0 42 46.2 63 50 90 50 150 150 50 – – M-F8E-C45 -CMN-6300
052 3 20 15 4 50 47.7 19.8 52 63 80 60 100 60 200 200 100 – – – -CMN-6300
070 4 25 20 4 50 64.2 26.7 70 78 105 90 150 90 275 275 100 – – – -CMN-9000
080 4 30 25 4 50 73.2 30.5 80 105 140 100 180 100 300 300 100 – – – -CMN-9000
104 (12) 5 40 – 4 50 98 40.6 104 115 175 125 225 125 400 300 150 – – – –
– 30 4 50 73 30.5 80 120 160 100 175 100 300 300 100 – – – -CMN-9000
130 (12) 5 50 – 4 50 122 50.7 130 143 175 175 275 175 500 375 250 – – – –
– 40 4 50 98 40.6 104 156 175 125 225 125 400 300 150 – – – –
154 (12) 6 60 – 4 50 145 60.1 154 169 231 200 300 200 600 450 250 – – – –
– 50 4 50 122 50.7 130 195 260 175 275 175 500 375 250 – – – –
192 (12) 6 75 – 4 50 180 74.9 192 211 288 225 400 225 600 575 250 – – – –
– 60 4 50 145 60.1 154 231 308 200 300 200 600 450 250 – – – –
260 (12) 6 100 – 2 45 233 96.7 260 286 390 300 575 300 750 750 300 – – – –
– 75 2 50 169 70.1 205 305 410 225 450 225 600 600 250 – – – –
Motor
Drive kW PWM Temp. Input Element Time Non-Time Breaker Protector 140M Motor Protector with Adjustable
Frame
Current Range (5)(6)
400 Volt AC Input
1P3 0 0.37 0.25 4 50 1.1 0.77 1.3 1.4 1.9 3 3 3 6 15 3 M-C2E-B16 – – –
2P1 0 0.75 0.55 4 50 1.8 1.3 2.1 2.4 3.2 3 6 3 8 15 3 M-C2E-B25 M-D8E-B25 – –
3P5 0 1.5 0.75 4 50 3.2 2.2 3.5 4.5 6.0 6 7 6 12 15 7 M-C2E-B40 M-D8E-B40 – –
5P0 0 2.2 1.5 4 50 4.6 3.2 5.0 5.5 7.5 6 10 6 20 20 7 M-C2E-B63 M-D8E-B63 – –
8P7 0 4 2.2 4 50 7.9 5.5 8.7 9.9 13.2 15 17.5 15 30 30 15 M-C2E-C10 M-D8E-C10 M-F8E-C10 –
011 0 5.5 4 4 50 10.8 7.5 11.5 13 17.4 15 25 15 45 45 15 M-C2E-C16 M-D8E-C16 M-F8E-C16 –
015 1 7.5 5.5 4 50 14.4 10.0 15.4 17.2 23.1 20 30 20 60 60 20 M-C2E-C20 M-D8E-C20 M-F8E-C20 –
022 1 11 7.5 4 50 20.6 14.3 22 24.2 33 30 45 30 80 80 30 M-C2E-C25 M-D8E-C25 M-F8E-C25 –
030 2 15 11 4 50 28.4 19.7 30 33 45 35 60 35 120 120 50 – – M-F8E-C32 –
037 2 18.5 15 4 50 35.0 24.3 37 45 60 45 80 45 125 125 50 – – M-F8E-C45 –
043 3 22 18.5 4 50 40.7 28.2 43 56 74 60 90 60 150 150 60 – – – –
056 3 30 22 4 50 53 36.7 56 64 86 70 125 70 200 200 100 – – – –
072 3 37 30 4 50 (10) 68.9 47.8 72 84 112 90 150 90 250 250 100 – – – –
085 (12) 4 45 – 4 45 81.4 56.4 85 94 128 110 200 110 300 300 150 – – – –
– 37 4 45 68.9 47.8 72 108 144 90 175 90 275 300 100 – – – –
105 (12) 5 55 – 4 50 (9) 100.5 69.6 105 116 158 125 225 125 400 300 150 – – – –
– 45 4 50 (9) 81.4 56.4 85 128 170 110 175 110 300 300 150 – – – –
125 (12) 5 55 – 4 50 (9) 121.1 83.9 125 138 163 150 275 150 500 375 250 – – – –
– 45 4 50 (9) 91.9 63.7 96 144 168 125 200 125 375 375 150 – – – –
140 (12) 5 75 – 4 40 (9) 136 93.9 140 154 190 200 300 200 400 400 250 – – – –
– 55 4 40 (9) 101 69.6 105 157 190 150 225 150 300 300 150 – – – –
170 (12) 6 90 – 4 50 (9) 164 126 170 187 255 250 375 250 600 500 250 – – – –
– 75 4 50 (9) 136 103 140 210 280 200 300 200 550 400 250 – – – –
205 (12) 6 110 – 4 40 (9) 199 148 205 220 289 250 450 250 600 600 400 – – – –
– 90 4 40 (9) 164 126 170 255 313 250 375 250 600 500 250 – – – –
260 (12) 6 132 – 2 45 (9) 255 177 260 286 390 350 550 350 750 750 400 – – – –
– 110 2 50 (9) 199 138 205 308 410 250 450 250 600 600 400 – – – –
292 7 160 4 40 293 203 292 322 438 375 650 375 850 850 400 – – – –
150 4 40 264 183 263 395 526 350 550 350 550 750 400 – – – –
325 7 180 4 40 326 226 325 358 488 425 700 425 950 950 600 – – – –
180 4 40 326 226 325 488 650 425 700 425 950 950 600 – – – –
365 8 200 2 40 366 253 365 402 548 475 800 475 1000 1000 600 – – – –
180 2 40 326 226 325 488 650 425 700 425 950 950 600 – – – –
415 8 240 2 40 416 288 415 457 623 525 900 525 1200 1200 600 – – – –
200 2 40 366 253 365 548 730 475 800 475 1000 1000 600 – – – –
481 8 280 2 40 483 334 481 530 722 600 1000 600 1400 1400 700 – – – –
240 2 40 416 288 415 623 830 525 900 525 1200 1200 600 – – – –
535 8 300 2 40 537 372 535 589 803 700 1200 700 1600 1600 700 – – – –
280 2 40 483 334 481 722 962 600 1000 600 1400 1400 700 – – – –
600 8 350 2 40 602 417 600 660 900 750 1300 750 1800 1800 800 – – – –
300 2 40 537 371 535 803 1070 700 1200 700 1600 1600 700 – – – –
730 9 400 2 40 702 486 730 803 1095 900 1500 900 2100 2100 900 – – – –
350 2 40 702 417 600 900 1200 750 1300 750 1800 1800 800 – – – –
875 10 500 2 40 877 608 875 963 1313 1100 1900 1100 2600 2600 1200 – – – –
400 2 40 877 486 700 1050 1400 900 1500 900 2100 2100 900 – – – –
Motor
Frame
Range (5)(6)
480 Volt AC Input
1P1 0 0.5 0.33 4 50 0.9 0.7 1.1 1.2 1.6 3 3 3 6 15 3 M-C2E-B16 – – –
2P1 0 1 0.75 4 50 1.6 1.4 2.1 2.4 3.2 3 6 3 8 15 3 M-C2E-B25 – – –
3P4 0 2 1.5 4 50 2.6 2.2 3.4 4.5 6.0 4 8 4 12 15 7 M-C2E-B40 M-D8E-B40 – –
5P0 0 3 2 4 50 3.9 3.2 5.0 5.5 7.5 6 10 6 20 20 7 M-C2E-B63 M-D8E-B63 – –
8P0 0 5 3 4 50 6.9 5.7 8.0 8.8 12 10 15 10 30 30 15 M-C2E-C10 M-D8E-C10 M-F8E-C10 –
011 0 7.5 5 4 50 9.5 7.9 11 12.1 16.5 15 20 15 40 40 15 M-C2E-C16 M-D8E-C16 M-F8E-C16 –
014 1 10 7.5 4 50 12.5 10.4 14 16.5 22 17.5 30 17.5 50 50 20 M-C2E-C16 M-D8E-C16 M-F8E-C16 –
022 1 15 10 4 50 19.9 16.6 22 24.2 33 25 50 25 80 80 30 M-C2E-C25 M-D8E-C25 M-F8E-C25 -CMN-2500
027 2 20 15 4 50 24.8 20.6 27 33 44 35 60 35 100 100 50 – – M-F8E-C32 -CMN-4000
034 2 25 20 4 50 31.2 25.9 34 40.5 54 40 70 40 125 125 50 – – M-F8E-C45 -CMN-4000
040 3 30 25 4 50 36.7 30.5 40 51 68 50 90 50 150 150 50 – – M-F8E-C45 -CMN-4000
052 3 40 30 4 50 47.7 39.7 52 60 80 60 110 60 200 200 70 – – – -CMN-6300
065 3 50 40 4 50 59.6 49.6 65 78 104 80 125 80 250 250 100 – – – -CMN-9000
077 4 60 – 4 50 72.3 60.1 77 85 116 100 170 100 300 300 100 – – – -CMN-9000
(12)
– 50 4 50 59.6 49.6 65 98 130 80 125 80 250 250 100 – – – -CMN-9000
096 5 75 – 4 50 (9) 90.1 74.9 96 106 144 125 200 125 350 350 125 – – – –
(12)
– 60 4 50 (9) 72.3 60.1 77 116 154 100 170 100 300 300 100 – – – -CMN-9000
125 5 100 – 4 50 (9) 117 97.6 125 138 163 150 250 150 500 375 150 – – – –
(12)
– 75 4 50 (9) 90.1 74.9 96 144 168 125 200 125 350 350 125 – – – –
156 6 125 – 4 50 (9) 147 122 156 172 234 200 350 200 600 450 250 – – – –
(12)
– 100 4 50 (9) 131 109 125 188 250 175 250 175 500 375 250 – – – –
180 6 150 – 4 50 (9) 169 141 180 198 270 225 400 225 600 500 250 – – – –
(12)
– 125 4 50 (9) 147 122 156 234 312 200 350 200 600 450 250 – – – –
248 6 200 – 2 45 (9) 233 194 248 273 372 300 550 300 700 700 400 – – – –
(12)
– 150 2 50 (9) 169 141 180 270 360 225 400 225 600 500 250 – – – –
292 7 250 4 40 281 233 292 322 438 375 650 375 850 850 400 – – – –
200 4 40 253 210 263 395 526 350 550 350 550 750 400 – – – –
325 7 250 4 40 313 260 325 358 488 425 700 425 950 950 600 – – – –
250 4 40 313 260 325 488 650 425 700 425 950 950 600 – – – –
365 8 300 2 40 351 292 365 402 548 475 800 475 1000 1000 600 – – – –
250 2 40 313 260 325 488 650 425 700 425 950 950 600 – – – –
415 8 350 2 40 399 331 415 457 623 525 900 525 1200 1200 600 – – – –
300 2 40 351 291 365 548 730 475 800 475 1000 1000 600 – – – –
481 8 400 2 40 462 384 481 530 722 600 1000 600 1400 1400 700 – – – –
350 2 40 399 331 415 623 830 525 900 525 1200 1200 600 – – – –
535 8 450 2 40 514 427 535 589 803 700 1200 700 1600 1600 700 – – – –
400 2 40 462 384 481 722 962 600 1000 600 1400 1400 700 – – – –
600 8 500 2 40 577 479 600 660 900 750 1300 750 1800 1800 800 – – – –
450 2 40 514 427 535 803 1070 700 1200 700 1600 1600 700 – – – –
730 9 600 2 40 673 559 730 803 1095 900 1500 900 2100 2100 900 – – – –
500 2 40 577 479 600 900 1200 750 1300 750 1800 1800 800 – – – –
875 10 700 2 40 841 699 875 963 1313 1100 1900 1100 2600 2600 1200 – – – –
600 2 40 673 559 700 1050 1400 900 1500 900 2100 2100 900 – – – –
Table 4.8 – 600 Volt AC Input Protection Devices

Motor
Frame
Range (5)(6)
600 Volt AC Input
1P7 0 1 0.5 4 50 1.3 1.4 1.7 2 2.6 2 4 2 6 15 3 M-C2E-B16 – – –
2P7 0 2 1 4 50 2.1 2.1 2.7 3.6 4.8 3 6 3 10 15 3 M-C2E-B25 – – –
3P9 0 3 2 4 50 3.0 3.1 3.9 4.3 5.9 6 9 6 15 15 7 M-C2E-B40 M-D8E-B40 – –
6P1 0 5 3 4 50 5.3 5.5 6.1 6.7 9.2 9 12 9 20 20 15 M-C2E-B63 M-D8E-B63 – –
9P0 0 7.5 5 4 50 7.8 8.1 9 9.9 13.5 10 20 10 35 30 15 M-C2E-C10 M-D8E-C10 M-F8E-C10 –
011 1 10 7.5 4 50 9.9 10.2 11 13.5 18 15 25 15 40 40 15 M-C2E-C10 M-D8E-C10 M-F8E-C10 –
017 1 15 10 4 50 15.4 16.0 17 18.7 25.5 20 40 20 60 50 20 M-C2E-C16 M-D8E-C16 M-F8E-C16 –
022 2 20 15 4 50 20.2 21.0 22 25.5 34 30 50 30 80 80 30 M-C2E-C25 M-D8E-C25 M-F8E-C25 -CMN-2500
027 2 25 20 4 50 24.8 25.7 27 33 44 35 60 35 100 100 50 – – M-F8E-C25 -CMN-2500
032 3 30 25 4 50 29.4 30.5 32 40.5 54 40 70 40 125 125 50 – – M-F8E-C32 -CMN-4000
041 3 40 30 4 50 37.6 39.1 41 48 64 50 90 50 150 150 100 – – M-F8E-C45 -CMN-4000
052 3 50 40 4 50 47.7 49.6 52 61.5 82 60 110 60 200 200 100 – – – -CMN-6300
062 4 60 50 2 50 58.2 60.5 62 78 104 80 125 80 225 225 100 – – – -CMN-6300
077 5 75 – 2 50 (9) 72.3 75.1 77 85 116 90 150 90 300 300 100 – – – -CMN-9000
(12)
– 60 2 50 (9) 58.2 60.5 63 94 126 90 125 90 250 250 100 – – – -CMN-6300
099 5 100 – 2 40 (9) 92.9 96.6 99 109 126 125 200 125 375 375 150 – – – –
(12)
– 75 2 40 (9) 72.3 75.1 77 116 138 100 175 100 300 300 100 – – – -CMN-9000
125 6 125 – 2 50 (9) 117 122 125 138 188 150 250 150 375 375 250 – – – –
(12)
– 100 2 50 (9) 93 96.6 99 149 198 125 200 125 375 375 150 – – – –
144 6 150 – 2 50 (9) 135 141 144 158 216 175 300 175 400 400 250 – – – –
(12)
– 125 2 50 (9) 117 122 125 188 250 150 275 150 375 375 250 – – – –
Notes:
(1)
Minimum protection device size is the lowest rated device that supplies maximum protection without nuisance tripping.
(2) Maximum protection device size is the highest rated device that supplies drive protection. For US NEC, minimum size is 125% of
motor FLA. Ratings shown are maximum.
(3)
Circuit Breaker - inverse time breaker. For US NEC, minimum size is 125% of motor FLA. Ratings shown are maximum.
(4) Motor Circuit Protector - instantaneous trip circuit breaker. For US NEC minimum size is 125% of motor FLA. Ratings shown are
maximum.
(5)
Bulletin 140M with adjustable current range should have the current trip set to the minimum range that the device will not trip.
(6)
Manual Self-Protected (Type E) Combination Motor Controller, UL listed for 208 Wye or Delta, 240 Wye or Delta, 480Y/277 or
600Y/ 347. Not UL listed for use on 480V or 600V Delta/Delta systems.
(7) The AIC ratings of the Bulletin 140M Motor Protector may vary. See publication 140M-SG001B-EN-P.
(8)
Maximum allowable rating by US NEC. Exact size must be chosen for each installation.
(9) UL Type 12/IP54 (flange mount) heat sink ambient temperature rating is 40° C/ambient of unprotected drive portion (inside
enclosure) is 55° C. The ambient temperature for the UL Type 12/IP54 stand-alone drives is 40° C.
(10)
Must remove top label and vent plate, drive enclosure rating will be IP00, NEMA/UL Type Open.
(11)
Drive frames 0-4 temperature rating is for NEMA/UL Type Open. The adhesive top label must be removed to operate drive at
this temperature. Frames 5 & 6 do not have a top label.
(12) Drives have dual current ratings; one for normal duty applications, and one for heavy duty applications. The drive may be
operated at either rating.
Chapter 5
Installing Power Wiring

applicable local and national codes. Failure to observe this
precaution could result in damage to or destruction of the
equipment.
This chapter provides instructions on output wiring to the motor and installing
AC input power wiring. Refer to Figure 2.2 for terminal block locations.
Removing and Replacing

the Cover ATTENTION: DC bus capacitors retain hazardous voltages after
Follow these steps to open the IPS Tempo cover:
Frames 0-4
Step 1. Locate the slot in the upper left hand corner of the IPS Tempo (refer to
Figure 5.1).
Step 2. Slide the locking tab up and swing the door open. The hinges allow
the cover to move away from the IPS Tempo and lay on top of
adjacent IPS Tempo (if present). Refer to page 5-2 for information on
access panel removal.
Frame 5
Step 1. Locate the slot in the upper left hand corner of the IPS Tempo (refer to
Figure 5.1).
Step 2. Slide the locking tab up, loosen the right-hand cover screw and
remove. Refer to page 5-2 for information on access panel removal.
Frame 6
Step 1. Loosen two screws at bottom of IPS Tempo cover.
Step 2. Carefully slide bottom cover down and out.
Step 3. Loosen two screws at top of cover and remove.
5-2 Installing Power Wiring
POWER
STS
ESC
PROG SEL
AUTO
7 8 9 MAN DISP
4 5 6 JOG
1 2 3
. 0 +/-
Figure 5.1 – Opening the IPS Tempo Cover - Frames 0-5
Cable Entry Plate Removal

If additional wiring access is needed, the Cable Entry Plate on Frames 0 - 3 IPS
Tempo can be removed. Simply loosen the screws securing the plate to the
chassis. The slotted mounting holes allow for easy removal.
Important: Removing the Cable Entry Plate limits the maximum ambient
temperature to 40 degrees C (104 degrees F).
Power Wiring Access Panel Removal
Table 5.1 – Power Wiring Access Panel Removal
Frame Removal Procedure (Replace when wiring is complete.)

0, 1, 2, & 6 Access Panel is part of front cover.
3 Open front cover and gently slide cover down and out.
4 Loosen the four screws and remove.
5 Remove front cover and gently slide panel up and out.
Installing Power Wiring 5-3
Power Terminal Block Refer to Figures 2.2 and 2.3 for terminal block locations and Table 5.2 for
Specifications descriptions.
Table 5.2 – Power Terminal Block Specifications
Wire Size Range - See Note 3 Torque

No. Name Frame Description Maximum Minimum Maximum Recommended
➊ Power 0&1 Input power and motor 4.0 mm2 (12 AWG) 0.5 mm2 (22 AWG) 1.7 N-m 0.8 N-m
Terminal Block connections (15 lb.-in.) (7 lb.-in.)
2 Input power and motor 10.0 mm2 (6 AWG) 0.8 mm2 (18 AWG) 1.7 N-m 1.4 N-m
connections (15 lb.-in.) (12 lb.-in.)
3 Input power and motor 25.0 mm2 (3 AWG) 2.5 mm2 (14 AWG) 3.6 N-m 1.8 N-m
BR1, 2 terminals 10.0 mm2 (6 AWG) 0.8 mm2 (18 AWG) 1.7 N-m 1.4 N-m
(15 lb.-in.) (12 lb.-in.)
4 Input power and motor 35.0 mm2 (1/0 AWG) 10.0 mm2 (6 AWG) 4.0 N-m 4.0 N-m
5 Input power, DC+, DC–, BR1, 50.0 mm2 (1/0 AWG) 4.0 mm2 (12 AWG) See Note 6
75HP, 480V/ 2, PE, motor connections
100HP, 600V
5 Input power, DC+, DC–, motor 70.0 mm2 (2/0 AWG) 10.0 mm2 (6 AWG)
100HP BR1, 2, PE terminals 50.0 mm2 (1/0 AWG) 4.0 mm2 (12 AWG)
6 Input power, DC+, DC–, BR1, 150.0 mm2 (300 MCM) 2.5 mm2 (14 AWG) 6.0 N-m 6.0 N-m
2, PE, motor connections see Note 4 (52 lb.-in.) (52 lb.-in.)
7 Input power, DC+, DC–, PE, 150.0 mm2 (300 MCM) 2.5 mm2 (14 AWG) 10.0 N-m 10.0 N-m
motor connections see Note 5 (87 lb.-in.) (87 lb.-in.)
8&9 Input power, DC+, DC–, PE, 300.0 mm2 (600 MCM) 2.5 mm2 10.0 N-m 10.0 N-m
motor connections see Note 5 (14 AWG) (87 lb.-in.) (87 lb.-in.)
10 Input power, DC+, DC–, PE, 300.0 mm2 (600 MCM) 2.5 mm2 (14 AWG) 10.0 N-m 10.0 N-m
motor connections see Note 5 (87 lb.-in.) (87 lb.-in.)
➋ SHLD 0-6 Terminating point for wiring — — 1.6 N-m 1.6 N-m
Terminal shields (14 lb.-in.) (14 lb.-in.)
➌ AUX Terminal 0-4 Auxiliary Control Voltage 1.5 mm2 (16 AWG) 0.2 mm2 (24 AWG) — —
Block 5-6 PS+, PS– 12 4.0 mm2 (12 AWG) 0.5 mm2 (22 AWG) 0.6 N-m 0.6 N-m
(5.3 lb.-in.) (5.3 lb.-in.)
7-10 4.0 mm2 (12 AWG) 0.049 mm2 (30 AWG) 0.6 N-m 0.6 N-m
(5.3 lb.-in.) (5.3 lb.-in.)
➍ I/O Terminal 0-6 Signal & control connections 2.5 mm2 (14 AWG) 0.30 mm2 (22 AWG) 0.6 N-m 0.6 N-m
Block (5.3 lb.-in.) (5.3 lb.-in.)
7-10 4.0 mm2 (12 AWG) 0.049 mm2 (30 AWG) 0.6 N-m 0.6 N-m
(5.3 lb.-in.) (5.3 lb.-in.)
➎ Encoder 0-10 Encoder power & signal 0.75 mm2 (18 AWG) 0.196 mm2 (24 AWG) 0.6 N-m 0.6 N-m
Terminal Block connections (5.3 lb.-in.) (5.3 lb.-in.)
➏ Fan Terminal 5-6 User Supplied Fan Voltage 4.0 mm2 (12 AWG) 0.5 mm2 (22 AWG) 0.6 N-m 0.6 N-m
Block (5.3 lb.-in.) (5.3 lb.-in.)
7 4.0 mm2 (12 AWG) 0.5 mm2 (22 AWG) 0.9 N-m 0.6 N-m
(8.0 lb.-in.) (5.3 lb.-in.)
8-10 4.0 mm2 (12 AWG) 0.5 mm2 (22 AWG) 0.6 N-m 0.6 N-m
(5.3 lb.-in.) (5.3 lb.-in.)
1. External control power: UL Installation-300V DC, ±10%, Non UL Installation-270-600V DC, ±10% (0-3 Frame-40W, 165 mA, 5 Frame-80W, 90 mA).
2. An Auxiliary Control Power Supply such as the 20-24V-AUX can be used with 400/480 and 600/690 Volt drives with Vector Control. However, consult the factory before
using an auxiliary power supply in these instances. Important: The Auxiliary Control Power Supply Must Not be used with any 200/240V drive.
3. Maximum/minimum sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations.
4. Two wires connected in parallel to any of these terminals using two lugs may be required
5. If may be necessary to connect multiple wires in parallel to these terminals using multiple lugs.
6. Refer to the terminal block label inside the drive.
Installing Output Power

Wiring ATTENTION: Do not route signal and control wiring with power
Tempo operation. Failure to observe these precautions could result
in damage to or destruction of the equipment
ATTENTION: Unused wires in conduit must be grounded at both
ends to avoid a possible shock hazard caused by induced voltages.
Also, if a IPS Tempo sharing a conduit is being serviced or
installed, all IPS Tempos using this conduit should be disabled to
eliminate the possible shock hazard from cross-coupled motor
leads. Failure to observe these precautions could result in bodily
injury.
To connect the AC output power wiring from the IPS Tempo to the motor:
Step 1. Wire the three-phase AC output power motor leads by routing them
according to IPS Tempo type. Refer to Figures 3.13 and 3.14 for wire
routing locations.
Do not route more than three sets of motor leads through a single conduit. This
will minimize cross-talk that could reduce the effectiveness of noise reduction
methods. If more than three IPS Tempo/motor connections per conduit are
required, shielded cable must be used. If possible, each conduit should contain
only one set of motor leads.
Step 2. Connect the three-phase AC output power motor leads to terminals
U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 on the power terminal block.
Step 3. Tighten the three-phase AC output power terminals to the proper
torque according to IPS Tempo type as shown in Table 5.2.
Installing Input Wiring Installing an Optional Transformer and Reactor

Input isolation transformers might be needed to help eliminate:
• Damaging AC line voltage transients from reaching the IPS Tempo.
• Line noise from the IPS Tempo back to the incoming power source.
• Damaging currents that could develop if a point inside the IPS Tempo
becomes grounded.
Observe these guidelines when installing an isolation transformer:
• A power disconnecting device must be installed between the power line and
the primary of the transformer.
• If the user-installed power disconnecting device is a circuit breaker, the
circuit breaker trip rating must be coordinated with the in-rush current (10 to
12 times full load current) of the transformer.
• Do not use an input isolation transformer rated more than
1000 KVA for 480 VAC with less than 5% impedance directly ahead of the
IPS Tempo without additional impedance between the IPS Tempo and the
transformer.
Installing Branch Circuit Protection

Install the required branch circuit protection fuses according to the applicable
local, national, and international codes (such as NEC/CEC). The fuses or
approved circuit breaker must be installed in the line before the IPS Tempo
input terminals. Fuse values are provided in Tables 4.4 through 4.8.
ATTENTION: Most codes require that upstream branch

protection be provided to protect input power wiring. Failure to
observe this precaution could result in severe bodily injury or loss
of life.
Installing the Required Input Disconnect

An input disconnect must be installed in the line before the IPS Tempo input
terminals in accordance with local, national, and international codes, such as
NEC/CEC. The disconnect should be sized according to the in-rush current as
well as any additional loads the disconnect might supply. The trip rating for the
in-rush current (10 to 12 times full load current) should be coordinated with
that of the input isolation transformer, if used.
Installing Power Wiring from the AC Input Line to the IPS Tempo’s
Power Terminals
ATTENTION: Protect the contents of the cabinet from metal chips

and other debris while drilling the conduit openings. Failure to
observe this precaution could result in damage to, or destruction
of, the equipment.
ATTENTION: Do not route signal and control wiring with power
Tempo operation. Failure to observe this precaution could result in
damage to, or destruction of, the equipment.
To connect AC input power to the IPS Tempo:

Step 1. Wire the AC input power leads by routing them according to IPS
Tempo type. Connect the AC input power leads to terminals R/L1,
S/L2, T/L3 on the power terminal block (refer to Figure 5.2).
Step 2. Tighten the AC input power terminals to the proper torque as shown
in Table 5.2.
Frame Terminal Block
0&1
BR1
BR2
DC+
DC–
PE
U (T1)
V (T2)
W (T3)
R (L1)
S (L2)
T (L3)
BR1 BR2 DC+ DC– U V W PE R S T

(T1) (T2) (T3) (L1) (L2) (L3)
3&4
BR1 BR2 DC+ DC– U V W R S T

(T1) (T2) (T3) (L1) (L2) (L3)
* Note:
Shaded BR1 & BR2 Terminals will only be present on drives ordered with the Brake Option.
5 75 HP, Normal Duty
BR1*/ DC– V/T2
PS– BR2* DC+ DC+ U/T1 W/T3 PE PE R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
PS+
100 HP, Normal Duty

BR1*/
BR2* DC+ DC+ DC– U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
PE PE
PS–
PS+
6 125-200 HP, Normal Duty

PS+
PS–
WIRE STRIP
22-10
AWG
5.3 IN-LB
USE 75 C COPPER WIRE ONLY, TORQUE 52 IN-LB (6 N-M)
USE 75 C
COPPER WIRE
ONLY
U V W PE PE R S T
TORQUE
52 IN-LB T1 T2 T3 L1 L2 L3
DC+ DC– PE PE R-L1 S-L2 T-L3 U-T1 V-T2 W-T3

Bus Input Output
Figure 5.2 – Power Terminal Blocks
Frame Terminal Block

8, 9
DC– W
T V
S
R U
DC+ & DC – are Factory DC+
Wired to DC Link Choke
10
T S R
L3 L2 L1
T S R
L3 L2 L1 W
V
PE U
(IP20 Versions Only)
Figure 5.2 – Power Terminal Blocks
Table 5.3 – Power Terminal Descriptions
Terminal Description Notes

BR1 DC Brake (+) DB Resistor Connection - Important: Only one DB
BR2 DC Brake (–) resistor can be used with Frames 0-3. Connecting an
internal & external resistor could cause damage.
DC+ DC Bus (+) DC Input/Brake Connections
DC– DC Bus (–)
PE PE Ground
PS+ Auxiliary Control Terminal
PS– Block
Motor Ground
U U (T1) To Motor
V V (T2)
W W (T3)
R R (L1) AC Line Input Power
S S (L2) Three-Phase = R, S & T
T T (L3) Single-Phase = R & S Only

Notes
Chapter 6
Installing Regulator Board Control Wiring
This chapter describes how to wire the signal and I/O terminal strip for stop,
speed feedback, and remote control signals.
Stop Circuit Requirements

ATTENTION: The user must provide an external, hardwired stop
circuit outside of the IPS Tempo circuitry. This circuit must disable
the system in case of improper operation. Uncontrolled machine
operation may result if this procedure is not followed. Failure to
observe this precaution could result in bodily injury.
Depending upon the requirements of the application, the IPS Tempo can be
configured to provide either a coast-to-rest or a ramp-to-rest operational stop
without physical separation of the power source from the motor. A coast-to-rest
stop turns off the transistor power device drivers. A ramp-to-rest stop fires the
transistor power device drivers until the motor comes to a stop, and then turns
off the power devices.
In addition to the operational stop, you must provide a hardwired stop external
to the IPS Tempo. This stop circuit must contain only hardwired
electromechanical components. Operation of the hardwired stop must not
depend on electronic logic (hardware or software) or on the communication of
commands over an electronic network or link. Note that the hardwired stop you
install can be used at any time to stop the IPS Tempo.
User-Initiated Stopping
ATTENTION: Note the following about stop commands:
• A stop command from any attached HIM will always be enabled
regardless of the value of Logic Source Sel (89).
• Network stop commands are effective only when Logic Source
Sel (89) is set to Network or All Ports.
• Terminal block stop commands are effective only when Logic
Source Sel (89) is set to Terminal Blk or All Ports.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in severe bodily
The terminal block Enable input and the Function Loss input, if configured, are
always active. This is independent of the Logic Source Sel (89) setting. The
terminal block Stop input must be closed only when the terminal block is
selected as the logic source. Refer to page 6-5.
6-2 Installing Regulator Board Control Wiring
Wiring the Signal and Important: Two I/O boards are available: 24 VDC and 115 VAC logic. Verify
Control I/O which board is installed in the IPS Tempo before proceeding. This
can be verified by the IPS Tempo’s model number or by a label on
the side of the I/O Cassette. If the 115 VAC logic board is used, the
115 VAC control power must be supplied separately by the user.
Wire the signal and control I/O to the terminal block as shown in Table 6.2
Table 6.1 – Wiring Signal and I/O at the Terminal Block - Frames 0-6
Related
Factory
Default
Param.
No. Signal Description
1 Analog In 1 (–) 1 2
Isolated 3, bipolar, differential, ±10V/0-20 mA, 320 -
2 Analog In 1 (+) 1 11 bit & sign. For 0-20 mA, a jumper must be 327
1 3 Analog In 2 (–) 1 installed at terminals 17 & 18 (or 19 & 20). 88k
4 Analog In 2 (+) 1 ohm input impedance when configured for volt.
& 95.3 ohm for current
5 Pot Common – For (+) and (–) 10V pot references.
6 Analog Out 1 (–) 2 Single-ended bipolar (current output is not 340 -
7 Analog Out 1 (+) bipolar), ±10V/0-20mA, 11 bit & sign, Voltage 347
16
32 8 Analog Out 2 (–) mode - limit current to 5 mA. Current mode -
max. load is 400 ohms.
9 Analog Out 2 (+)
10 HW PTC Input 1 – 1.8k ohm PTC, Internal 3.32k ohm pull-up 238
resistor 259
11 Digital Out 1 – N.C. 4 Fault Max. Resistive Load: 380 -
12 Digital Out 1 Common 240V AC/30V DC – 1200VA, 150W 391
13 Digital Out 1 – N.O. 4 NOT Fault Max. Current: 5A, Min. Load: 10 mA
14 Digital Out 2 – N.C. 4 NOT Run Max. Inductive Load:
240V AC/30V DC – 840VA, 105W
15 Digital Out 2/3 Com.
Max. Current: 3.5A, Min. Load: 10 mA
16 Digital Out 3 – N.O. 4 Run
17 Current In Jumper 1 – Placing a jumper across terminals 17 & 18 (or
18 Analog In 1 19 & 20) will configure that analog input for
19 Current In Jumper 1 – current.
20 Analog In 2
21 –10VDC Pot Reference – 2k ohm minimum load.
22 +10VDC Pot Reference –
23 HW PTC Input 2 – See above
24 +24VDC 5 – Drive supplied logic input power. 5
25 Digital In Common –
26 24V Common 5 – Common for internal power supply.
27 Digital In 1 6 Stop - CF 115V AC, 50/60 Hz - Opto isolated 361 -
28 Digital In 2 6 Start Low State: less than 30V AC 366
29 Digital In 36 Function Loss High State: greater than 100V AC, 5.7 mA
30 Digital In 46 Not Used 24V DC - Opto isolated
Low State: less than 5V DC
31 Digital In 56 Not Used
High State: greater than 20V DC, 10 mA DC
32 Digital In 6/Hardware Not Used Digital Input Impedance: 21k ohm
Enable6, see pg. 6-5
1. Important: 0-20mA operation requires a jumper at terminals 17 & 18 (or 19 & 20). Drive damage may occur if jumper is not
installed.
2. These inputs/outputs are dependant on a number of parameters (see “Related Parameters”).
3. Differential Isolation - External source must be maintained at less than 160V with respect to PE. Input provides high common
mode immunity.
4. Contacts in unpowered state. Any relay programmed as Fault or Alarm will energize (pick up) when power is applied to drive
and deenergize (drop out) when a fault or alarm exists. Relays selected for other functions will energize only when that
condition exists and will deenergize when condition is removed.
5. 150 mA maximum Load. Not present on 115V versions.
6. A 10k ohm, 2 watt burden resistor must be installed on each digital input when using a triac type device. The resistor is
installed between each digital input and neutral /common.
Installing Regulator Board Control Wiring 6-3
Important: Terminals 24 and 26 are utilized only on 24VDC I/O Boards. They
are not to be used on 115VAC I/O Boards. 115VAC control power
must be provided by user for 115VAC I/O Boards.
Important: Factory installed jumpers exist between terminals 24 and 29 and

between terminals 25 and 26 on the 24 VDC Logic Board only.
The jumpers are not present on the 115 VAC Logic Board. The
user is responsible for the removal of one or both of these jumpers
in order to implement an external function loss circuit.
Figure 6.1 – Wiring Signal and I/O at the Terminal Block - Frames 7-10
Related
Factory
Default
Param.
No. Signal Description
1 Analog In 1 (–) 1 2
Isolated 3, bipolar, differential, ±10V/4-20mA, 11 320 -
2 Analog In 1 (+) 1 bit & sign, 88k ohm input impedance. For 327
3 Analog In 2 (–) 1 4-20mA, a jumper must be installed at terminals
1
4 Analog In 2 (+) 1 17 & 18 (or 19 & 20).
5 Pot Common – For (+) and (–) 10V pot references.
6 Analog Out 1 (–) 2
Bipolar (current output is not bipolar), 340 -
7 Analog Out 1 (+) ±10V/4-20mA, 11 bit & sign, voltage mode - limit 347
8 Analog Out 2 (–) current to 5 mA. Current mode - max. load
resistance is 400 ohms.
9 Analog Out 2 (+)
10 HW PTC Input 1 – 1.8k ohm PTC, Internal 3.32k ohm pull-up 238
resistor 259
11 Digital Out 1 – N.C. 4 Fault Max. Resistive Load: 380 -
12 Digital Out 1 Common 240V AC/30V DC – 1200VA, 150W 391
13 Digital Out 1 – N.O. 4 NOT Fault Max. Current: 5A, Min. Load: 10mA
14 Digital Out 2 – N.C. 4 NOT Run Max. Inductive Load:
240V AC/30V DC – 840VA, 105W
15 Digital Out 2/3 Com.
Max. Current: 3.5A, Min. Load: 10mA
16 Digital Out 3 – N.O. 4 Run
17 Current In Jumper 1 – Placing a jumper across terminals 17 & 18 (or
18 Analog In 1 19 & 20) will configure that analog input for
19 Current In Jumper 1 – current.
20 Analog In 2
21 –10VDC Pot Reference – 2k ohm minimum load.
22 +10VDC Pot Reference –
23 HW PTC Input 2 – See above
24 +24VDC 5 – Drive supplied logic input power. 5
25 Digital In Common –
26 24V Common 5 – Common for internal power supply.
27 Digital In 1 Stop - CF 115V AC, 50/60 Hz - Opto isolated 361 -
28 Digital In 2 Start Low State: less than 30V AC 366
29 Digital In 3 Function Loss High State: greater than 100V AC
24V DC - Opto isolated
30 Digital In 4 Not Used
Low State: less than 5V DC
31 Digital In 5 Not Used High State: greater than 20V DC
32 Digital In 6/Hardware Not Used 11.2 mA DC
Enable, see pg. 6-5
33 Digital Out 4 – N.C. Fault Dedicated fault output - Not user configurable.
34 Digital Out 4 Common Relay will energize (pick up) when power is
35 Digital Out 4 – N.O. NOT Fault applied to drive and deenergize (drop out) when
a fault exists. See Terminals 11-16 for specs.
PS+ Aux. Control Power (+)
PS- Aux. Control Power (–)
PE PE Ground PE Ground
PE PE Ground PE Ground
1. Important: 0-20mA operation requires a jumper at terminals 17 & 18 (or 19 & 20). Drive damage may occur if jumper is not installed.
2. These inputs/outputs are dependant on a number of parameters (see “Related Parameters”).
3. Differential Isolation - External source must be maintained at less than 160V with respect to PE. Input provides high common mode immunity.
4. Contacts in unpowered state. Any relay programmed as Fault or Alarm will energize (pick up) when power is applied to drive and deenergize (drop out)
when a fault or alarm exists. Relays selected for other functions will energize only when that condition exists and will deenergize when condition is
removed.
5. 150mA maximum Load. Not present on 115V versions.
Wiring the Encoder Terminal Wire the IPS Tempo’s encoder terminal block as shown in Table 6.3.
Block No. Description (refer to Appendix A for encoder specifications)
See “Detail” in Figure 2.4 8 +12V 1 DC Power Internal power source
7 +12V 1 DC Return (Common) 250 mA.
6 Encoder Z (NOT) Pulse, marker or registration
8 input. 2
5 Encoder Z
4 Encoder B (NOT) Quadrature B input.
3 Encoder B
2 Encoder A (NOT) Single channel or quadrature
1 1 Encoder A A input.
1. Jumper selectable +5/12V is available on 20B-ENC-1 Encoder Boards.
2. Z channel can be used as a pulse input while A & B are used for encoder.
Encoder Wiring Examples

I/O Connection Example
Encoder Power - +12V DC
(250 mA)
Internal Drive Power 8
Internal (drive) 12 VDC, 250mA 7
Common
6
A
5
to SHLD B
4
Z
3
2
1
Encoder Signal - to Power Supply

8 Common
Single-Ended, 7
Dual Channel 6
Z NOT to SHLD
Z
5 A
B NOT
4 B
B
3 Z
A NOT
2
A
1
Encoder Power -
External Power Source
Common
A
to
+
SHLD B
External Z
Power
Supply
Encoder Signal -
8 to SHLD
Differential,
7
Dual Channel Z NOT
6
A
Z
5
B NOT B
4
B Z
3
A NOT
2
A
1
Hardware Enable Circuitry Any of the three (3) digital inputs can be programmed as an Enable input.
However, digital input 3 is typically used for this purpose. The status of this
input is interpreted by IPS Tempo software. If the application requires the IPS
Tempo to be disabled without software interpretation, a dedicated hardware
enable configuration can be utilized. This is done by removing a jumper and
wiring the enable input to Digital ln 6. Refer to Figure 6.2.
1. Remove the I/O Control Cassette from IPS Tempo and the cover from the
I/O Cassette. Refer to page 2-6 for information on removing the I/O Control
Cassette.
2. Locate and remove Jumper J10 on the Main Control Board in the I/O
Cassette.
3. Reassemble cassette.
4. Wire Enable to Digital ln 6.
5. Verify that [Digital In6 Sel], parameter 366 is set to “1, Enable.”
ENABLE
JUMPER
J10
Figure 6.2 – Hardware Enable Circuitry
I/O Wiring Examples

ATTENTION: When using bipolar analog inputs, unpredictable
changes in motor speed can be caused by noise and drift in sensitive
circuits. Use speed command parameters to help reduce input
source sensitivity. Failure to observe this precaution could result in
bodily injury or damage to equipment.
Input/Output Connection Example Required Parameter Changes

Potentiometer Adjust Scaling: Parameters 91/92 and 325/326
Unipolar Speed
Reference View Results: Parameter 02
10k Ohm Pot. 3
Recommended 4
(2k Ohm Minimum) 5
22
Analog Voltage Input Configure input for Current: Parameter 320 and
Unipolar Speed add jumper at appropriate terminals
Reference
0 to +10V Input Adjust Scaling: Parameters 91/92 and 325/326
Common 3
4 View Results: Parameter 02
+
Analog Current Input Configure input for Voltage: Parameter 320
Unipolar Speed
Reference Adjust Scaling: Parameters 91/92 and 325/326
4-20 mA Input
3 19 View Results: Parameter 02
Common
4 20
+
Analog Input PTC Ferrite Set Fault Config 1 (238) to bit 7 = Enabled
(Pos.Temp. Coefficient) Bead
1
PTC OT set > 5V 1.8k Set Alarm Config 1 (259) to bit 11 = Enabled
2
PTC OT cleared<4V PTC
PTC Short < 0.2V
5
22
3.32k
Ohm
HW PTC Input Ferrite Set Fault Config 1 (238) to bit 13 = Enabled

PTC OT set > 5V Bead
PTC OT cleared<4V 23 Set Alarm Config 1 (259) to bit 18 = Enabled
1.8k
PTC Short < 0.2V PTC
10
Input/Output Connection Example Required Parameter Changes

Analog Output Configure with parameter 340
+/- 10V, 4-20mA Bipolar,
+10V Unipolar (shown Select Source Value: Digital Out1 Sel (384)
in example)
+ – Adjust Scaling: parameters 343/344
2-Wire1 Control Set IPS Start Mode (703) to 1 = 2-wire

Non-Reversing 24
24V DC internal supply 25
26
28
Stop-Run
3-Wire Control Set IPS Start Mode (703) to 2 = 3-wire

24
Internal Supply
25
26 Stop
27
28
Start
3-Wire Control Set IPS Tempo Start Mode (703) to 2 = 3-wire
External supply (I/O Neutral/ 115V/
Board dependent). Common +24V
25
Stop
27
28
Start
Digital Output Select source to activate:
Power Source
Relays (two at terminals Parameters 380, 384, and 388
14 and 16) shown in 11
powered state with IPS 12 Fault
Tempo faulted. 13 NOT Fault
or
14
15 NOT Run
16 Run
Enable Input Configure with parameter 366. For dedicated

hardware enable, remove jumper J10.
32
1. Important: Programming inputs for 2-wire control deactivates all HIM Start and Jog buttons.
Wiring Diagram - Control

and Motor
ATTENTION: Opening the Function Loss input (terminals 24 to
29) will stop the IPS Tempo. You must ensure that all terminal strip
inputs are wired properly for your IPS Tempo configuration.
31 32
DIGIN 6
DIGIN 5
30
DIGIN 4
29
DIGIN 3 (FUNCTION LOSS)
28
DIGIN 2 (START)
FUNC. LOSS
STOP START
27
DIGIN 1 (STOP/CF)
26
24V COM.
25
DIGITAL INPUT COM.
Network Module
24
+ 24VDC
23
PTC2
to optional
DPI port 5
WIRING EXAMPLE FOR 24 V I/O ONLY

SPEED POTENTIOMETERS (0-60 Hz)
UNIPOLAR AUTO / MANUAL (0-10 V)
21 22
+10VDC
Main Control Board

-10VDC
20
Analog ln #2
EXAMPLE WIRING
Curremt Jumper
19
18
Analog In #1
Curremt Jumper
17
16
DIGITAL OUT #3
(RUN)
remote HIM
15
to optional
DIGITAL OUT #2
DPI port 2
(NOT RUN)
14
13
DIGITAL OUT 1
11 12
(FAULT)
10 V
PTC1
10
PROCESS REFERENBCE
9
+
ANALOG
OUTPUT
#2
-
8
IPS Tempo
7
+
ANALOG
OUTPUT
COM
#1
-
6
5
POT COMMON
+
4
PROCESS FEEDBACK
ANALOG
INPUT #2
-
3
+
2
ANALOG
INPUT #1
1
-
U V W PE PE
POWER TERMINAL BLOCK
T3
T1 T2 T3
MOTOR
T2
T1
AC INPUT
L3
T
L1 L2
BR1 BR2 DC+ DC- R S
POWER SECTION
RESISTOR
DYNAMIC
BRAKING
(If Used)
Figure 6.3 – Typical Wiring Diagram (Using Internally Supplied 24 VDC Inputs)
Table 6.2 – Parameter Configuration for Wiring Example
Param Number Description Value

79 Speed Units Hz
89 Logic Source Sel Terminal Blk
90 Speed Ref A Sel Analog ln1
91 Spd Ref A Hi 60 Hz
92 Spd Ref A Lo 0 Hz
96 TB Man Ref Analog ln2
97 TB Man Ref Hi 60 Hz
98 TB Man Ref Lo 0 Hz
320 Analog Conf xxx.xx00
322 Analog ln 1 Hi 10 V
323 Analog ln 1 Lo 0V
325 Analog ln 2 Hi 10 V
326 Analog ln 2 Lo 0V
703 IPS Start Mode 3-wire
Power Terminal Block
1 R (L1)
AC Input 2 S (L2)
3 T (L3)
4 BR1
5 BR2
6 U (T1)
7 V (T2)
8 W (T3)
9 PE
10 PE
(+)
24 Control Terminal Block
Vdc
(-)
1 AI1- Current when jumper added to 17/18
2 AI1+ Current when jumper added to 17/18
3 AI2- Current when jumper added to 19/20
4 AI2+ Current when jumper added to 19/20
(-)
5 COM
P
(+) 6 AO1
7 AO1
8 AO2
9 AO2
10
11 DO1 NC
Pressure Control with 3-Wire Start/Stop 12 DO1 COM

13 DO1 NO
14 DO2 NC
15 DO2/3 COM
16 DO3 NO
17 AI1- Jump 17 and 18 for current input
18 AI1+ Jump 17 andf 18 for current input
19 AI2- Jump 19 and 20 for current input
20 AI2+ Jump 19 and 20 for current input
21 -10 Vdc Pot reference
22 +10 Vdc Pot reference
3-Wire Start/Stop
23
24 +24 Vdc
Digital Input 4 - 6 Setup Selection
25 DI COM
- No Action
26 24Vdc COM
- Message Only
27 DI1 STOP - Clear Faults
- Pump Shutdown
28 DI2 Start
- Speed Override
29 DI3 Function Loss
- Process Override
Function Loss 30 DI4
31 DI5
32 DI6
Figure 6.4 – Wiring Diagram - Typical IPS Tempo Application
Speed and Process The following sections describes methods of obtaining the IPS Tempo speed
Reference Control and process reference.
ATTENTION: Any IPS Tempo monitor, upon entering Manual

Override mode, can disable the process control protections. Read
and understand this section before proceeding. Failure to observe
this precaution could result in loss of equipment, severe bodily
Auto Reference Source

The IPS Tempo speed and/or process reference can be obtained from a number
of different sources. The source is determined by IPS Tempo programming and
the condition of the Speed Select Digital Inputs, Man Override En digital inputs
or reference select bits of a IPS Tempo command word.
The default source for a speed reference is the selection programmed in Speed
Ref A Sel (90). If Speed Select digital inputs are defined on the terminal block,
the IPS Tempo could use other parameters as the speed reference source.
Manual Override Mode

The Manual Override mode can be used to disable the IPS Tempo control
algorithm and operate the pump in Speed mode. Either the Auto/Manual button
on the HIM or digital inputs 4 through 6 can activate the Manual Override
mode. However, digital inputs 4 through 6 can only be use for Manual Override
mode when changed from their factory defaults. Once this feature has been
activated, it can only be deactivated by the source that enabled it. Manual
Override can be configured to work one of two ways, depending on the setting
of Bit 1 of IPS Config (700). If Bit 1 is set to “0,” then all IPS Tempo monitors
will be disabled when manual override is activated. If Bit 1 is set to “1,” then all
IPS Tempo monitors that were enabled prior to Manual Override will default to
“Message Only,” except for those that are set to “Shut Down.”
Once Manual Override mode has been disabled, the system returns to its
original state, and all timers and alarms are reset.
Important: The mode and control source of the IPS Tempo are broadcast over
a Drive Peripheral Interface (DPI); thus, the HIM displays an
indication that Manual Override mode is enabled or disabled. The
ability to request Manual Override mode can be enabled and
disabled on a port by port basis through Man Override En (286).
Activating Manual Override Mode via the HIM

If the Auto/Manual button on the HIM is used to activate the Manual Override
mode while the system is in Process mode or Speed mode, then the reference
speed is determined by the setting of HIM Ref Preload (193). If HIM Ref
Preload (193) is enabled, then the reference speed is preloaded with the current
operating speed. If HIM Ref Preload (193) is disabled, then the requesting
HIM’s reference speed loads into the system.
Activating Manual Override Mode via Digital Input 4 Through 6

If a digital input is used to activate Manual Override mode while the system is
running in Process mode or Speed mode, then the reference speed is
determined by the setting of TB Man Ref Sel (96).
Changing Reference Sources

The selection of the active Speed Reference can be made through digital inputs,
DPI Command, Jog Key, or Man Override En HIM operation. Refer to Figure
6.3.
Speed Override Process Manual Override

Digin Ref Sel 1-3 Active Control Active Active
Speed Ref Sources
Analog In 1 Trim Ref A Auto Setpoint F Speed
T F F
Analog In 2 Speed Ref A
+ Adjust Reference
Pulse Output F T
Encoder T T
MOP Trim Ref B
Speed Preset 1-7 Speed Ref B
+
DPI Port 1-3, 5 Auto Adjust
Scale Block 1-4 Speed Ref
Speed Ref 2 - 6 Enabled
Speed Ref 7
Auto Adjust Process

Process Ref Sources Ref Enabled
Analog In 1 Process Override
Analog In 2 Auto Setpoint T
Adjust Active
Process Ref 1-7
DPI Port 1-3,5
F F Process
Scale Block 1-4
PI
T TB Manual
Process Ref 7 Manual Override
Override Sources
Source
Process Feedback Sources Analog In 1
Analog In 2
Analog In 1 MOP
Analog In 2 Speed Ref 1 - 7
(OIMs) DPI 1-3
Torque Reference Source

The torque reference is normally supplied by an analog input or network
reference. Switching between available sources while the IPS Tempo is running
is not available. Digital Inputs programmed as “Speed Sel 1, 2, 3” and the HIM
Auto/Manual function do not affect the active torque reference when the IPS
Tempo is in Vector Control Mode.
Remote HIM Configuration

ATTENTION: The IPS Tempo will only function with an IPS
Tempo HIM.
If a remote HIM is connected as the user interface for speed reference or logic
control, Logic Source Sel (89) and Speed Ref A Select (90) must be configured
for the connection port to which the remote HIM is attached. Typically, a
remote HIM is connected to port 2 or port 3.
Notes
Chapter 7
Using the LCD HIM
The LCD Operator Interface Module (HIM) is a keypad/display that enables

you to program, monitor, and control the IPS Tempo.
ATTENTION: The IPS Tempo will only function with an IPS

Tempo HIM.
ESC
PROG SEL
AUTO
7 8 9 MAN DISP
4 5 6 JOG
1 2 3
. 0 +/-
Figure 7.1 – IPS Tempo Full Numeric LCD HIM
Connections The LCD HIM can be used in the following ways:

• IPS Tempo Mounted - The HIM connects directly to the IPS Tempo using
DPI port 1, by inserting it in the front cover.
• Hand-held - A cable must be used to convert the HIM for hand-held use.
• Remote Mounted - A remote mount HIM (E1KYPD-N4-BH) is available
as an option.
Important: For Hand-Held or Remote Mounted HIM’s, the maximum cable

length is 32 feet when using extender cables. The connection is
made directly to the external DPI connector using DPI Port 2. If a
splitter cable (1203-S03) is used, both DPI Ports 2 and 3 are
available for either two remote HIMs or for one remote HIM and a
PC running DriveTools SP or DriveExplorer software. If the
remote HIM needs to be located farther than 32 feet from the IPS
Tempo, then one of the DPI extender kits 1202-TB-KIT-SET or
1202-CBL-KIT-100M should be used.
7-2 Using the LCD HIM
Installing and Removing the To install the local LCD HIM, slide the HIM into the slot on the front of the
Local LCD HIM IPS Tempo until it clicks into place.
To remove the local LCD HIM, press the tab at the top of the IPS Tempo to
release the HIM while pushing the HIM from the bottom to slide it out of the
IPS Tempo.
To Install: To Remove:
Slide the HIM into the slot Press the tab to
on the front of IPS Tempo release the HIM.
until it clicks into place.
POWER
STS
ESC
PROG SEL
AUTO
7 8 9 MAN DISP
4 5 6 JOG
1 2 3
. 0 +/-
PORT
MOD
NET A
NET B
Push the HIM up and

slide it out of the IPS
Tempo.
CAUTION
Figure 7.2 – Installing and Removing the Local LCD HIM
Removing the Local LCD HIM While the IPS Tempo is Powered
If the local LCD HIM is the selected control source, removing the HIM while
the IPS Tempo is powered will cause an IPS Tempo fault.
If the local LCD HIM is not the selected control source, but is the reference
source, removing the HIM while the IPS Tempo is powered will result in a zero
reference value. When the HIM is replaced, the IPS Tempo will ramp to the
reference level supplied by the HIM.
ATTENTION:Removing and replacing the LCD HIM while the

drive is running may cause an abrupt speed change if the LCD HIM
is the selected reference source but is not the selected control
source. The drive will ramp to the reference level provided by the
HIM at the rate specified in Accel Time 1 (140), Accel Time 2
(141), Decel Time 1 (142) and Decel Time 2 (143). Be aware that
an abrupt speed change may occur depending upon the new
reference level and the rate specified in these parameters. Failure
to observe this precaution could result in bodily injury.
If the local LCD HIM is not the selected control source or reference source,
removing the HIM while the IPS Tempo is powered will have no effect on IPS
Tempo operation.
Using the LCD HIM 7-3
Display Description
2 3 4
STARTUP Speed Accelerating

Startup uses full
text prompts to step
52.3 %
you through setup of
the drive. Press
52.3 %
ENTER to proceed. 1285.4 rpm
STARTUP PARAM DIAG SEL
1
Startup Screen Process Display Screen
1 Menu Tabs
2 IPS Tempo mode field
3 IPS Tempo status field
4 Write-protect password status:

(unlocked) = Password disabled
(locked) = Password enabled
Figure 7.3 – Screen Displays
IPS Tempo Mode Descriptions

See Table 7.1 for a list of IPS Tempo specific modes, which are located on the
top line of the HIM status display screen. These modes show the operational
status and mode of the IPS Tempo.
Table 7.1 – IPS Tempo Modes
Text Description
Overide Manual override; Local (HIM or Terminal Block) Speed control without IPS Tempo
monitors
ProcIPS Process control with IPS Tempo monitors enabled
Process Process control without IPS Tempo monitors enabled
Spd IPS Speed control with IPS Tempo monitors enabled
Speed Speed control without IPS Tempo monitors enabled
Key Descriptions
Key Function
UP/DOWN Arrows
• Scroll through list options
• Increase/decrease parameter values
• Increase/decrease the local HIM reference
SEL key
SEL • Advances to the next menu tab
• Selects the digit on the numeric data entry when using the Up/Down arrows to
set the value
• Selects between displayed process variables 1, 2, and 3 and process variables
4, 5 and 6 when in the 3 variable display mode
ENTER key
• Accepts data changes
• Activates a selected list item
DISP key
DISP • Cycles through the display/status screens
• Reverts to the previously viewed display/status screen from any programming
screen
AUTO/MAN key
AUTO
MAN • Toggles between Manual Override On and Manual Override Off
ESC/PROG key
ESC
PROG • When in program mode, navigates to the previous menu selection
• When at main menu, reverts to the previously viewed program screen
Direction key
• No function in the IPS Tempo
JOG key
JOG • Jogs the IPS Tempo only when the IPS Tempo is not running and the logic
control source is set to HIM, upon which the Jog is asserted. Hitting the JOG key
turns the motor for as long as the key is pressed. JOG will stop when the JOG
key is released. The speed of the Jog is dependent upon the value of the
selected jog reference parameter (Jog Speed (100) or Jog Speed 2 (108)).
• If the IPS Tempo is in Jog mode, hitting the Start key will cause it to switch to run
mode.
Start key
• The Start key only works if the logic control source is set to the HIM, upon which
the Start is asserted.
Stop key
• Stops the IPS Tempo/Reset active fault
• This key is always active on all connected HIMs.
Numeric keys
0
…
9 • When in parameter edit mode, these keys can be used to directly enter a new
value.
+/- . • When navigating through the parameters in the linear list, a new parameter
number can be directly entered to immediately jump to that parameter.
• When is process display mode and the HIM is setup as the reference source, the
UP or DOWN arrow can be pressed to enter the reference and modify the mode,
and while the reference pop-up is active, a new reference can be directly entered
followed by the ENTER key.
LCD HIM Menu Structure

Help
Motor Data/Tune
Control Setup
Startup Setpoint Setup
Configure I/O
IPS Monitors
SEL
Groups
Parameters Linear List
Changed Parameters
SEL
Alarms
Faults
Drive Status
Diagnostics Device Select
Device Name
Device Version
STARTUP PARAM DIAG SEL Device Items
SEL
Language
Display Display Adjustments
Process Display
PARAM DIAG DISP SEL
SEL
Memory HIM CopyCat

Drive User Sets
Storage Restore Defaults
DIAG DISP MEM SEL
SEL
Set Access Level

Password Set AccLvl Password
Set WrtProt Password
DISP MEM PASSWORD SEL
Figure 7.4 – LCD HIM Menu Structure
Powering Up and Adjusting The first time the IPS Tempo is powered up after the initial installation, the
the LCD HIM LCD HIM will display a welcome screen with language selection tabs across
the bottom. Use the SEL key to choose the tab for the language that you desire
to use and then press the ENTER key to begin executing the STARTUP
routines. If you press the ESC key rather than the ENTER key, the same
language will be selected, and you will begin with the parameter menu. If you
begin by pressing the ESC key, then the STARTUP menu will be presented
each time you apply power to the IPS Tempo until the STARTUP routine is
entered.
After the initial power-up, the language can be changed by selecting
“Language” from the Display menu.
Adjusting the Screen Contrast

To adjust the screen contrast, use the SEL key to highlight the DISP tab. Using
the UP/DOWN arrows, highlight the menu entry “Display Adjustments” and
then press the ENTER key. Next, using the UP/DOWN arrows, navigate to
parameter “LCD Contrast (003)”. Press the ENTER key to edit the contrast
value using the numeric keys or the UP/DOWN arrows. Press the ENTER key
to accept the new value.
Setting the Display Time-out Period

When the HIM is inactive (no keys have been pressed) for a user-specified
period of time, the process display screen becomes active. To return to the
previously active screen, press the ESC/PROG key.
To set the display timeout period, use the SEL key to highlight the DISP tab.
Using the UP/DOWN arrows, highlight the menu entry “Display Adjustments”
and then press the ENTER key. Using the UP/DOWN arrows, navigate to HIM
parameter 002 (LCD Timeout). Press the ENTER key to edit the timeout value
using the numeric keys or the UP/DOWN arrows. Press ENTER to accept the
new value. The timeout period can range from 10 to 1200 seconds (20 minutes).
Note: that each HIM connected to the IPS Tempo can have a different timeout
period.
Selecting Reverse Video for the Process Display Screen

To select normal or reverse video for the three variable process displays, use the
SEL key to highlight the DISP tab. Using the UP/DOWN arrows, highlight the
menu entry “Display Adjustments” and then press the ENTER key. Next, using
the UP/DOWN arrows, navigate to HIM parameter LCD Video (004). Press the
ENTER key to edit the value using the numeric keys or the UP/DOWN arrows.
Set the value to “0” for normal video and to “1” for reverse video. Press the
ENTER key to accept the new value.
Speed Accelerating Speed Accelerating

52.3 % 52.3 %
52.3 % 52.3 %
1285.4 rpm 1285.4 rpm
Normal Video Reverse Video
Figure 7.5 – Selecting Reverse Video for the Process Display Screen
Resetting the Display

To return all options for the display to factory default values, use the SEL key to
highlight the DISP tab. Using the UP/DOWN arrows, highlight the menu entry
“Display Adjustments” and press the ENTER key. Next, using the UP/DOWN
arrows, navigate to HIM parameter Reset HIM (005). Press the ENTER key to
edit the value using the numeric keys or the UP/DOWN arrows. Set the value to
“1” to reset the HIM parameters to factory defaults. Press the ENTER key to
accept the new value and reset the display.
Selecting a Device in the The LCD HIM can access and display data from any active IPS Tempo or
System peripheral device on the network. The IPS Tempo (port 0) is the default device
selected.
To select a device, use the SEL key to highlight the DIAG tab. Using the
UP/DOWN arrows, highlight the menu entry “Device Select” and press the
ENTER key. Next, using the UP/DOWN arrows, navigate to the device you
wish to select and then press the ENTER key. A new set of options will appear
that are dependent on the device that you selected.
Using the LCD HIM to The LCD HIM enables you to view and adjust parameters in the IPS Tempo or
Program the IPS Tempo in peripheral devices connected to the IPS Tempo. The parameters available for
viewing or adjustment depend on the device selected. The selected device (port
number) is indicated on the HIM as “pn” where “n” is the port number. If the
IPS Tempo is selected, the port number is not displayed.
The method of viewing and adjusting parameters is the same regardless of the
device selected.
Viewing and Adjusting Parameters

Refer to chapter 8 for additional information on how to access the parameters in
the IPS Tempo.
Each parameter screen contains two tabs that are alternately selectable using
the SEL key.
The VALUE tab contains the following information:
• Parameter name
• Parameter number
• Parameter value and units
• If the parameter is read only, then this is indicated (The absence of the an
indication means that the parameter is read/write.)
The LIMITS tab contains the following information:
• Parameter name
• Parameter number
• Minimum value
• Maximum value
• Parameter from which the parameter is sourced (if linked)
• Default value
When displaying either the VALUE tab or the LIMITS tab, you can scroll to the
next available parameter using the UP/DOWN arrows or you can jump to any
valid parameter by directly entering its parameter number using the numeric
keys followed by pressing the ENTER key.
When displaying the VALUE tab, pressing the ENTER key will allow you to
edit the parameter value utilizing either the UP/DOWN keys or the numeric
keys. Upon completing the adjustment, press the ENTER key to accept the new
value and write it to non-volatile memory.
When displaying the LIMITS tab, pressing the ENTER key will allow you to
edit the linking source for the parameter. You can scroll to the linking source
using the UP/DOWN keys, or you can directly enter the parameter number of
the source. When a parameter is linked, this is indicated on both the VALUE
tab and LIMITS tab by the letters “LK” on the top line of the display. To clear
the linking, press the ENTER key while on the LIMITS tab and scroll until the
source is indicated as “DIRECT.” This setting is found by scrolling to
parameter 1 and then pressing the DOWN arrow followed by the ENTER key.
Maximum Speed
Parameter: # 082
1750.0 rpm
VALUE LIMITS SEL
Step 1: At the parameter entry

screen, press ENTER to
highlight the parameter value.
Step 2. Adjust the parameter Maximum Speed

value using the UP/DOWN Parameter: # 082
arrow keys or directly enter the
new value with the numeric 1750.0 rpm
keys, and then press ENTER to
save the value. VALUE LIMITS SEL
If you do not want to save the

value, press ESC/PROG to
return to the initial parameter
0 ... 9
screen. You can then repeat

steps 1 and 2 to change the Maximum Speed
value, or press ESC/PROG to Parameter: # 082
back out of this menu.
2150.0 rpm
VALUE LIMITS SEL
Figure 7.6 – Adjusting Parameters
Table 7.2 – How to Adjust Each Parameter Type
Parameter Type How to Adjust

Numbered List • Use UP/DOWN arrows to advance through a list of selections. The internal
(Enumerated) numeric value and the text description of each value are updated as you scroll.
OR
• Use the numeric keys to directly enter the numeric value of your selection. The
associated text with the new value will not be displayed until you acknowledge
your entry with the ENTER key.
Bit • Use SEL key to move to the bit that you desire to edit. The description of each
bit is displayed after each press of the SEL key. Use the UP/DOWN arrows to
change the value of the bit.
Numeric • Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to increase/decrease the value. OR
• Use the SEL key to move the cursor to the digit location you want to change.
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to change the value of the digit. Continue with
pushing the SEL key to select a new digit to edit. OR
• Use the numeric keys to directly enter the new value.
To restore all parameters to their factory defaults, navigate to the MEM tab
using the SEL key from the main menu. Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to
select the menu item “Reset Defaults.” Press the ENTER key to begin the
process and then press the ENTER key a second time to execute the command.
You can press the ESC key to abort the procedure if it is pressed prior to
pressing the ENTER key a second time.
Note: The parameter values are retained through a line dip or removal of power
from the IPS Tempo.
Loading and Saving User Sets

IPS Tempo configurations, called User Sets, can be saved and recalled for use
at any time.
To save the current IPS Tempo configuration to a user set, navigate to the MEM
tab from the main menu using the SEL key. Using the UP/DOWN arrows,
highlight the menu selection “Drive User Sets” and the press the ENTER key.
Use the UP/DOWN arrows to highlight the menu selection “Save to User Set”
and then press the ENTER key. Use the UP/DOWN arrows to select either User
Set 1, 2, or 3 and then press the ENTER key. You can then choose to save this
user set with the default name by pressing the ESC key followed by the ENTER
key, or you can rename the set by pressing the ENTER key, modifying the
name, and then pressing the ENTER key a second time. Note that user sets
cannot be saved if Dynamic User Sets is enabled (see parameters Dyn UserSet
Cnfg (204) and Dyn UserSet Sel (205)).
To recall or load a previously saved user set into the active memory of the IPS
Tempo, navigate to the MEM tab from the main menu using the SEL key. Using
the UP/DOWN arrows, highlight the menu selection “Drive User Sets” and
then press the ENTER key. Use the UP/DOWN arrows to highlight the menu
selection “Load From User Set” and then press the ENTER key. Next, use the
UP/DOWN arrows to select the user set you wish to recall and then press the
ENTER key. You will get a warning message. Press the ESC key to abort the
process or the ENTER key to complete the recall of the selected user set into
the IPS Tempo active memory. Note that user sets cannot be recalled if
Dynamic User Sets is enabled (see parameters Dyn UserSet Cnfg (204) and
Dyn UserSet Sel (205)).
To identify which user set is currently in active memory, navigate to the MEM
tab from the main menu using the SEL key. Using the UP/DOWN arrows,
highlight the menu selection “Drive User Sets” and press the ENTER key.
Using the UP/DOWN arrows, highlight the menu selection “Active Set Name”
and then press the ENTER key. The name of the active user set will be
displayed in a popup window. Clear the window by pressing the ESC key. Note
that “Active Set” will be displayed if a user set has not been recalled into the
active memory (e.g. after a reset to factory defaults).
Monitoring with the Three process display screens are available on the LCD HIM.
Process/Status Display Two of the process display screens enable you to monitor three process
Screens variables each, for a total of six process variables. You can select the parameter,
scale, and text for each process variable being displayed.
The second process display screen enables you to monitor one process variable
using a large text display. The parameter, scale, and text is the same as the first
line of the first three variable display.
Two status screens are also available to provide quick access to the status of IPS
Tempo digital and analog I/O.
The DISP key will take you to the most recently viewed process/status display
screen from any other screen with a single keystroke. Once one of the
process/status screens is active, the DISP key cycles between the most recently
viewed three variable screen, the large text display, the digital input and output
status screen, and the analog input monitor screen. While displaying the three
variable process screen, you can toggle to the other three variable process
screens by pressing the SEL key.
Additionally, the most recently viewed process or status display screen
becomes active if no keys have been pressed before the display timeout period
expires. Refer to page 7-6 for information about setting the display timeout
period.
Speed Accelerating Up to six process

User can scale
the output
52.3 % variables (three per
screen) can be
values to suit 52.3 % selected to monitor.
the application.
1285.4 rpm Text can be
customized by user.
Figure 7.7 – Three Variable Process (User) Display Screen
Displaying and Changing the HIM Reference

You can display the reference value that the HIM is sending to the IPS Tempo
by pressing the UP/DOWN arrows once when one of the process display
screens is active. Refer to Figure 7.8. The HIM reference can be used for the
speed reference or process setpoint.
While the display is in Process Display Mode, the reference can be changed by
pressing and holding down either the UP/DOWN arrows until the desired value
is displayed. Release the key to return to the process display screen.
Speed Accelerating
HIM Reference
850 rpm
47.2 %
Figure 7.8 – HIM Reference Displayed
Note: Changing the value of the HIM reference does not affect the value of any
other port reference.
The value of the HIM reference is saved through a power cycle if Save HIM
Ref (192) is set to save at power down.
Customizing the Process Display Screen.
Display Process Display Process Variable 1

Language P136 Process FB Out Parameter # 136
Display Adjustments P135 Process Ref Out
Process Display P021 Spd Fdbk No Fil Process FB Out
P019 Ain1 Scaled Val
P002 Commanded Speed
PARAM DIAG DISP SEL PARAM SCALE TEXT SEL
SEL
Use the SEL key to highlight the DISPLAY tab. Using the UP/DOWN
arrows, highlight the "Process Display" line and then press the ENTER key. Process Variable 1
Use the UP/DOWN arrows to select the process variable you wish to edit Scale Factor
and press ENTER. Press ENTER to highlight the parameter name and then
1.00
use the UP/DOWN arrows to select which parameter you wish to display.
Accept your selection with the ENTER key. Use the SEL key to highlight the
Range: ±300.00
SCALE tab. Press ENTER to highlight the scale factor and then use the UP/ PARAM SCALE TEXT SEL
DOWN keys or the numeric keys to modify the value. Press ENTER to
accept your new value. Use the SEL key to highlight the TEXT key. Use the
UP/DOWN keys and the SEL key to edit the units text to be displayed. SEL
Accept the new text with the ENTER key. The ESC key backs you up to the
main menu when you are finished. Process Variable 1
Units Text
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST
PARAM SCALE TEXT SEL
Figure 7.9 – Customizing the Display Process Screen
Controlling the IPS Tempo When the HIM is the selected control source, it can be used to control:
From the LCD HIM • Start (Run)
• Stop
• Clear Faults
• Jog
Note: Pressing two HIM keys at the same time will cause no command to be
sent to the IPS Tempo with the only exception being the STOP key. When
pressed, the STOP key is always processed.
Selecting the Logic and Reference Source

Logic Source Sel (89), Speed Ref A Sel (90), and Speed Ref B Sel (93) are used
to select the IPS Tempo control and speed reference sources. These parameters
are grouped in Control Src Sel under Speed Config when using the Parameters
by Group menu.
Parameters Speed Command Control Src Sel

SEL
Parameters by Group Control Src Sel Logic Source Sel
Linear Param List Spd Mode & Limts Speed Ref A Sel
Changed Parameters Speed References Speed Ref B Sel
Speed Ref Values
SEL
MOTOR SPEED CONTROL SPD MODE
MONITOR SEL
STARTUP PARAM DIAG SEL CONTROL CONFIG SRC SEL & LIMITS SEL
Use the SEL key to highlight the PARAM tab. Press the ENTER key and then use the SEL key to highlight
the SPEED CONFIG tab. Press the ENTER key and then use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the
parameter to edit. Press ENTER to edit the parameter.
Figure 7.10 – Selecting the Control and Reference Source
ATTENTION:Removing and replacing the LCD HIM while the

IPS Tempo is running may cause an abrupt speed change if the
LCD HIM is the selected reference source but is not the selected
control source. The IPS Tempo will ramp to the reference level
provided by the HIM at the rate specified in Accel Time 1 (140),
Accel Time 2 (141), Decel Time 1 (142), and Decel Time 2 (143).
Be aware that an abrupt speed change may occur depending upon
the new reference level and the rate specified in these parameters.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in bodily injury.
These three parameters can also be accessed individually through the Linear
Param list. Refer to chapter 9 for a description of the parameters.
Starting the IPS Tempo

When the HIM is the selected control source, pressing issues a start
command to the IPS Tempo if all run permissives are valid.
Stopping the IPS Tempo

Pressing will issue a stop command to the IPS Tempo.
Important: Stop commands from any attached HIM will always be enabled,
even when not selected as the control source.
Jogging the IPS Tempo

When the HIM is the selected control source, pressing sends a jog JOG
command to the motor as long as the key is pressed. JOG will stop when the
key is released.
Chapter 8
Programming Basics
To program the IPS Tempo for a specific application, you adjust the appropriate
parameters. The parameters are used to define characteristics of the IPS Tempo.
This chapter provides an overview of parameter types and how they are
organized. Parameter descriptions are provided in chapter 9.
About Parameters There are three types of parameters:

• Numbered List (Enumerated) Parameters
Numbered list parameters allow a selection from two or more options. The
LCD HIM displays a text message for each item.
Example: Speed Ref A Sel (90)
• Bit Parameters
Bit parameters have individual bits associated with features or conditions. If
the bit is 0, the feature is off or the condition is false. If the bit is 1, the
feature is on or the condition is true.
Example: Dig In Status (216)
• Numeric Parameters
These parameters have a single numerical value (for example, 0.1 volts).
Example: Maximum Freq (55)
Parameters are also categorized as configurable, tunable or read-only.
Configurable parameters can be adjusted or changed only while the IPS
Tempo is stopped.
Tunable parameters can be adjusted or changed while the IPS Tempo is
running or stopped.
Read-only parameters cannot be adjusted.
How Parameters are Parameters are organized into 9 files:

Organized • Monitor
• Motor Control
• Speed Config
• Process Config
• Dynamic Control
• IPS Config
• Utility
• Communication
• Inputs & Outputs
Each file contains parameters that are organized into groups by their function.
A file can contain several groups of parameters. See Figure 8.1 and Table 8.1.
8-2 Programming Basics
MONITOR IPS CONFIG

Metering
IPS Setup
Drive Data IPS Status
Power Monitor
MOTOR CONTROL ConditionMonitor
Motor Data Process Monitor
Torq Attributes DigInput Monitor
Volts per Hertz Auto Set Adj Mon
Encoder Setup
UTILITY
SPEED CONFIG OIM Ref Config
Control Src Sel
MOP Config
Spd Mode & Limits Drive Memory
Speed References
Diagnostics
Speed Ref Vals
Faults
Speed Trim Alarms

Slip Comp
Scaled Blocks
Speed Regulator
COMMUNICATION
PROCESS CONFIG Comm Control
Process Setup Datalinks
Process Ref Security
Process Feedback
INPUTS & OUTPUTS
Process Status
Analog Inputs
Analog Outputs
DYNAMIC CONTROL
Digital Inputs
Ramp Rates
Digital Outputs
Load Limits
Stop/Brake Modes
Restart Modes
Power Loss
Figure 8.1 – Parameter Organization
Note: Table 8.1 displays parameters that are available at the Advanced
programming level.
Programming Basics 8-3
Table 8.1 – File, Group and Parameter Organization
File Group Parameters

Monitor Metering 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22,
23, 24, 25, 729, 730
Drive Data 26, 27, 28, 29
Motor Control Motor Data 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 706, 707, 708
Torq Attributes 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 61, 62, 63, 64, 66, 67, 427, 428, 429, 430,
431, 432, 433, 434, 435, 436, 437, 438, 440, 441
Volts per Hertz 69, 70, 71, 72
Encoder Setup 412, 413, 414, 415, 416, 419, 420, 421, 422, 423
Speed Config Control Src Sel 89, 90, 93
Spd Mode & Limits 79, 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88
Speed References 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 286
Speed Ref Vals 100, 101, 102, 103, 104, 105, 106, 107, 108
Speed Trim 116, 117, 118, 119, 120
Slip Comp 121, 122, 123
Speed Regulator 445, 446, 447, 448, 449, 450, 451
Process Config Process Setup 124, 125, 129, 130, 131, 132, 133, 139, 459, 464
Process Ref 126, 127, 128, 711, 712, 741, 742, 743, 744, 745, 746, 747
Process Feedback 128
Process Status 127, 134, 135, 136, 137, 138
Dynamic Control Ramp Rates 140, 141, 142, 143, 146
Load Limits 147, 148, 149, 150, 151, 152, 153, 154, 189
Stop/Brake Modes 145, 155, 156, 157, 158, 159, 160, 161, 162, 163, 164, 165, 166
Restart Modes 167, 168, 169, 170, 174, 175, 178, 179, 180, 181, 182, 183
Power Loss 177, 184, 185, 186, 187, 188
IPS Config IPS Setup 174, 175, 700, 701, 702, 703
IPS Status 720, 721, 722, 723, 724, 725, 726, 727, 728, 730, 802, 803
Power Monitor 750, 751, 752, 753, 754, 757, 758, 761
Condition Monitor 19, 20, 770, 771, 772, 773, 774, 775, 776, 777, 778
Process Monitor 780, 781, 782, 783
DigInput Monitor 790, 791, 792, 793, 794, 795, 796, 797, 798, 799
Auto Set Adj Mon 800, 801, 804, 805, 806, 807, 808, 809, 810, 811, 812, 813, 814, 815,
816, 817, 818, 819, 820, 821, 822, 823
Utility HIM Ref Config 192, 193
MOP Config 194, 195
Drive Memory 196, 197, 198, 199, 200, 201, 202, 203, 204, 205, 206
Diagnostics 209, 210, 211, 212, 213, 214, 215, 216, 217, 218, 219, 220, 221, 222,
223, 224, 225, 226, 227, 228, 229, 230, 234, 235, 236, 237, 287, 288
Faults 238, 240, 241, 242, 243, 244, 245, 246, 247, 248, 249, 250, 251, 252,
253, 254, 255, 256, 257, 258
Alarms 259, 261, 262, 263, 264, 265, 266, 267, 268, 269, 850, 851, 852, 853,
854, 855, 856, 857
Scaled Blocks 476, 477, 478, 479, 480, 481, 482, 483, 484, 485, 486, 487, 488, 489,
490, 491, 492, 493, 494, 495, 496, 497, 498, 499
Communication Comm Control 270, 271, 272, 273, 274, 275, 298, 299
Datalinks 300, 301, 302, 303, 304, 305, 306, 307, 308, 310, 311, 312, 313, 314,
315, 316, 317
Security 595, 596, 597, 598
Inputs and Analog Inputs 320, 321, 322, 323, 324, 325, 326, 327, 331, 332, 333, 334, 335, 336
Outputs Analog Outputs 340, 341, 342, 343, 344, 345, 346, 347, 354, 355, 377, 378
Digital Inputs 216, 361, 362, 363, 364, 365, 366, 411
Digital Outputs 217, 379, 380, 381, 382, 383, 384, 385, 386, 387, 388, 389, 390, 391,
392, 393, 394, 395, 396, 397, 398
Accessing the Parameters Parameters are programmed and viewed using the LCD HIM, DriveTools SP
software or DriveExplorer software.
The LCD HIM displays parameters by group, by individual parameter number,
and by parameters that have changed from their default value.
To access parameters using the LCD HIM, select the parameters tab from the
main screen. Refer to Figure 8.2.
Refer to Chapter 7 for information on modifying parameters using the LCD
HIM.
Parameters Parameters Parameters

Parameters by Group Parameters by Group Parameters by Group
Linear Param List Linear Param List Linear Param List
Changed Parameters Changed Parameters Changed Parameters
STARTUP PARAM DIAG SEL STARTUP PARAM DIAG SEL STARTUP PARAM DIAG SEL
Speed Command Output Frequency RO Logic Source Sel

Control Src Sel Parameter: # 001 Parameter: # 089
Spd Mode & Limts
Speed References 58.3 HZ Terminal Blk 0
Speed Ref Vals
MOTOR SPEED
MONITOR SEL
CONTROL COMMAND VALUE LIMITS SEL VALUE LIMITS SEL
Figure 8.2 – Accessing the Parameters using the LCD HIM
Selecting the Parameter Access Level

The IPS Tempo provides three levels of access to the parameters: Basic (0),
Standard (1), and Advanced (2).
The Advanced level allows access to all of the parameters.
The Standard level allows access to a subset of the Advanced level and is used
for more sophisticated applications than the Basic level.
The Basic level allows access to a subset of the Standard level and contains
only the most commonly used parameters.
The active access level is displayed in Parameter Access Level (196).
To select the parameter access level using the LCD HIM, select the Password
tab from the main menu. Refer to Figure 8.3.
Important: If you are using DriveTools SP or DriveExplorer software and the

access level is changed (through Parameter Access Level (196)),
you must reconnect to the IPS Tempo.
Password
Set Access Level
Set AccLvl Password
Password
Set Access
Select Level
Access
Set AccLvlLevel
Password
Set Esc:No
WrtProt Password
:Yes
Basic
Figure 8.3 – Selecting the Parameter Access Level
Using the Parameter Access Level Password to Restrict Access to

Other Parameter Levels
ATTENTION: It is the user’s responsibility to determine how to

distribute the access level password. Allen-Bradley and Flowserve
are not responsible for unauthorized access violations within the
user’s organization. Failure to observe this precaution could result
in bodily injury.
The LCD HIM provides the option to restrict access to other parameter levels.
This feature requires the use of a user-defined password when an attempt to
change the access level is made.
To set the access level password, select the Password tab from the main menu.
Refer to Figure 8.4. The password value can range from 1 to 9999. A value of 0
disables the password (factory default). You must either select Logout or return
to the process display screen to activate the password.
When you enter the password, you can change access levels until you return to
the process display screen, which re-activates the password.
Note that once the password is enabled, you will also be prompted to enter the
password to access the Set Acc Lvl PW option.
This option is not supported in DriveTools SP or DriveExplorer software.
Password
Set Access Level
Set AccLvl Password
Password
Set Access
EnterLevel
new
Set AccLvl
AccessPassword
Level
Password
0
Figure 8.4 – Setting the Access Level Password
If There is More Than One HIM Connected to the IPS Tempo

Note that setting or changing the access level password on one HIM will set or
change the access level password for all HIMs connected to the IPS Tempo.
Using the Write-Protect

Password to Ensure ATTENTION: It is the user’s responsibility to determine how to
Program Security distribute the write-protect password. Allen-Bradley and Flowserve
are not responsible for unauthorized access violations within the
user’s organization. Failure to observe this precaution could result
in bodily injury.
All parameter values can be write-protected using the LCD HIM. When the
password is enabled, parameter values can still be displayed. However, if there
is an attempt to change a parameter value, a password pop-up box will appear
on the HIM screen to prompt for the user-defined password.
To set the write-protect password, select the Password tab from the main menu.
Refer to Figure 8.5. The password value can range from 1 to 9999. A value of 0
disables the password (factory default).
When the password is enabled, the lock symbol on the screen changes from
to .
When you enter the password, you can adjust parameters until you select
Logout or return to the process display screen, which re-activates the password.
This option is not supported in DriveTools SP or DriveExplorer software.
Password
Set Access Level
Set AccLvl Password
Password
Set Access
EnterLevel
new
Set AccLvl
Write Protect
Password
Password
0
Figure 8.5 – Setting the Write-Protect Password
If There is More Than One HIM Connected to the IPS Tempo
Important: Setting the write-protect password value to zero on one HIM will
disable the write-protect password on all connected HIMs.
Setting the write-protect password in one HIM will not affect any other HIM
connected to the IPS Tempo unless a write-protect password has also been set
in the other HIMs. In this case, the last password value entered becomes the
password value for all password-protected HIMs. (Each HIM cannot have a
different password value.)
For example, if the write-protect password has been set to 5555 for the local
HIM, someone using a remote HIM with no write-protect password set can still
program all of the parameters. If the write-protect password is then set to 4444
on the remote HIM, you will be required to enter 4444 on the local HIM to
program the parameters.
Notes
Chapter 9
Parameter Descriptions
The following information is provided for each parameter along with its
description:
Parameter Number: Unique number assigned to each parameter.
Parameter Name: Unique name assigned to each parameter.
Range: Predefined parameter limits or selections. Note that a negative Hz
value indicates reverse rotation.
Default: Factory default setting.
Access: Parameter access level.
0 = Basic (reduced parameter set)
1 = Standard
2 = Advanced (full parameter set)
Path: Menu selections to reach specified parameter. The path is indicated
in this manner: File>Group
See also: Associated parameters that may provide additional or related
information.
What the Symbols Mean
Symbol Meaning
IPS Tempo must be stopped before changing parameter value.
Parameter is only displayed when Motor Cntl Sel (53) is set to “4.” (FVC
FV Vector)
Parameter is specific to the IPS Tempo.

IPS
The parameters are presented in numerical order. Appendix C contains a list of

parameters by name cross-referenced to parameter number.
9-2 Parameter Descriptions
Parameters
1 Output Freq
Range: +/-400.0 Hz [0.1 Hz]
Default: Read Only
Access: 0 Path: Monitor>Metering
See also:
The output frequency present at T1, T2, and T3 (U, V, and W).
2 Commanded Speed
Range: +/- [P.082 Maximum Speed] [0.1 Hz or 0.1 RPM]
Default: Read Only
See also: 79, 213
The value of the active Speed/Frequency Reference. The value of Speed Units
(79) determines the units in which the parameter is displayed.
3 Output Current
Range: 0.0 to IPS Tempo Rated Amps x 2 [0.1 A]
Default: Read Only
See also:
The total output current present at T1, T2, and T3 (U, V, and W).
4 Torque Current
Range: IPS Tempo Rating x -2/+2 [0.1 A]
Default: Read Only
See also:
The amount of current that is in phase with the fundamental voltage
component.
5 Flux Current
Range: IPS Tempo Rating x -2/+2 [0.1 A]
Default: Read Only
See also:
The amount of current that is out of phase with the fundamental voltage
component.
6 Output Voltage
Range: 0.0 to IPS Tempo Rated Volts [0.1 VAC]
Default: Read Only
See also: 54, 202
The output voltage present at terminals T1, T2, and T3 (U, V, and W).
Parameter Descriptions 9-3
7 Output Power
Range: 0.0 to 2400.0 [0.1 kW]
Default: Read Only
See also: 46
The output power present at T1, T2, and T3 (U, V, and W). The value of Mtr
NP Pwr Units (46) determines the units in which the parameter is displayed.
8 Output Powr Fctr
Range: 0.00 to 1.00 [0.01]
Default: Read Only
See also:
The output power factor.
9 Elapsed MWh
Range: 0.0 to 214,748,352.0 MWh [0.1 MWh]
Default: Read Only
See also:
The accumulated output energy of the IPS Tempo.
10 Elapsed Run Time
Range: 0.0 to 214,748,352.0 Hr [0.1 Hr]
Default: Read Only
See also:
The accumulated time the IPS Tempo has been outputting power.
11 MOP Reference
Range: +/- [Maximum Speed] [0.1 Hz or 0.1 RPM]
Default: Read Only
See also: 79, 194, 195
The value of the signal at the MOP (Motor-Operated Potentiometer). The value
of Speed Units (79) determines the units in which the parameter is displayed.
12 DC Bus Voltage
Range: 0 to Based on IPS Tempo Rating [0.1 VDC]
Default: Read Only
See also:
The present DC bus voltage level.
13 DC Bus Memory
Range: 0 to Based on IPS Tempo Rating [0.1 VDC]
Default: Read Only
See also:
A six-minute average of the DC bus voltage level.
14 Elapsed kWh
Range: 0 to 429,496,729.5 kWh [0.1 kWh]
Default: Read Only
See also:
The accumulated output energy of the IPS Tempo.
16 Analog In1 Value
17 Analog In2 Value
Range: 0.000 to 20.000 [0.001 mA]
-/+ 10.000 V [0.001 V]
Default: Read Only
See also: 320-327
The value of the signal of the analog input. The value of Anlg In Config (320)
determines the units in which the parameter is displayed.
18 PTC HW Value
Range: 0.00 to 5.00 Volts [0.01 Volts]
Default: Read Only
See also:
This parameter displays the value present at the IPS Tempo’s PTC input
terminals. When a motor is provided with a PTC (positive temperature
coefficient) thermal sensor, it can be connected to terminals 10 and 23. Refer to
page 6-6 for wiring example.
19 Ain 1 Scaled Val
Range: 0.0 to 99999.9 [0.1]
FV Default: Read Only
IPS Config>ConditionMonitor
See also: 331
This parameter displays the analog input value scaled to its units, which are
determined by the value of Ain1 SensorUnits (331).
20 Ain 2 Scaled Val
Range: 0.0 to 99999.9 [0.1]
See also: 333
This parameter displays the analog input value scaled to its units, which are
determined by Ain2 SensorUnits (333).
21 Spd Fdbk No Filt

Range: +/- 400.0 Hz or +/- 24000.0 RPM [0.1 Hz or 0.1 RPM]
Default: Read Only
See also: 79
Displays the unfiltered value of the actual motor speed based on either the
measured encoder feedback or on an estimation when an encoder is not present.
The value of Speed Units (79) determines the units in which the parameter is
displayed.
22 Ramped Speed
Range: +/- 400.0 Hz or +/- 24,000.0 RPM [0.1 Hz or 0.1 RPM]
Default: Read Only
See also: 79
The value of commanded speed after Accel/Decel and S-Curve are applied. The
value of Speed Units (79) determines the units in which the parameter is
displayed.
23 Speed Reference
Range: +/- 400.0 Hz or +/- 24,000.0 RPM [0.1] Hz or RPM]
Default: Read Only
See also: 79
The summed value of ramped speed, process PI and droop. When FVC Vector
mode is selected, droop will not be added. The value of Speed Units (79)
24 Commanded Torque
Range: +/- 800.0% [0.1%]
See also: 53
The final torque reference value after limits and filtering are applied. Percent of
motor rated torque.
25 Speed Feedback
Range: +/- 400.0 Hz or +/- 24,000.0 RPM [0.1 Hz or 0.1 RPM]
Default: Read Only
See also: 79
Displays the lightly filtered value of the actual motor speed based on measured
encoder feedback or an estimation. The value of Speed Units (79) determines
the units in which the parameter is displayed.
26 Rated kW
Range: 0.00 to 3000.00 kW [0.01 kW]
Default: Read Only
Access: 0 Path: Monitor>Drive Data
See also:
The IPS Tempo power rating.
27 Rated Volts
Range: 0.0 to 65535.0 VAC [0.1 VAC]
Default: Read Only
See also:
The IPS Tempo input voltage class (208, 240, 400, etc.).
28 Rated Amps
Range: 0.0 to 6553.5 Amps [0.1 Amps]
Default: Read Only
See also:
The IPS Tempo rated output current.
29 Control SW Ver
Range: 0.000 to 65535.000 [0.001]
Default: Read Only
See also:
The Main Control board software version.
40 Motor Type
Range: 0 = Induction
1 = Synchr Reluc
2 = Synchr PM
Default: 0 = Induction
Access: 2 Path: Motor Control>Motor Data
See also:
Set to match the type of motor connected: Induction, Synchronous Reluctance,
or Synchronous Permanent Magnet.
Important: Selecting option 1 or 2 also requires selection of “Custom V/Hz,”
option 2 in Motor Cntl Sel (53).
41 Motor NP Volts
Range: 0.0 to IPS Tempo Rated Volts [0.1 VAC]
Default: Based on IPS Tempo Rating
See also:
Set to the motor nameplate rated volts. The motor nameplate base voltage
defines the output voltage when operating at rated current, rated speed, and
rated temperature.
42 Motor NP FLA
Range: 0.0 to Rated Amps x 2 [0.1 Amps]
See also: 47, 48
Set to the motor nameplate rated full load amps. The motor nameplate FLA
defines the output amps when operating at rated voltage, rated speed, rated
load, and rated temperature. It is used in the motor thermal overload and in the
calculation of slip.
43 Motor NP Hertz
Range: 5.0 to 400.0 Hz [0.1 Hz]
Default: Based on IPS Tempo Type
See also:
Set to the motor nameplate rated frequency. The motor nameplate base
frequency defines the output frequency when operating at rated voltage, rated
current, rated speed, and rated temperature.
44 Motor NP RPM
Range: 60.0 to 25200.0 RPM [0.1 RPM]
Default: 1740 RPM
See also: 49, 80, 121
Set to the motor nameplate rated RPM. The motor nameplate RPM defines the
rated speed when operating at motor nameplate base frequency, rated current,
base voltage, and rated temperature. This is used to calculate slip
45 Motor NP Power
Range: 0.00 to 1000.00 [0.01 kW or 0.01 HP]
See also: 46
Set to the motor nameplate rated power. The motor nameplate power is used
with the other nameplate values to calculate default values for motor
parameters to assist the commissioning process. This may be entered in
horsepower or in kilowatts as selected in Mtr NP Pwr Units (46).
46 Mtr NP Pwr Units
Range: 0 = Horsepower (changes power units to HP without rescaling values)
1 = kilowatts (changes power units to kW without rescaling values)
2 = Convert HP (converts all power units to HP and rescales values)
3 = Convert kW (changes power units to kW and rescales values)
See also: 45
Selects the motor power units to be used. This parameter determines the units
for Motor NP Power (45).
Convert HP = Converts all power units to Horsepower.
Convert kW = Converts all power units to kilowatts.
47 Motor OL Hertz
Range: 0.0 to Motor NP Hz [0.1 Hz]
Default: Motor NP Hz/3
See also: 42, 220
Selects the output frequency below which the motor operating current is
derated. The motor thermal overload will then generate a fault at lower levels of
current.
48 Motor OL Factor
Range: 0.20 to 2.00 [0.1]
Default: 1.00
See also: 42, 220
Sets the amps threshold for motor overload fault:
Motor NP FLA (42) x Motor OL Factor (48) = Operating Level
49 Motor Poles
Range: 2 to 40 [1 Pole]
Default: 4
See also: 43, 44
Defines the number of poles in the motor.
50 Motor OL Mode
Range: Refer to figure below
Default: Refer to figure below
See also:
Provides the ability to preserve the [Motor OL Count] value through a power
cycle or drive reset.
This is an enhanced version of the v4.002 Motor Overload Memory function. In
v4.002, the ability to preserve the value of [Motor OL Count], parameter 220
through a power cycle was added and enabled through testpoint (#629).
Set [234 Testpoint 1 Sel] = 629 and then set [235 Testpoint 1 Data] to 1 or
Set [236 Testpoint 2 Sel] = 629 and then set [237 Testpoint 2 Data] to 1.
In earlier software versions the value of [Motor OL Count] was NOT
maintained through a drive reset. That enhancement is now offered. The
testpoint method will still work, but the preferred method is to set [Motor OL
Mode], parameter 50.
et
cR
Cy
r
Pw
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 0 1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x = Reserved
Bit #
Factory Default Bit Values
Pwr Cyc Ret = If bit 0 is set to “0” (Disabled) the value of [Motor OL Count], parameter 220 is reset to
zero by a drive reset or power cycle. A “1” (Enabled) will maintain the value. A transition from “1” to “0”
resets [Motor OL Count] to zero.
53 Motor Cntl Sel

Range: 0 = Sensrls Vect
1 = SV Economize
2 = Custom V/Hz
3 = Fan/Pmp-V/Hz
4 = FVC Vector
Default: 0 = Sensrls Vect
Access: 2 Path: Motor Control>Torq Attributes
See also: 80
Sets the method of motor control used in the IPS Tempo.
Important: “FVC Vector” mode with encoder feedback requires autotuning of

the motor, both coupled and uncoupled to the load. Being coupled
to the load will determine inertia (preferably lightly loaded). Total
Inertia (450) will have to be estimated if uncoupled for tuning of
the speed loop or separately adjust Ki (445) and Kp (446).
Sensrls Vect = Maintains consistent magnetizing current up to base speed. Voltage increases as a
function of load.
SV Economize = Allows the IPS Tempo to automatically adjust output voltage as the load changes to
minimize current supplied to the motor. The voltage is adjusted by means of flux current adaptation.
Custom V/Hz = Allows the user to tailor the volts/hertz curve by adjusting parameters Maximum
Voltage (54), Maximum Frequency (55), Run Boost (70), Break Voltage (71) and Break Frequency (72).
Fan/Pmp V/Hz = This mode sets a fan load volts/hertz curve profile exponential to base frequency
(and linear from base to maximum frequency). Run Boost (70) can offset the low speed curve point.
FVC Vector = This mode requires autotuning of the motor, both coupled and uncoupled to the load.
54 Maximum Voltage
Range: (Rated Volts x 0.25) to Rated Volts [0.1 VAC]
Default: Drive Rated Volts
See also: 197
Sets the highest voltage the IPS Tempo will output.
55 Maximum Freq
Range: 5.0 to 420.0 Hz [0.1 Hz]
Default: 110.0 or 130.0 Hz
FV Access: 2 Path: Motor Control>Torq Attributes
See also: 82, 83, 298
Sets the maximum allowable frequency the IPS Tempo will output. Note that
this is not maximum speed, which is set in parameter 82. Refer to Figure 9.1.
ATTENTION: The user is responsible for ensuring that the driven

machinery, all drive-train mechanisms, and application material are
capable of safe operation at the maximum operating speed of the
IPS Tempo. Overspeed detection in the IPS Tempo determines
when the IPS Tempo shuts down. The factory default for overspeed
detection is set to 10.0 Hz (or 300.0 RPM) greater than the
Maximum Speed (82). Failure to observe this precaution could
result in equipment damage, sever injury or loss of life.
Allowable Output Frequency Range -

Bus Regulation or Current Limit
Allowable Output Frequency Range - Normal Operation
Allowable Speed Reference Range

V
o Max Volts
l (54)
t Motor Volts
a (41)
g Frequency Trim
e due to Speed
Control Mode Overspeed
Limit
Break Volts (83)
(71)
Start Boost
(69)
Run
Boost
(70)
0 Min Break Motor NP Hz Max Output Maximum
Speed Frequency (43) Speed Freq Limit Freq
(81) (72) Frequency (82) (55)
Figure 9.1 – Speed Limits
56 Compensation
Range: Refer to figure 9.2
Default: Refer to figure 9.2
See also: 140-143, 155, 197
Enables/disables the compensation correction options.
TP n Da M (2)
Wa 1)
oc
(
Xs ap v
PW ncdl og
ve
Re le J lc
En utoC g
Ad Re
M ess
fle erk
qL
W
a
A ia
E tL
Dig yncP
is t
Ixo tor D
Fre
Rs ad
ct
e
rL
ab
S
I
No
Mt
x x x x x 0 0 0 0 x 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x = Reserved
Bit # (1) For current limit (except FVC Vector mode).
Factory Default Bit Values (2) Firmware 6.001 and later.
Reflect Wave = Enables/disables reflected wave correction software, which reduces overvoltage
transients from the IPS Tempo to the motor. For lead lengths beyond 300 feet, enable this feature.
Enable Jerk = Enables/disables the jerk limit in the current limiter that helps to eliminate overcurrent
trips on fast accelerations. Disable this feature if your application requires the actual acceleration of the
motor to be faster than .25 sec. In non-FVC Vector modes, disabling jerk removes a short S-curve at
the start of the accel/decel ramp.
Ixo AutoCalc = Reserved
Xsistor Diag = Enables/disables power transistor power diagnostic tests that execute at each Start
command.
Rs Adapt = FVC with an encoder only; disabling may improve torque regulation at lower speeds
(typically not needed).
Mtr Lead Rev = Reverses the phase rotation of the applied voltage, effectively reversing the motor
leads.
DigIn DatLog = Enables DigIn DataLogic (411).
PWM FreqLock = Keeps the PWM frequency from decreasing to 2 kHz at low operating frequencies in
FVC vector mode without an encoder.
NoSyncPWM = Disables synchronus pwm.
57 Flux Up Mode
Range: 0 = Manual
1 = Automatic
Default: 0 = Manual
See also: 53, 58
Manual (0): Flux is established for Flux Up Time (58) before acceleration
Auto (1): Flux is established for a calculated time period based on motor nameplate data. Flux Up
Time (58) is not used.
58 Flux Up Time
Range: 0.000 to 5.000 sec [0.001 sec]
Default: 0.000 sec
See also: 53, 58
Sets the amount of time the IPS Tempo will use to try to achieve full motor
stator flux. When a start command is issued, DC current at current limit level is
used to build stator flux before accelerating.
59 SV Boost Filter
Range: 0 to 32767 [1]
Default: 500
See also:
Sets the amount of filtering used to boost voltage during Sensorless Vector and
FVC Vector (encoderless) operation..
61 Autotune
Range: 0 = Ready
1 = Static Tune
2 = Rotate Tune
3 = Calculate
Default: 3 = Calculate
See also: 53, 62
Provides a manual or automatic method for setting IR Voltage Drop (62), Flux
Current Ref (63) and Ixo Voltage Drop (64). Valid only when Motor Cntl Sel
(53) is set to Sensrls Vect, SV Economize or FVC Vector.
Ready (0) = Parameter returns to this setting following a Static Tune or Rotate Tune. It also permits
manually setting IR Voltage Drop (62), Ixo Voltage Drop (64) and Flux Current Ref (63).
Static Tune (1) = A temporary command that initiates a non-rotational motor stator resistance test for
the best possible automatic setting of IR Voltage Drop (62) in all valid modes and a non-rotational
motor leakage inductance test for the best possible automatic setting of Ixo Voltage Drop (64) in FVC
Vector Mode. A start command is required following the initiation of this setting. The parameter returns
to Ready (0) following the test, at which time another start transition is required to operate the IPS
Tempo in normal mode. Used when the motor cannot be rotated.
Rotate Tune (2) = A temporary command that initiates a Static Tune followed by a rotational test for the
best possible automatic setting of Flux Current Ref (63). In FVC Vector mode, with encoder feedback, a
test for the best possible automatic setting of Slip RPM @ FLA (121) is also run. A start command is
required following initiation of this setting. The parameter returns to Ready (0) following the test, at
which time another start transition is required to operate the drive in normal mode.
Important: Rotate Tune (2) is used when the motor is uncoupled from the
load. Results may not be valid if a load is coupled to the motor
during this procedure.
ATTENTION: Rotation of the motor in an undesired direction can

occur during this procedure (Autotune (61) = Rotate Tune (2)). To
guard against possible injury and/or equipment damage, it is
recommended that the motor be disconnected from the load before
proceeding.
Calculate (3) = This setting uses motor nameplate data to automatically set IR Voltage Drop (62), Ixo
Voltage (64) and Flux Current Ref (63).
62 IR Voltage Drop
Range: 0.0 to Motor NP Volts x 0.25 [0.1 VAC]
See also: 53, 61
Value of volts dropped across the resistance of the motor stator. Used only
when Motor Cntl Sel (53) is set to Sensrls Vect, SV Economize or FVC Vector.
63 Flux Current Ref
Range: 0.00 to Motor NP FLA [0.01 Amps]
See also: 53, 61
Value of amps for full motor flux. Used only when Motor Cntl Sel (53) is set to
Sensrls Vect, SV Economize or FVC Vector.
64 Ixo Voltage Drop
Range: 0.00 to 230.0, 460.0 or 575.0 VAC [0.1 VAC]
See also: 61, 53
Sets the value of the voltage drop across the leakage inductance of the motor at
rated motor current. Used only when Motor Cntl Sel (53) is set to Sensrls Vect,
SV Economize or FVC Vector.
66 Autotune Torque
Range: 0.0 to 150% [0.1%]
Default: 50%
See also: 53
Specifies motor torque applied to the motor during the flux current and inertia
tests performed during an autotune.
67 Inertia Autotune
Range: 0 = Ready
1 = Inertia Tune
Default: 0 = Ready
FV
See also: 53, 66, 445, 446, 449, 450
Provides an automatic method of setting Total Inertia. This test is automatically
run during Start-Up motor tests.
ATTENTION: For proper results of the Inertia Tune, the load must
be connected to the motor. Inertia Tune will cause the motor and
load to rotate at speeds that may reach maximum speed. To guard
against possible injury and/or equipment damage, all guards must
be in place and rotating members of the driven equipment must
have the ability to rotate freely. All personnel must remain clear of
all rotating equipment during this test. Failure to observe this
Important: Use when motor is coupled to the load. Results may not be valid if
the load is not coupled to the motor during this procedure.
Ready = Parameter returns to this setting following a completed inertia tune.
Inertia Tune = A temporary command that initiates an inertia test of the motor/load combination. The
motor will ramp up and down, while the IPS Tempo measures the amount of inertia.
69 Start/Acc Boost
Default: Based on IPS Tempo rating
Access: 2 Path: Motor Control>Volts per Hertz
See also: 53, 70
Sets the voltage boost level for starting and acceleration when Custom V/Hz
mode is selected.
70 Run Boost
Default: Based on IPS Tempo rating
See also: 53, 69,
Sets the boost level for steady state or deceleration when Fan/Pmp V/Hz or
Custom V/Hz modes are selected.
71 Break Voltage
Range: 0.0 to Motor NP Volts [0.1 VAC]
Default: Motor NP Volts x 0.25
See also: 53, 72
Sets the voltage the IPS Tempo will output at Break Frequency (72).
72 Break Frequency
Range: 0.0 to Maximum Freq [0.1 Hz]
Default: Motor NP Freq x 0.25
See also: 53, 71
Sets the frequency the IPS Tempo will output at Break Voltage (71).
79 Speed Units
Range: 0 = Hz
1 = RPM
2 = Convert Hz
3 = Convert RPM
Default: 1 = RPM
Access: 0 Path: Speed Config>Spd Mode & Limits
See also:
Selects the units to be used for all speed related parameters. Options 0 and 1
indicate status only. Options 2 and 3 will convert and/or configure the IPS
Tempo for that selection.
Convert Hz (2) = Converts all speed based parameters to Hz and changes the value proportionately
(i.e. 1800 RPM = 60 Hz).
Convert RPM (3) = Converts all speed based parameters to RPM and changes the value
proportionately.
80 Speed FB Select
Range: 0 = Open Loop
1 = Slip Comp
2 = Reserved
3 = Encoder
4 = Reserved
5 = Simulator
Default: 1 = Slip Comp
See also: 53, 121, 152, 412, 413
Selects the source for motor speed feedback. Note that all selections are
available when using Process PI.
ATTENTION: When operating the drive with encoder feedback

selected (Feedback Select (80) = 3 (Encoder)), a loss of encoder
signal may produce an overspeed condition. For differential
encoders, Motor Fdbk Type (412) should be selected as option 1 or
3 to detect the loss of an encoder signal. The user is responsible for
ensuring that the driven machinery, all drive-train mechanisms, and
application material are capable of safe operation at the maximum
operating speed of the drive. Overspeed detection in the drive
determines when the drive shuts down. The factory default for
overspeed detection is set to 10.0 Hz (or 300.0 RPM) greater than
the Maximum Speed (82). Failure to observe this precaution could
Open Loop (0) = Provides no speed compensation due to load variations. This is strict volts per hertz
output as a function of the speed reference. Slip compensation is not needed and an encoder is not
present.
Slip Comp (1) = Provides for frequency output adjustment as a function of load. The amount of
compensation is defined by the value of Slip RPM @ FLA (121). It is used when tight speed control is
needed and an encoder is not present.
Encoder (3) = An encoder is present and connected to the drive.
Simulator (5) = Simulates a motor for testing IPS Tempo operation and interface check.
81 Minimum Speed
Range: 0.0 to Maximum Speed [0.1 Hz or 0.1 RPM]
Default: 0.0
See also: 79, 83, 92, 95
Sets the low limit for the speed reference after scaling is applied. The value of
Speed Units (79) determines the units in which the parameter is displayed.
ATTENTION: The IPS Tempo can operate at and maintain zero

speed. The user is responsible for assuring safe conditions for
operating personnel by providing suitable guards, audible or visual
alarms, or other devices to indicate that the IPS Tempo is operating
or may operate at or near zero speed. Failure to observe this
82 Maximum Speed
Range: 5.0 to 400.0 [0.1 Hz] or 75.0 to 24000.0 RPM [0.1 RPM]
Default: 50.0 or 60.0 Hz (Volt Class) [Motor NP RPM]
See also: 55, 79, 83, 91, 94, 202, 298
Sets the high limit for the speed reference after scaling is applied. The value of

machinery, all IPS Tempo-train mechanisms, and application
material are capable of safe operation at the maximum operating
speed of the IPS Tempo. Overspeed detection in the IPS Tempo
determines when the IPS Tempo shuts down. The factory default
for overspeed detection is set to 10.0 Hz (or 300.0 RPM) greater
than the Maximum Speed (82). Failure to observe this precaution
could result in equipment damage, sever injury or loss of life.
83 Overspeed Limit
Range: 0.0 to 20.0 Hz [0.1 Hz] or 0.0 to 600.0 RPM [0.1 RPM]
Default: 10.0 Hz or 300.0 RPM
See also: 55, 79, 82
Sets the incremental amount of the output frequency (above Maximum Speed)
allowable for functions such as slip compensation. The value of Speed Units
(79) determines the units in which the parameter is displayed. Refer to Figure
9.1
Maximum Speed (82) + Overspeed Limit (83) must be ≤ to Maximum
Frequency (55)

84 Skip Frequency 1
85 Skip Frequency 2
86 Skip Frequency 3
Range: -/+ Maximum Speed [0.1 Hz or 0.1 RPM]
See also: 87
Sets a frequency at which the IPS Tempo will not operate (also called an
avoidance frequency). Requires that both Skip Frequency 1-3 and Skip
Frequency Band (87) be set to a value other than 0. The value of Speed Units
(79) determines the units in which the parameter is displayed.
87 Skip Freq Band
Range: 0.0 to 30.0 Hz [0.1 Hz or 0.1 RPM]
See also: 84, 85, 86
Determines the bandwidth around a skip frequency (half the band above and
half the band below the skip frequency). The same bandwidth applies to all skip
frequencies. The value of Speed Units (79) determines the units in which the
parameter is displayed.
88 Speed/Torque Mod
Range: 0 = Zero Torque
1 = Speed Reg
FV 2 = Torque Reg
3 = Min Torq/Spd
4 = Max Torq/Spd
5 = Sum Torq/Spd
6 = Absolut
Default: 1 = Speed Reg
See also: 53, 361-366
ATTENTION: When selecting operation in a torque mode

configuration, the user is responsible for ensuring that the driven
Selects the torque reference source.

Zero Torque (0) = Torque Command = 0.
Speed Reg (1) = IPS Tempo operates as a speed regulator.
Torque Reg (2) = An external torque reference is used for the torque command.
Min Torq/Spd (3) = Selects the smallest algebraic value to regulate to when the torque reference and
torque generated from the speed regulator are compared.
Max Torq/Spd (4) = Selects the largest algebraic value to regulate to when the torque reference and
torque generated from the speed regulator are compared.
Sum Torq /Spd (5) = Selects the sum of the torque reference and the torque generated from the speed
regulator.
Absolute (6) = Selects the smallest absolute algebraic value to regulate to when the torque reference
and torque generated from the speed regulator are compared.
89 Logic Source Sel

Range: 0 = Terminal Blk
1 = Local HIM
2 = DPI Port 2
3 = DPI Port 3
4 = Reserved
5 = Network
6 = Reserved
7 = All Ports
Default: 1 = Local HIM
Access: 0 Path: Speed Config>Control Src Sel
See also:
Selects the only control source for these logic commands:
• Start (Run)
• Jog
• Clear Faults
• Stop (Any attached HIM Stop Key is always functional. A Network stop
command is effective only for Network or All Ports. A Terminal Block Stop
command is effective only for Terminal Blk or All Ports.)
Selecting All Ports (7) enables control from any control source (or port).
ATTENTION: Changing parameter 89 to Terminal Blk or

Network while Start At PowerUp is enabled may start the IPS
Tempo if a start command is on from the newly selected logic
source.
When Start At PowerUp is enabled, the user must ensure that
automatic start up of the driven equipment will not cause injury to
operating personnel or damage to the driven equipment. In addition,
the user is responsible for providing suitable audible or visual
alarms or other devices to indicate that this function is enabled and
the IPS Tempo may start at any moment. Failure to observe this
ATTENTION: Removing and replacing the LCD HIM while the
IPS Tempo is running may cause an abrupt speed change if the LCD
HIM is the selected reference source, but is not the selected control
source. The IPS Tempo will ramp to the reference level provided
by the HIM at the rate specified in Accel Time 1 (140), Accel Time
2 (141), Decel Time 1 (142) and Decel Time 2 (143). Be aware that
Important: Asserting an HIM Control digital input or acquiring Manual with

Save HIM Ref (192) bit 1 (Manual Mode) True (1) will override
this parameter’s selection.
90 Speed Ref A Sel

Range: 1 = Analog In 1
2 = Analog In 2
3-6 = Reserved
7 = Pulse Input
8 = Encoder
9 = MOP Level
10 = Reserved
11 = Speed Ref 1
12 = Speed Ref 2
13 = Speed Ref 3
14 = Speed Ref 4
15 = Speed Ref 5
16 = Speed Ref 6
17 = SpeedOvr Ref
18 = Local HIM
19 = DPI Port 2
20 = DPI Port 3
21 = DPI Port 4
22 = Network
23 = DPI Port 6
24 = Reserved
25 = Scale Block 1
26 = Scale Block 2
27 = Scale Block 3
28 = Scale Block 4
29 = Reserved
30 = HighRes Ref
Access: 0 Path: Speed Config>Speed References
Speed Config>Control Src Sel
See also: 2, 91-93, 101-107, 117-120, 192-194, 213, 272, 273, 320, 361-366
Selects the source of the speed reference to the IPS Tempo unless Speed Ref
1-7 (101-107) or Speed Ref B (93) is selected directly.
Note that the manual reference command and input HIM Control can override
the reference control source.
HIM is the selected reference source. The IPS Tempo will ramp to
the reference level provided by the HIM at the rate specified in
Accel Time 1 (140), Accel Time 2 (141), Decel Time 1 (142) and
Decel Time 2 (143). Be aware that an abrupt speed change may
occur depending upon the new reference level and the rate specified
in these parameters. Failure to observe this precaution could result
in bodily injury.
91 Speed Ref A Hi
Range: -/+Maximum Speed [0.1 Hz or 0.1 RPM]
Default: Maximum Speed
See also: 79, 82, 90, 190
Scales the upper value of the Speed Ref A Sel (90) selection when the source is
an analog input. The value of Speed Units (79) determines the units in which
the parameter is displayed.
92 Speed Ref A Lo
Default: 0.0
See also: 79, 81, 90, 190
Scales the lower value of the Speed Ref A Sel (90) selection when the source is
93 Speed Ref B Sel

2 = Analog In 2
3-6 = Reserved
7 = Pulse Input
8 = Encoder
9 = MOP Level
10 = Reserved
11 = Speed Ref 1
12 = Speed Ref 2
13 = Speed Ref 3
14 = Speed Ref 4
15 = Speed Ref 5
16 = Speed Ref 6
17 = SpeedOvr Ref
18 = Local HIM
19 = DPI Port 2
20 = DPI Port 3
21 = Reserved
22 = Network
23-24 = Reserved
25 = Scale Block 1
26 = Scale Block 2
27 = Scale Block 3
28 = Scale Block 4
Default: 9 = Preset Spd 1
Speed Config>Control Src Sel
See also: 2, 91-93, 101-107, 117-120, 192-194, 213, 272, 273, 361-366
Selects the source of the speed reference to the IPS Tempo unless Speed Ref
1-7 (101-107) is selected.
Note that the manual reference command and input HIM Control can override
the reference control source.

HIM is the selected reference source. The IPS Tempo will ramp to
the reference level provided by the HIM at the rate specified in
Accel Time 1 (140), Accel Time 2 (141), Decel Time 1 (142) and
Decel Time 2 (143). Be aware that an abrupt speed change may
occur depending upon the new reference level and the rate specified
in these parameters. Failure to observe this precaution could result
in bodily injury.
94 Speed Ref B Hi
See also: 79, 93, 190
Scales the upper value of the Speed Ref B Sel (93) selection when the source is
95 Speed Ref B Lo
Default: 0.0
See also: 79, 90, 93, 190
Scales the lower value of the Speed Ref B Sel (93) selection when the source is
96 TB Man Ref Sel
2 = Analog In 2
3-8 = Reserved
9 = MOP Level
10 = Reserved
11 = Speed Ref 1
12 = Speed Ref 2
13 = Speed Ref 3
14 = Speed Ref 4
15 = Speed Ref 5
16 = Speed Ref 6
17 = SpeedOvr Ref
Default: 2 = Analog In 2
See also: 97, 98, 213
Specifies the manual speed reference source when a digital input is configured
for auto/manual.
Important: Analog ln 2 is not a valid selection if it was selected for Trim ln
Select (97), Process FB Sel (128), Process Ref Sel (126), Current
Lmt Sel (147) or Sleep Wake Ref (179).
97 TB Man Ref Hi
See also: 79, 96
Scales the upper value of the TB Man Ref Sel selection when the source is an
analog input. The value of Speed Units (79) determines the units in which the
98 TB Man Ref Lo
Default: 0.0
See also: 79, 96
Scales the lower value of the TB Man Ref Sel selection when the source is an
analog input. The value of Speed Units (79) determines the units in which the
99 Pulse Input Ref
Range: -/+ 400.0 Hz or -/+ 24000.0 RPM [0.1 Hz or 0.1 RPM]
Default: Read Only
See also:
Displays the pulse input value as seen at terminals 5 and 6 of the Encoder
Terminal Block if Encoder Z Chan (423) is set to “Pulse Input.”The value of
100 Jog Speed 1

Range: +/- Maximum Speed [0.1 Hz or 0.1 RPM]
Access: 0 Path: Speed Config>Speed Ref Vals
See also: 79
Sets the output frequency/speed when a jog command is issued. The value of
101 Speed Ref 1
102 Speed Ref 2
103 Speed Ref 3
104 Speed Ref 4
105 Speed Ref 5
106 Speed Ref 6
Default: Refer to table 9.1
Access: Refer to table 9.1 Path: Speed Config>Speed Ref Vals
See also: 79, 90, 93, 213, 364-366
Provides an internal fixed speed command value. The value of Speed Units (79)
Table 9.1 – Default Values for Speed Refs 1-6
Parameter No. Parameter Name Default Access

101 Speed Ref 1 5.0 Hz or 150 RPM 0
107 Spd Override Ref

Range: -/+Maximum Speed [0.1 Hz or 1 RPM]
FV Default: 60.0 Hz or 900 RPM
See also:
Specifies the speed reference when Speed Override is active.
108 Jog Speed 2
Range: -/+ Maximum Speed [0.1 Hz or 0.1 RPM]
See also:
Sets the output frequency of the IPS Tempo when Jog Speed 2 is selected
(programmed via Digital Inputs). The value of Speed Units (79) determines the
units in which the parameter is displayed.
116 Trim % Setpoint
Range: -/+ 200.0% [0.1 %]
Default: 0.0%
Access: 2 Path: Speed Config>Speed Trim
See also: 98, 117
Adds or subtracts a percentage of the speed reference or maximum speed.
Dependent on the setting of Trim Out Select (118).
117 Trim In Select

Range: 0 = Setpoint
1 = Analog In 1
2 = Analog In 2
3-6 = Reserved
7 = Pulse Input
8 = Encoder
9 = MOP Level
10 = Master Ref
11 = Speed Ref 1
12 = Speed Ref 2
13 = Speed Ref 3
14 = Speed Ref 4
15 = Speed Ref 5
16 = Speed Ref 6
17 = SpeedOvr Ref
18 = Local HIM
19 = DPI Port 2
20 = DPI Port 3
21 = DPI Port 4
22 = Network
23 = DPI Port 6
24 = Reserved
25 = Scale Block 1
26 = Scale Block 2
27 = Scale Block 3
28 = Scale Block 4
29 = Output Power
30 = Output Cur
See also: 90, 93, 116
Specifies which input signal is being used as a trim input. The trim is an input
signal that is added to the selected speed reference. If an analog input is used as
the trim signal, two scaling parameters [Trim Hi (119) and Trim Lo (120)] are
provided.
118 Trim Out Select
See also: 117, 119, 120
Specifies which speed references are to be trimmed.
*
m B
fA
Tri or %
Tri Ref
Re
m
d
Ad
x x x x x x x x x x x x x 0 0 0 1 =Trimmed%
0 =Not Trimmed/Add
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x =Reserved
Bit #
Figure 9.2 – Trim Out Select (118)
119 Trim Hi
Range: -/+Maximum Speed [0.1 Hz or 0.1 RPM/%]
Default: 60.0 Hz or 1800 RPM
See also: 79, 82, 117
Scales the upper value of the Trim In Select (117) selection when the source is
120 Trim Lo
Range: -/+Maximum Speed [0.1 Hz or 0.1 RPM/%]
Default: 0.0 Hz
See also: 79, 117
Scales the lower value of the Trim In Select (117) selection when the source is
Important: Parameters 121, 122, and 123 are used to enable and tune the Slip
Compensation Regulator. In order to allow the regulator to control
IPS Tempo operation, Speed FB Select (80) must be set to 1 = Slip
Comp.
121 Slip RPM @ FLA
Range: 0.0 to 1200.0 RPM [0.1 RPM]
Default: Based on Motor NP RPM
Access: 2 Path: Speed Config>Slip Comp
See also: 61, 80, 122, 123
Sets the amount of compensation to IPS Tempo output at motor FLA. If
Autotune (61) is set to 3 = Calculate, changes made to this parameter will not
be accepted.
Value may be changed by Autotune (61) when “Encoder” is selected in
Feedback Select (80).
122 Slip Comp Gain
Range: 1.0 to 100.0 [0.1]
Default: 40.0
See also: 80, 121, 122
Sets the response time of slip compensation.
123 Slip RPM Meter
Range: -/+300.0 RPM [0.1 RPM]
Default: Read Only
See also: 80, 121, 122
Displays the present amount of adjustment being applied as slip compensation.
Important: Parameters in the Process PI Group are used to enable and tune the
PI Loop. In order to allow the PI Loop to control IPS Tempo
operation, set Process Control (125) to Enabled, bit 0 = 1.
124 Process Config

Access: 0 Path: Process Config>Process Setup
See also: 124-138
Selects specific features of the process regulator.
Ex Er e
Dif Mo Up
Ra Cla B
ert od
ti rim
mp mp
cl ror
F
fPr de
de
Inv ad M
p d
lo f
Ze ess
Pre Re
Sto -Win
An e T
To Ref
Mo
rqu
ro
of
%
x x x x x x 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 =Enabled
0 =Disabled
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x =Reserved
Bit #
Figure 9.3 – Process Config (124)
Bit 0 - Excl Mode (Exclusive Mode)

Enabled = Selects speed regulation.
Disabled = Selects trim regulation.
Bit 1 - Invert Error
Enables/disables the option to invert the sign of the PI error signal. Enabling this feature creates a
decrease in output for an increasing error and an increase in output for a decreasing error.
Bit 2 - Preload Mode
Enabled = Initializes the PI integrator to the commanded speed while the PI is disabled.
Disabled = The PI integrator is loaded with the PI Pre-load (133) while the PI is disabled.
Bit 3 - Ramp Ref
Enables/disables ramping the reference used from PI Feedback to the selected PI Reference after PI is
enabled. The active accel time is used for the PI ramp reference slew rate. The ramping is bypassed
when the reference equals the setpoint.
Bit 4 - Zero Clamp
Enables/disables option to limit operation so that the output frequency always has the same sign as the
master speed reference. This limits the possible IPS Tempo action to one direction only. Output from
the IPS Tempo will be from zero to maximum frequency forward or zero to maximum frequency
reverse.
Bit 5 - Differential Pressure Feedback (DiffPress FB)
Enables/disables the option of using the square root of the feedback signal as the PI feedback. This is
used for pressure control because fans and pumps vary pressure with the square of the speed.
Bit 6 - Stop Mode
Enabled = A Stop command is issued to the IPS Tempo and the PI Loop will continue to operate during
the decel ramp.
Bit 7 - Anti-Windup
Enabled = The PI Loop will automatically prevent the integrator from creating an excessive error that
could cause instability. The integrator will be controlled without the need for PI Reset or PI Hold Inputs.
Bit 8 - Torque Trim
PI Output summed into the Torque Input.
Bit 9 - % of Ref
PI scaled to % of Ref instead of Max Frequency.
125 Process Control

See also: 124-138
Controls the PI regulator. Note that you must use a datalink to write to this
parameter interactively from a network.
Process control allows the IPS Tempo to take a reference signal (setpoint) and
an actual signal (feedback) and automatically adjust the speed of the IPS
Tempo to match the actual signal to the reference.
Proportional control (P) adjusts the output based on the size of the error (larger
error = proportionally larger correction).
Integral control (I) adjusts the output based on the duration of the error. The
integral control by itself is a ramp output correction. This type of control gives a
smoothing effect to the output and will continue to integrate until zero error is
achieved.
By itself, integral control is slower than many applications require, and,
therefore, is combined with proportional control (PI).
The purpose of the PI regulator is to regulate a process variable such as
position, pressure, temperature, or flow rate, by controlling speed.
There are two ways the PI regulator can be configured to operate (refer to
parameter 124):
• Process trim, which takes the output of the PI regulator and sums it with a
master speed reference to control the process.
• Process control, which takes the output of the PI regulator as the speed
command. No master speed reference exists, and the PI output directly
controls the IPS Tempo output.
le
PI set
ab
PI ld
Ho
Re
En
PI
x x x x x x x x x x x x x 0 0 0 1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x = Reserved
Bit #
Figure 9.4 – Process Control (125)
Bit 0 - PI Enable
Enables/disables the operation of the PI loop.
Note: To use the PI loop, Bit 0 must be set to Enable (1), even if a digital input has been programmed
to be used as a PI Enable (Refer to parameters 361-366).
Bit 1 - PI Hold
Enabled = The integrator for the outer control loop is held at the current level; that is, it will not increase.
Disabled = The integrator for the outer Process control loop is allowed to increase.
Bit 2 - PI Reset
Enabled = The integrator for the outer Process control loop is reset to zero.
Disabled = The integrator for the outer Process control loop integrates normally.
126 Process Ref Sel

1 = Analog In 2
2 = Process Ref1
3 = Process Ref2
4 = Process Ref3
5 = Process Ref4
6 = Process Ref5
7 = Process Ref6
8 = ProcOvr Ref
9= Local HIM
10 = DPI Port 2
11 = DPI Port 3
12 = Network
13 = Scale Block 1
14 = Scale Block 2
15 = Scale Block 3
16 = Scale Block 4
Access: 2 Path: Process Config>Process Ref
See also: 124-138
Selects the source of the process reference signal.
127 Process Ref Src
1 = Analog In 2
2 = Process Ref1
3 = Process Ref2
4 = Process Ref3
5 = Process Ref4
6 = Process Ref5
7 = Process Ref6
8 = ProcOvr Ref
9= Local HIM
10 = DPI Port 2
11 = DPI Port 3
12 = Network
13 = Scale Block 1
14 = Scale Block 2
15 = Scale Block 3
16 = Scale Block 4
Access: 2 Path: Process Config>Process Status
Utility>Diagnostics
See also: 124-138
Shows the source of the process reference in the IPS Tempo (Process Ref Sel
(126)).
128 Process FB Sel
1 = Analog In 2
Access: 2 Path: Process Config>Process Feedback
See also: 124-138
Selects the source of the process regulator feedback signal.
129 Process I-Time

Range: 0.00 to 100.00 sec [0.01 sec]
Default: 2.00 sec
See also: 124-138
Specifies the time required for the integral component to reach 100% of Process
Err Out (137). Not functional when the PI Hold bit of Process Control = 1
(Enabled).
130 Process P-Gain
Range: 0.00 to 100.00 [0.01]
Default: 1.00
See also: 124-138
Sets the value for the process regulator proportional component.
Process Err Out (137) x Process P-Gain (130) = Process Output (138)
131 Process Lo Limit
Range: -/+400.0 Hz or -/+ 800.0% [0.1 Hz or .01%]
Default: -Maximum Freq or -100%
See also: 79, 124-138
Sets the lower limit of the process regulator output. This value must be less than
the value set in Process Hi Limit (132).
132 Process Hi Limit
Range: -/+400.0 Hz or -/+ 800.0% [0.1 Hz or 0.1%]
Default: +Maximum Freq or 100%
See also: 79, 124-138
Sets the upper limit of the process regulator output. This value must be greater
than the value set in Process Lo Limit (131).
133 Process Preload
Range: Process Lo Limit to Process Hi Limit [0.1 Hz or 0.1%]
Default: 0.0 Hz or 100%
See also: 79, 124-138
Sets the value used to preload the integral component on start or enable.
134 Process Status

Default: Read Only
See also: 124-138
The present state of the process regulator.
led
Re t
PI Limi
PI set
ab
PI old
En
In
H
PI
x x x x x x x x x x x x 0 0 0 0 1 = Condition True
0 = Condition False
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x = Reserved
Bit #
Figure 9.5 – Process Status (134)
Bit 0 - PI Enabled
Indicates whether or not the process regulator is enabled.
Bit 1 - PI Hold
Is set to 1 to indicate when a digital input is configured for PI Hold and is turned on, or the PI Hold bit is
set in Process Control (125).
Bit 2 - PI Reset
Is set to 1 to indicate when the process regulator Integrator is being reset to zero.
Bit 3 - PI InLimit
Is set to 1 to indicate when the process regulator output equals positive limit or negative limit.
135 Process Ref Out

Range: -/+100.0% [0.1]
Default: Read Only
See also: 124 - 138
Present value of the process regulator reference signal. The units are the same
as those of the process reference.
136 Process FB Out
Range: -/+100.0% [0.1]
Default: Read Only
See also: 124-138
Present value of the process regulator feedback signal. The units are the same
as those of the process feedback.
137 Process Err Out
Range: -/+200.0% [0.1%]
Default: Read Only
See also: 124-138
Present value of the process regulator error signal.
138 Process Output

Range: -/+ 100.0 Hz or -/+ 800.0% [0.1 Hz or 0.1%]
Default: Read Only
See also: 124-138
Present value of the process regulator output signal.
139 Process BW Filt
Range: 0.0 to 240.0 Radians [0.1 Radians]
Default: 0.0 Radians
See also: 137
Provides filter for process regulator error signal. The output of this filter is
displayed in Process Err Out (137). Zero will disable the filter.
140 Accel Time 1
141 Accel Time 2
Range: 0.0 to 3600.0 [0.1 sec]
Default: 10.0 secs
Access: 140=0 Path: Dynamic Control>Ramp Rates
141=2
See also: 142, 143, 146, 361
The Accel Time parameters set the rate at which the IPS Tempo ramps to its
output frequency after a start command or during an increase in command
frequency (speed change). The rate established is the result of the following
equation: (Maximum Speed / Accel Time) = Accel Rate
Two accel times exist to enable acceleration rate changes “on the fly” using a
building automation system command or digital input, if configured.
142 Decel Time 1
143 Decel Time 2
Range: 0.0 to 3600.0 sec [0.1 sec]
Default: 10.0 secs
Access: 142=0 Path: Dynamic Control>Ramp Rates
143=2
See also: 140, 141, 146, 361
Sets the rate of deceleration for all speed decreases.
(Max Speed / Decel Time) = Decel Rate
Two decel times exist to enable deceleration rate changes “on the fly” using a
building automation system command or digital input, if configured.
145 DB While Stopped
Range: 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Default: 0 = Disabled
Access: 2 Path: Dynamic Control>Stop/Brake Modes
See also: 161, 162
Enables/disables dynamic brake operation when IPS Tempo is stopped. DB
may operate when IPS Tempo is stopped. DB may operate if input voltage
becomes too high.
Disabled = DB will only operate when IPS Tempo is running.
Enabled = DB may operate whenever the IPS Tempo is energized.
146 S Curve %
Range: 0.0 to 100.0% [0.1%]
Default: 0.0%
Access: 0 Path: Dynamic Control>Ramp Rates
See also: 140 - 143
Sets the percentage of acceleration or deceleration time that is applied to the
ramp as S Curve. Time is added; 1/2 at the beginning and 1/2 at the end of the
ramp.
147 Current Lmt Sel
Range: 0 = Curr Lim Val
1 = Analog In 1
2 = Analog In 2
Default: 0 = Cur Lim Val
Access: 2 Path: Dynamic Control>Load Limits
See also: 146, 149
Selects the source for the adjustment of current limit (i.e., parameter, analog
input, etc.).
148 Current Lmt Val
Range: Based on IPS Tempo Type [0.1 Amps]
Default: Rated Amps x 1.5 (Yields approximate default value)
See also: 147, 149
Defines the current limit value when Current Lmt Sel (147) = Cur Lim Val.
149 Current Lmt Gain
Range: 0 to 5000 [1]
Default: 250
See also: 147, 148
Sets the responsiveness of the current limit.
150 Drive OL Mode
Range: 0 = Disabled
1 = Reduce CLim
2 = Reduce PWM
3 = Both-PWM 1st
Default: 3 = Both-PWM 1st
See also: 219
Selects the drive’s response to increasing drive temperature and may reduce the
current limit value as well as the PWM frequency. If the drive is being used
with a sine wave filter, the filter is likely tuned to a specific carrier frequency.
To ensure stable operation, it is recommended that Drive OL Mode be set to 1 =
Reduce CLim.
151 PWM Frequency

Range: 2 - 10kHz [2/4/8/10 kHz]
Default: 4 kHz
2 kHz (Frames 4-6, 575 VAC)
See also:
Sets the carrier frequency for the PWM output. IPS Tempo derating may occur
at higher carrier frequencies. For derating information, refer to Appendix A.
Important: If Motor Cntl Sel (53) is set to FVC Vector, the IPS Tempo will
run at 2kHz carrier frequency when operating below 6 Hz.
152 Droop RPM @ FLA
Range: 0.0 to 200.0 RPM [0.1 RPM]
Default: 0.0 RPM
See also:
Selects amount of droop that the speed reference is reduced when at full load
torque. Zero disables the droop function.
Important: Selecting “Slip Comp” with Speed FB Select (80) in conjunction
with Droop RPM @ FLA may produce undesirable results.
153 Regen Power Limit
Range: -800.0 % to 0.0% [0.1%]
FV Default: -50.0%
See also: 53
Sets the maximum power limit allowed to transfer from the motor to the DC
Bus. When using an external dynamic brake, set Regen Power Limit to its
maximum value.
154 Current Rate Lim
Range: 1.0% to 800.0% [0.1%]
FV Default: 400.0%
See also:
Sets the largest allowable rate of change for the current reference signal. This
number is scaled in percent of maximum motor current every 250
microseconds.
155 Stop Mode A

156 Stop Mode B
Range: 0 = Coast
1 = Ramp
2 = Ramp to Hold
3 = DC Brake
4 = Fast Brake
Default: 155: 0 = Coast
156: 0 = Coast
Access: 155= 0 Path: Dynamic Control>Stop/Brake Modes
156= 2
See also: 157-159
Active stop mode. Stop Mode A is active unless Stop Mode B is selected by a
digital input.

to remove the AC line to the IPS Tempo. An auxiliary braking
method may be required.
157 DC Brake Lvl Sel

Range: 0 = DC Brake Lvl
1 = Analog In 1
2 = Analog In 2
Default: 0 = DC Brake Lvl
See also: 155, 156, 158, 159
Selects the source for DC Brake Level (158).
158 DC Brake Level
Range: 0 to (Rated Amps x 1.5) [0.1 Amps]
Default: Rated Amps x 1.5
See also: 40, 157-159
Defines the maximum DC brake current level injected in the motor when “DC
Brake” is selected as a stop mode.
The DC braking voltage used in this function is created by a PWM algorithm
and may not generate the smooth holding force needed for some applications.
ATTENTION: If a hazard of injury due to movement of equipment

or material exists, an auxiliary mechanical braking device must be
used to stop the motor. Failure to observe this precaution could
result in severe bodily injury or loss of life.
ATTENTION: This feature should not be used with synchronous
or permanent magnet motors. Motors may be demagnetized during
braking. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage
to, or destruction of, the equipment.
159 DC Brake Time

Range: 0.0 to 90.0 sec [0.1 sec]
Default: 0.0 sec
See also: 155 - 158
Sets the amount of time DC brake current is “injected” into the motor.
160 Bus Reg Ki
Range: 0 to 5000 [1]
Default: 450
See also: 161, 162
Sets the responsiveness of the bus regulator.
161 Bus Reg Mode A
162 Bus Reg Mode B
Range: 0 = Disabled
1 = Adjust Freq
2 = Dynamic Brak
3 = Both - DB 1st
4 = Both - Frq 1st
Default: Mode A: 0 = Disabled
Mode B: 0 = Disabled
See also: 160, 163
Sets the method and sequence of the DC bus regulator voltage. Choices are
dynamic brake, frequency adjust, or both.
Sequence is determined by programming or digital input to the terminal block.
If a dynamic brake resistor is connected to the IPS Tempo, Bus Reg Mode A
and Bus Reg Mode B must be set to option 2, 3, or 4.
ATTENTION: The adjust freq portion of the bus regulator function

is extremely useful for preventing nuisance overvoltage faults
resulting from aggressive decelerations, overhauling loads, and
eccentric loads. It forces the output frequency to be greater than
commanded frequency while the IPS Tempo’s bus voltage is
increasing towards levels that would otherwise cause a fault.
However, it can also cause either of the following two conditions
to occur:
• Fast positive changes in input voltage (more than a 10% increase
within 6 minutes) can cause uncommanded positive speed
changes; however, an OverSpeed Limit fault will occur if the
speed reaches Max Speed + Overspeed Limit. If this condition is
unacceptable, action should be taken to 1) limit supply voltages
within the specification of the IPS Tempo, and 2) limit fast
positive input voltage changes to less than 10%. Without taking
such actions, if this operation is unacceptable, the adjust freq
portion of the bus regulator function must be disabled (refer to
parameters 161 and 162).
• Actual deceleration times can be longer than commanded
deceleration times; however, a Decel Inhibit fault is generated if
the IPS Tempo stops decelerating altogether. If this condition is
unacceptable, the adjust freq portion of the bus regulator must be
disabled (refer to parameters 161 and 162). In addition, installing
a properly sized dynamic brake resistor will provide equal or
better performance in most cases.
Note that these faults are not instantaneous and have shown test
results that take between 2 and 12 seconds to occur.
163 DB Resistor Type

Range: 0 = Internal Res
1 = External Res
2 = None
Default: 2 = None
See also: 161, 162
Selects whether the internal or an external DB resistor will be used.
Important: In Frame 0-3 drives, only one DB resistor can be connected to the
drive. Connecting both an internal and an external resistor could
cause damage.
If a dynamic braking resistor is connected to the drive, Bus Reg Mode A and B
(161 and 162) must be set to option 2, 3 or 4.
ATTENTION: Equipment damage may result if a drive mounted

(internal) resistor is installed and this parameter is set to “External
Res” or “None.” Thermal protection for the internal resistor will be
disabled, resulting in possible device damage. Failure to observe
this precaution could result in equipment damage.
164 Bus Reg Kp

Range: 0 to 10000
Default: 1500
See also:
Proportional gain for the bus regulator. Used to adjust regulator response.
165 Bus Reg Kd
Range: 0 to 10000
Default: 1000
See also:
Derivative gain for the bus regulator. Used to control regulator overshoot.
166 Flux Braking
Range: 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
See also:
Set to use an increase in the motor flux current to increase the motor losses, and
allow a faster deceleration time when a chopper brake or regenerative capability
is not available. Flux Braking can be used as a stopping or fast deceleration
method.
167 Powerup Delay
Range: 0.0 to 10800.0 Secs [0.1 Sec]
Default: 0.0 Secs
Access: 1 Path: Dynamic Control>Restart Modes
See also:
Defines the programmed delay time, in seconds, before a start command is
accepted after a power up.
168 Start At PowerUp
Range: 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
See also: 167, 169, 174
Enables/disables a feature to issue a Start or Run command and automatically
resume running at commanded speed after IPS Tempo input power is restored.
When enabled, Start At PowerUp requires a digital input configured and closed
for Run or Start and a valid start contact.
ATTENTION: Be aware of the following:

• Setting parameter 168 to 1 (Enabled) immediately applies output
power to the motor when all start conditions are met.
• If the IPS Tempo is running from the terminal block, Start At
PowerUp is enabled, and a fault occurs, the IPS Tempo coasts to
rest and generates a fault. In this case, resetting and clearing the
fault immediately restarts the IPS Tempo without any change to
the start or stop input states.
When this function is enabled, the user must ensure that automatic
start up of the driven equipment will not cause injury to operating
personnel or damage to the driven equipment. In addition, the user
is responsible for providing suitable audible or visual alarms or
other devices to indicate that this function is enabled and the IPS
Tempo may start at any moment. Failure to observe this precaution
169 Flying Start En

Range: 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
See also: 170
Enables/disables the function which reconnects to a spinning motor at actual
RPM when a start command is issued.
Flying Start En is not required in FVC Vector mode when using an encoder.
170 Flying StartGain

Range: 20 to 32767 [1]
Default: 4000
See also: 169
Adjusts the responsiveness of the flying start function. Increasing the value in
this parameter increases the responsiveness of the flying start function.
Important: Lower gain may be required for permanent magnet motors.

174 Auto Rstrt Tries
Range: 0 to 9 [1]
Default: 0 (Disabled)
Access: 1 Path: IPS Config>IPS Setup
See also: 175
Important: The IPS Tempo will re-start after a reset if the start input is still
asserted.
Specifies the maximum number of times the IPS Tempo attempts to reset a fault
and restart when the auto restart feature is enabled.
ATTENTION: Equipment damage and/or personal injury may

result if parameter 174 is used in an inappropriate application. Do
not use this function without considering applicable local, national,
and international codes, standards, regulations, or industry
guidelines.
ATTENTION: The IPS Tempo may start immediately after a fault
is auto-reset when Start At PowerUp (168) is set to Enabled.
operating personnel or damage to the IPS Tempo equipment. In
addition, the user is responsible for providing suitable audible or
visual alarms or other devices to indicate that this function is
enabled and the IPS Tempo may start at any moment. Failure to
observe this precaution could result in severe bodily injury or loss of
life.
The auto restart feature provides the ability for the IPS Tempo to automatically
perform a fault reset followed by a start attempt without user or application
intervention. Only certain faults are permitted to be reset.
When the auto restart feature is enabled (that is, Auto Rstrt Tries is set to a
value greater than zero), and an auto-resettable fault occurs, the IPS Tempo will
stop. After the number of seconds in Auto Restrt Delay (175) has elapsed, the
IPS Tempo will automatically reset the faulted condition. The IPS Tempo will
then issue an internal start command to start the IPS Tempo.
If another auto-resettable fault occurs, the cycle will repeat up to the number of
attempts specified in Auto Rstrt Tries.
If the IPS Tempo faults repeatedly for more than the number of attempts
specified in Auto Rstrt Tries with less than five minutes between each fault, the
IPS Tempo will remain in the faulted state. The fault Auto Rstrt Tries will be
logged in the fault queue.
The auto restart feature is disabled when the IPS Tempo is stopping and during
autotuning. Note that a DC Hold state is considered stopping.
The following conditions will abort the reset/run process:
• Issuing a stop command from any control source. (Note that removal of a
2-wire run-fwd or run-rev command is considered a stop command.)
• Issuing a fault reset command from any active source.
• Removing the enable input signal.
• Setting Auto Restrt Tries to zero.
• Occurrence of a fault that is not auto-resettable.
• Removing power from the IPS Tempo.
• Exhausting an auto-reset/run cycle.
175 Auto Rstrt Delay

Range: 0.5 to 10800.0 sec [0.1 sec]
Default: 1.0 sec
See also: 174
Sets the time between restart attempts when the auto restart feature is enabled.
Refer to Auto Rstrt Tries (174) for more information about the auto restart
feature.
177 Gnd Warn Level
Range: 1.0 to 5.0 Amps [0.1 Amps]
Default: 3.0 Amps
Access: 2 Path: Dynamic Control>Power Loss
See also: 174
Sets the level at which a ground warning fault will occur. Configure with Alarm
Config 1 (259).
178 Sleep-Wake Mode
Range: 0 = Disabled
1 = Direct (Enabled)
2 = Invert (Enabled)
See also: 179-183
Enables the Sleep-Wake function.
Important: When enabled, the following conditions must be met:

• A proper value must be programmed for Wake Level (180) and Sleep Level
(182).
• A speed reference must be selected in Speed Ref A Sel (90).
• At least one of the following must be programmed (and input closed) in
Digital Inx Sel (361-366): Enable, Stop-CF, Run, Run Forward.
ATTENTION: Enabling the Sleep-Wake function can cause

unexpected machine operation during the Wake mode. Failure to
observe these precautions can result in damage to the equipment
and/or personal injury.
Table 9.2 – Conditions Required to Start IPS Tempo when Sleep-Wake is Enabled1 2 3
Configured After Fault After Stop

Digital After Stop-CF Cmd Clear Faults Cmd
Input(s) Power-Up (HIM or TermBlk) (TB or software) HIM, TB, or Network Stop
Stop Stop Closed Stop Closed Stop Closed Stop Closed
Wake Signal Wake Signal Direct Mode: Analog Sig>Sleep Level5
Start/Run Cmd4 Invert Mode: Analog Sig<Sleep Level5
Start/Run Cmd
Enable Enable Enable Closed Enable Closed Enable Closed
Closed Wake Signal Wake Signal Direct Mode: Analog Sig>Sleep Level5
Wake Signal Start/Run Cmd4 Invert Mode: Analog Sig<Sleep Level5
Start/Run Cmd
Run Run Closed Run Cmd4 Run Closed Run Cmd4
Run For. Wake Signal Wake Signal Wake Signal Wake Signal
Run Rev.
1. When power is cycled, restart will occur if all conditions above are met.
2. When Sleep-Wake Mode is enabled, IPS Tempo start will occur if all conditions above are met.
3. The Sleep-Wake function and Speed Reference may be assigned to the same analog input.
4. Start/Run Cmd must be cycled.
5. Signal does not have to be greater than Wake level.
179 Sleep-Wake Ref

2 = Analog In 2
See also: 178, 180-183
Selects the source of the input controlling the Sleep-Wake function.
180 Wake Level
Range: Sleep Level / 20.000 mA, 10.000 volts [0.001 mA, 0.001 V]
Default: 6.000 mA, 6.000 V
See also: 178, 179, 181, 183
Defines the analog input level that will start the IPS Tempo.
181 Wake Time
Range: 0.0 to 1000.0 Secs [0.1 sec]
Default: 0.0 sec
See also: 178, 180
Defines the amount of time at or above Wake Level before a start command is
issued.
182 Sleep Level
Range: 4.000 mA, 0.000 V / Wake Level [0.001 mA, 0.001 V]
Default: 5.000 mA, 5.000 V
See also: 178, 180, 183
Defines the analog input level that will stop the IPS Tempo.
183 Sleep Time

Range: 0.0 to 1000.0 secs [0.1 sec]
Default: 1.0 sec
See also: 182
Defines the amount of time at or below Sleep Level before a stop command is
issued.
184 Power Loss Mode
Range: 0 = Coast
1 = Decel
2 = Continue
3 = Coast input
4 = Decel input
5 = Decel 2 Stop
Default: 0 = Coast
See also: 13, 184
Sets the reaction to a loss of input power. Power loss is recognized when:
DC bus voltage is ≤ 73% of DC Bus Memory and Power Loss Mode is set to
Coast. DC bus voltage is ≤ 82% of DC Bus Memory and Power Loss Mode is
set to Decel.
Decel 2 Stop
• If [DC Bus Voltage] drops to ≤ ([DC Bus Memory] - 120), set [Drive Alarm 1], “Power Loss” = 1 and
[Last Stop Source] = “Pwr Removed”.
• The logic sequencing treats this similar to a “ramp to stop” except it forces the ramp to use [Decel
Time 2] with no s-curve to set the ramp and any [DC Brake Time] is ignored.
• [Decel Time 2] must be set short enough to keep the drive renenerating power from the load for the
duration of the stop.
• If [DC Bus Voltage] drops to ≤ ([DC Bus Memory] - 180), the drive switches to a coast stop and the
precharge relay opens.
• If [Bus Reg Mode] = “Adjust Freq,” the actual decel time may be increased to limit [DC Bus Voltage].
• If [Fault Config 1], “Power Loss” is set (not the default), the drive will fault after [Power Loss Time].
• [Drive Alarm 1], “Power Loss” is cleared once the drive is stopped and [DC Bus Voltage] ≥ ([DC Bus
Memory] - 60). The drive can then accept a re-start command.
• If [Power Loss Level] is active, it sets the [DC Bus Voltage] setpoints.
For [Power Loss Mode], 0-4, if power is restored before Control Board power (low) and run is
maintained, the response to restored power isa flying start and return to the commanded speed.
[Power Loss Mode] is intended for cases where a power loss causes a process disruption and the
desired drive response is to stop as quickly as possible and not to restart until commanded (and power
is restored).
[Decel Time 2] is automatically selected to allow for cases where the “normal operation” decel is not
fast enough to keep the drive regenerating power all the way to zero speed. If [Decel Time 2] is not
short enough to keep the bus up, the drive switches to a coast stop.
Note: This is essentially a ramp to stop, while active it over-rides [Stop/Brk Mode A].
185 Power Loss Time

Range: 0.0 to 60.0 sec [0.1 sec]
Default: 0.5 sec
See also: 184
Sets the time that the IPS Tempo will remain in power loss mode before a fault
is issued.
186 Power Loss Level
Range: 0.0 to 999.9 [0.1 VDC]
Default: 0.0 V
See also: 184
When set to a non-zero value, selects the change in level at which the Power
Loss will occur.
The IPS Tempo can use the percentages referenced in Power Loss Mode (184)
or a trigger point can be set for the line loss detection as follows:
VTrigger = [DC Bus Memory] - [Power Loss Level]
A digital input (programmed to 29 = Pwr Loss Lvl) is used to toggle between
fixed percentages and the detection level.
ATTENTION: If the value for Power Loss Level (186) is greater

than 18% of DC Bus Memory (13), the user must provide a
minimum line impedance to limit inrush current when the power
line recovers. The input impedance should be equal to or greater
than the equivalent of a 5% transformer with a VA rating 5 times
the IPS Tempo input VA rating. Failure to observe this precaution
could result in damage to equipment.
187 Load Loss Level

Range: 0.0 to 800.0% [0.1%]
Default: 200.0%
See also: 29, 259
Sets the percentage of motor nameplate torque at which a load loss alarm will
occur.
188 Load Loss Time
Default: 0.0 secs
See also: 187
Sets the time that current is below the level set in Load Loss Level (188) before
a fault occurs.
189 Shear Pin Time
Default: 0.0 secs
See also: 238
Sets the time that the IPS Tempo is at or above current limit before a fault
occurs. Zero disables this feature.
192 Save HIM Ref
Access: 2 Path: Utility>HIM Ref Config
See also:
Allows configuration of the operation of all attached HIM devices (independent
of Logic Source Sel (89)). Upper word (bits 16-31) are reserved.
wn
Re erve le
Do
Re isab
se d
At rved
wr
D
Po
s
OIM
x x x x x x x x x x x x 0 x 0 1
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit #
Figure 9.6 – Save HIM Ref (192)
At Power Down:
Inactive = Preload HIM reference with zero at power-up.
Active = Save HIM references at power down and preload them at power-up.
HIM Disable:
Inactive: HIM Start, Jog, and Clear Fault commands are functional.
Active: HIM Start, Jog, and Clear Fault commands are disabled.
193 HIM Ref Preload

Range: 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Default: 1 = Enabled
Access: 0 Path: Utility>HIM Ref Config
See also:
Enables/disables a feature to automatically load the present auto frequency
reference value into the HIM when Manual is selected. Allows smooth speed
transition from Auto to Manual.
194 Save MOP Ref
Access: 2 Path: Utility>MOP Config
See also: 90, 93, 96, 364-366
Enables/disables the feature that saves the present MOP (motor-operated
potentiometer) frequency reference at power down or at stop.
wn
Do
wr
At top
Po
S
At
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 0 0 1 = Save
0 = Do Not Save
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x = Reserved
Bit #
Figure 9.7 – Save MOP Ref (194)
195 MOP Rate

Range: 0.2 to Maximum Frequency [0.1 Hz/sec]
6.0 to Maximum Frequency [0.1 RPM/sec]
Default: 1.0 Hz/sec or 30.0 RPM/sec
Access: 2 Path: Utility>MOP Config
See also: 79, 90, 93, 96, 364-366
Sets the rate of change of the MOP reference in response to a digital input. The
value of Speed Units (79) determines the units in which the parameter is
displayed.
196 Param Access Lvl
Range: 0 = Basic
1 = Standard
2 = Advanced
Default: 0 = Basic
Access: 2 Path: Utility>Drive Memory
See also:
Selects the parameter access level.
The value of this parameter is not affected by a “Reset Defalts” command.
197 Reset to Defalts

Range: 0 = Ready
1 = Factory
2 = Low Voltage
3 = High Voltage
Default: 0 = Ready
See also: 41-47, 54, 55, 62, 63, 69-72, 82, 148, 158
Resets all parameter values to defaults except Language (201), Param Access
Lvl (196), Voltage Class (202) and Torq Prove Cnfg (600).
• Option 1 resets the IPS Tempo to factory settings based on Voltage Class.
• Options 2 and 3 resets the IPS Tempo to factory settings and sets alternate
voltage and current ratings.
Important: For Frames 5 and 6, the internal fan voltage may have to be
changed when using Option 2 or 3.
198 Load Frm Usr Set

Range: 0 = Ready
1 = User Set 1
2 = User Set 2
3 = User Set 3
Default: 0 = Ready
See also: 199
Loads a previously saved set of parameter values from a selected user set
location in IPS Tempo non-volatile memory to active IPS Tempo memory.
ATTENTION: The IPS Tempo can be configured to use multiple

saved parameter (user) sets. Caution must be utilized to ensure that
each user set is programmed for proper operation for the
application. Recalling an improperly programmed user set may
cause rotation of the motor in an undesired direction at unexpected
speeds or may cause unpredictable starting of the IPS Tempo and
motor. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to
equipment, severe bodily injury or loss of life.
This parameter is disabled while Dynamic User Set mode is active. Dyn
UserSet Cnfg (204), Dynamic Mode bit (0) = Enabled (1).
199 Save To User Set
Range: 0 = Ready
1 = User Set 1
2 = User Set 2
3 = User Set 3
Default: 0 = Ready
See also: 198
Saves the parameter values in active IPS Tempo memory to a user set in IPS
Tempo non-volatile memory.
200 Reset Meters

Range: 0 = Ready
1 = MWh
2 = Elapsed Time
Default: 0 = Ready
See also:
Resets selected meters to zero.
201 Language
Range: 0 = Not Selected
1 = English
2 = French
3 = Spanish
4 = Italian
5 = German
6 = Reserved
7 = Portuguese
8 = Reserved
9 = Reserved
10 = Dutch
Default: 0 = Not Selected
See also:
Selects the display language when using an LCD HIM or DriveTools SP
software or DriveExplorer software. Options 6, 8 and 9 are reserved.
Important: The HIM only supports English, French, Spanish, and Portuguese.
If you select an unsupported language, the HIM displays a
warning message stating that the IPS Tempo does not support the
language (in the unsupported language) and resets the drive back
to English. If you select “Reserved,” the HIM remains in English.
202 Voltage Class
Range: 2 = Low Voltage
3 = High Voltage
4-5 = Reserved
See also: 41-47, 54, 55, 62, 63, 69-72, 82, 148, 158
Resets selected parameters that change the IPS Tempo voltage rating, current
rating, scaling, and motor data. Maximum, Minimum and Default values for
parameters 41-47, 54, 55, 62, 63, 69-72, 82, 148 and 158 will be affected by
changing this parameter.
203 Drive Checksum
Range: 0 to 65535 [1]
Default: Read Only
See also:
Provides a checksum value that indicates whether or not a change in IPS Tempo
programming has occurred (data values only).
204 Dyn UserSet Cnfg

See also:
Enables/Disables dynamic selection of user parameter sets and configures
whether the switching is from a parameter value or from digital input states.
e
od
na ce
cM
Dy Sour
mi
l
Ctr
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 0 0 Dynamic Mode
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 =Enabled
0 =Disabled
Bit #
Ctrl Source
1 =[Dyn UserSet Sel]
0 =Digital Inputs
x =Reserved
Figure 9.8 – Dyn UsrSet Cnfg
ATTENTION: The IPS Tempo can be configured to use multiple

saved parameter (user) sets. Caution must be utilized to ensure that
each user set is programmed for proper operation for the
application. Recalling an improperly programmed user set may
cause rotation of the motor in an undesired direction at unexpected
speeds or may cause unpredictable starting of the IPS Tempo and
motor. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to
equipment, severe bodily injury or loss of life.
Important: In Dynamic Mode, changes to the parameters are not saved to

nonvolatile storage. Switching user sets restores the values last
saved before enabling dynamic mode.
205 Dyn UserSet Sel

See also:
Selects user set if Dyn UserSet Cnfg = xxxx xx11.
erS it1
it0
Us SetB
etB
er
Us
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 0 0 1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x = Reserved
Bit #
Figure 9.9 – Dyn UsrSet Sel
Bit 0 - UserSetBit0
0 = Disabled
1= Enabled
Bit 1 - UserSetBit1
0 = Disabled
1= Enabled
Table 9.3 – Dynamic User Set Mode
UserSetBit1 UserSetBit0 UserSet Loaded in Memory

0 0 User Set 1
0 1 User Set 2
1 0 User Set 3
1 1 User Set 3
ATTENTION: The IPS can be configured to use multiple saved

parameter (user) sets. Caution must be utilized to ensure that each
user set is programmed for proper operation for the application.
Recalling an improperly programmed user set may cause rotation
of the motor in an undesired direction at unexpected speeds or may
cause unpredictable starting of the IPS Tempo and motor. Failure
to observe this precaution could result in damage to equipment,
severe bodily injury or loss of life.
206 Dyn UserSet Actv

Default: Read Only
See also:
Indicates the active user set and if the operation of the user set is dynamic or
normal (dynamic mode disabled). User parameter changes are allowed after a
user set is restored but will not be detected or annunciated.
d e
Mo
er 3
er 3
rm 3
Us r Set
Us Set
No Set
al
e
Us
x x x x x x x x x x x x 0 0 0 0 1 =Condition True
0 =Condition False
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x =Reserved
Bit #
Figure 9.10 – Dyn UserSet Actv
209 Drive Status 1

Default: Read Only
Access: 2 Path: Utility>Diagnostics
See also: 210
Present operating condition of the IPS Tempo.
ir
Lo l ID )
ca 1 (1)
Fa peed )
Ac lera ng
Co al D ng
tiv d D
ca 2 (1
S 0 (1
)
Re ID 3 (2
Re 2 (2)
Re 1 (2)
Lo ID 0 (2)
ce ti
tu ti
m ir
Ac man
Ac lera
Lo l ID
At l ID
Ala ed
Re e
y
f ID
f ID
De m
ad
ce
ult
ca
r
f
f
Re
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 =Condition True
0 =Condition False
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x =Reserved
Bit #
Figure 9.11 – Drive Status 1 (209)
Table 9.4 – Drive Status 1 (209)
Bits (2) Bits (1) Description

15 14 13 12 Description 11 10 9
0 0 0 0 Ref A Auto 0 0 0 Port 0 (TB)
0 0 0 1 Ref 1 (Process/Spd) 0 0 1 Port 1
0 1 0 0 Ref 4 (Process Spd) 1 0 1 Port 4
0 1 1 1 Ref 7 (Process/Spd Override 1 1 1 No Local Control
1 0 0 0 TB Manual
1 0 0 1 Port 1 Manual
1 1 1 1 Jog Ref
210 Drive Status 2

Default: Read Only
See also: 209
Present operating condition of the IPS Tempo.
Au Lim eg
Au ctiv tdn
Cu req ld
DB Rst ct
Bu r Ov k
Sto raki g
Jo ping g
s F er
R
B in
to A
A C
p n
to 0
toR it
toT e
DP rved
Mo at 50
Ac ing
DC un
Re HW
Ru ing
Au st
Re e
y
nn
tiv
ad
se
gg
rr
C
I
PT
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 =Condition True
0 =Condition False
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x =Reserved
Bit #
le
L ev
Trg
OW
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 1 =Condition True
0 =Condition False
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 x =Reserved
Bit #
211 Drive Alarm 1

Default: Read Only
See also: 212
Indicates Type 1 alarm conditions that currently exist in the IPS Tempo. Note
that for alarm conditions not configured in Alarm Config 1 (259), the status
indicated will be a zero.
Wa r Th ss
rg e
Str in L OH
In Los rn
tv
Un r Lo p
De ing m
Po t Pw ss
LL 2
1
ch ltag
Dr OL L t
Pre erVo s
Lo nd W d
we rU
to Lo
ib
Ac
a
k er
v O vl
vl
s
Ph s
ou e
A o
An Res
Dr l Inh
Gr Slipp
Mo ase
DB
ad
ce
lg
d
v
k
Int
Br 1 = Condition True
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 = Condition False
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x = Reserved
Bit #
W el
PT Trq L vr
C H ev
nt
OW ve C
ti
Ac
x x x x x x x x x x x 0 0 0 x x 1 = Condition True
0 = Condition False
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 x = Reserved
Bit #
Figure 9.13 – Drive Alarm 1 (211)
212 Drive Alarm 2

Default: Read Only
See also: 211
Indicates Type 2 alarm conditions that currently exist in the IPS Tempo.
VH s R ang
NP rq C pe
Sp lt Ra fig
Mt z Cf lct
Sle n Va ct
IR mps lct
Ma Neg g
Dig lr Cf ct
Dig n Cfl C
In ctB
ctA
dR ng
xF Slo
ep lue
Dig Con d
rTy lct
Dig Cflc t
Vlt R
z an
li
In lc
t
e
V n
o fl
H f
f
f
Flx ef C
PT Slipp
Ixo Co
Bip p C
Cfl
I
A
C
I
k
Br
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 =Condition True
0 =Condition False
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x =Reserved
Bit #
Trq StpC ct
Pr flct
t
flc
fl
erS ct
Pro etC
vC
Us gCfl
f
f
PIC
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 0 1 =Condition True
0 =Condition False
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 x =Reserved
Bit #
Figure 9.14 – Drive Alarm 2 (212)
213 Speed Ref Source

Range: 0 = PI Output
1 = Analog In 1
2 = Analog In 2
3-6 = Reserved
7 = Reserved
8 = Reserved
9 = MOP Level
10 = Jog Speed
11 = Preset Spd 1
12 = Preset Spd 2
13 = Preset Spd 3
14 = Preset Spd 4
15 = Preset Spd 5
16 = Preset Spd 6
17 = Preset Spd 7
18 = Local HIM
19 = DPI Port 2
20 = DPI Port 3
21 = DPI Port 4
22 = Network
23 = Reserved
24 = Auto Tune
25 = Jog Speed 2
26 = Scale Block 1
27 = Scale Block 2
28 = Scale Block 3
29 = Scale Block 4
30 = Reserved
31 = Reserved
32 = Reserved
33 = Reserved
34 = Reserved
35 = Reserved
36 = Unipolar Lim
37 = Rev Dis Lim
38 = Max Spd Lim
39 = Min Spd Lim
40 = Rev Spd Lim
41 = Load Trq Lim
42 = TrqAlrm Ref
43 = HighRes Ref
Default: Read Only
See also: 90, 93, 96, 101
Displays the source of the speed reference of the IPS Tempo.
214 Start Inhibits

Default: Read Only
See also:
Displays the inputs currently preventing the IPS Tempo from starting.
Ty le hrg
DC Ass set
Bu ertd
m
Sto s R v
ram ct
ult lar
e
ab c
IP 3
ca 2
Dig l HIM
En s P
Sta Stop
Pa tup A
Fa tal In
Fa 2 A
ork
DP Port
Lo ort
tw
pe
p
st
r
i
I
DP
Ne
x x 0 x 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 = Inhibit True
0 = Inhibit False
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x = Reserved
Bit #
Figure 9.15 – Start Inhibits (214)
215 Last Stop Source

Range: 0 = Pwr Removed
1 = Local HIM
2 = DPI Port 2
3 = DPI Port 3
4 = Reserved
5 = Network
6 = Reserved
7 = Digital In
8 = Fault
9 = Not Enabled
10 = Sleep
11 = Jog
12 = Autotune
13 = Precharge
Default: Read Only
See also: 361-366
Displays the source that initiated the most recent stop sequence. It will be
cleared (set to 0) during the next start sequence.
216 Dig In Status
Default: Read Only
Inputs & Outputs> Digital Inputs
See also: 361-366
Current state of the digital inputs on the terminal block.
In4 Log slt
In3 og t
In2 Log slt
In1 Log slt
og t
lt
DL Rsl
DL Rsl
Rs
D R
D R
D R
6
ita 5
it 4
ita 3
ita 2
1
In5 Log
Dig tal In
Dig tal In
Dig l In
Dig al In
Dig l In
l In
D
i
i
Dig
In6
x x 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 = Input Present
0 = Input Not Present
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x = Reserved
Bit #
Figure 9.16 – Dig In Status (216)
217 Dig Out Status

Default: Read Only
Inputs & Outputs>Digital Outputs
See also: 380-398
Current state of the digital outputs.
Dig tal O 3
ita ut2
ut1
t
Dig al Ou
lO
it
i
Dig
x x x x x x x x x x x x x 0 0 0 1 =Output Energized
0 =Output De-energized
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x =Reserved
Bit #
Figure 9.17 – Dig Out Status (276)
218 Drive Temp

Range: 0.0 to 100.0 degC [0.1 degC]
Default: Read Only
See also:
Present operating temperature of the IPS Tempo power section.
219 Drive OL Count
Range: 0.0 to 100.0% [0.1%]
Default: Read Only
See also: 150
Accumulated percentage of IPS Tempo overload. Continuously operating the
IPS Tempo over 100% of its rating will increase this value to 100% and cause a
IPS Tempo fault.
220 Motor OL Count
Range: 0.0 to 100.0% [0.1%]
Default: Read Only
See also: 47, 48
Accumulated percentage of motor overload. Continuously operating the motor
over 100% of the motor overload setting will increase this value to 100% and
cause a IPS Tempo fault.
221 Mtr OL Trip Time

Range: 0 to 99999 [1]
Default: Read Only
See also: 220
Amount of time before a IPS Tempo Overload fault occurs if the load condition
remains constant. A value of 99999 means that the IPS Tempo is operating
under the overload level.
222 Drive Status 3

Range: Refer to Figure below.
Default: Read Only
See also:
Indicates if a device has manual control of the speed reference or if a “Fast
Brake” is in progress.
de
al g
nu in
Mo
Ma Brak
st
Fa
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 0 0 1 = Condition True
0 = Condition False
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x = Reserved
Bit #
Manual Mode - Refer to “Speed and Process Reference Control in Chapter 6.

Fast Braking - Fast braking active, see [Stop/Brk Mode A].
223 Status 3 @ Fault

Range: Refer to Figure below.
Default: Read Only
See also: 222
Captures and displays [Drive Status 3] bit pattern at the time of the last fault.
de
al g
nu in
Mo
Ma Brak
st
Fa
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 0 0 1 = Condition True
0 = Condition False
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x = Reserved
Bit #
Figure 9.19 – Status 3 @ Fault
224 Fault Speed

Range: 0.0 to +Maximum Freq [0.1 Hz]
0.0 to +Maximum Speed [0.1 RPM]
Default: Read Only
See also: 79, 225-230
Captures and displays the output speed of the IPS Tempo at the time of the last
fault. The value of Speed Units (79) determines the units in which the
225 Fault Amps

Range: 0.0 to Rated Amps x 2 [0.1 Amps]
Default: Read Only
See also: 224-230
Captures and displays motor amps at the time of the last fault.
226 Fault Bus Volts
Range: 0.0 to Max Bus Volts [0.1 VDC]
Default: Read Only
See also: 224-230
Captures and displays the DC bus voltage of the IPS Tempo at the time of the
last fault.
Default: Read Only
See also: 209, 224-230
Captures and displays Drive Status 1 bit pattern at the time of the last fault.
ir
Ac lera ng
Co l D g
tiv d D
tua tin
ce ti
ca 2
ca 1
S 0
m ir
Fa peed
Ac man
Ac lera
Lo l ID
Lo l ID
At l ID
Re ID 3
Re 2
Re ID 1
Lo 0
Ala ed
Re e
y
f ID
f ID
De m
ad
ce
ult
ca
r
f
f
Re
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 = Condition True
0 = Condition False
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x = Reserved
Bit #
Figure 9.20 – Status 1 @ Fault (227)

Default: Read Only
See also: 210, 224-230
Captures and displays Drive Status 2 bit pattern at the time of last fault.
Wa r Th ss
rg e
Str in L OH
In Los rn
tv
Un r Lo p
De ing m
Po t Pw ss
LL 2
1
ch ltag
Dr OL L t
Pre erVo s
Lo nd W d
we rU
to Lo
ib
Ac
a
k er
v O vl
vl
s
Ph s
ou e
A o
An Res
Dr l Inh
Gr Slipp
Mo se a
DB
ad
ce
lg
d
v
k
Int
Br
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 = Condition True
0 = Condition False
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x = Reserved
Bit #
W el
PT Trq L vr
C H ev
nt
OW ve C
ti
Ac
0 = Condition False
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 x = Reserved
Bit #
Figure 9.21 – Status 2 @ Fault (228)
229 Alarm 1 @ Fault

Default: Read Only
See also: 29, 224-230
Captures and displays Drive Alarm 1 at the time of the last fault.
Wa r Th oss
rg e
In Los rn
tv
Un er Lo Up
De ing m
At oss
Str in L H
Re L L 2
Int erved 1
ch ltag
Dr OL L t
de ss
Lo nd W d
ib
Ac
a
O
k er
v O vl
vl
Ph s
ou e
r
to L
Dr l Inh
Po Pw
Gr Slipp
An res
Mo ase
Pre rVo
DB
ad
ce
lg
w
s
v
k
Br
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 =Condition True
0 =Condition False
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x =Reserved
Bit #
W el
C H ev
PT Trq L
OW
x x x x x x x x x x x x 0 x x x 1 =Condition True
0 =Condition False
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 x =Reserved
Bit #
Figure 9.22 – Alarm 1 @ Fault (229)
230 Alarm 2 @ Fault

Default: Read Only
See also: 29, 221-230
Captures and displays Drive Alarm 2 bit pattern at the time of last fault.
VH s R ang
NP rq C pe
Sp lt Ra fig
Mt z Cf lct
Sle n Va ct
IR mps lct
Ma Neg g
Dig lr Cf ct
Dig n Cfl C
In ctB
ctA
dR ng
xF Slo
ep lue
Dig Con d
rTy lct
Dig Cflc t
Vlt R
z an
li
In lc
t
e
V n
o fl
H f
f
f
Flx ef C
PT Slipp
Ixo Co
Bip p C
Cfl
I
A
C
I
k
Br
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 =Condition True
0 =Condition False
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x =Reserved
Bit #
Trq StpC ct
Pr flct
t
flc
fl
erS ct
Pro etC
vC
Us gCfl
f
f
PIC
x x x x x x x x x x x x 0 0 0 0 1 =Condition True
0 =Condition False
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 x =Reserved
Bit #
Figure 9.23 – Alarm 2 @ Fault (230)
234 Testpoint 1 Sel

Range: 0 to 65535 [1]
Default: 499
See also: 235
Selects the function whose value is displayed in Testpoint 1 Data (235). These
are internal values that are not accessible through parameters.
Refer to Testpoint Codes and Functions in chapter 10 for a list of codes and
functions.
235 Testpoint 1 Data
Range: -/+ 2147483648 [1]
Default: Read Only
See also: 234
The present value of the function selected in Testpoint 1 Sel (234).
236 Testpoint 2 Sel
Range: 0 to 65535 [1]
Default: 499
See also: 237
Selects the function whose value is displayed in Testpoint 2 Data (237). These
are internal values that are not accessible through parameters.
Refer to the Testpoint Codes and Functions in chapter 10 for a list of codes and
functions.
237 Testpoint 2 Data
Range: -/+ 2147483648 [1]
Default: Read Only
See also: 236
The present value of the function selected in Testpoint 2 Sel (236).
238 Fault Config 1
Access: 2 Path: Utility>Faults
See also:
Enables/disables annunciation of the faults shown in figure 9.24.
)
cc (2
De r Th ss (1)
oA s
rPN os
Un ow T rLd
Po rVo p
r L ge
ce erm
de em
ea ies
Sh st Tr t
s
ea eL
to Lo
tR ib
we lta
os
Ph s
L e
to n
In Los
Au l Inh
Sh Phas
HS r Ov
Mo ase
Mo r Pi
Ou HW
ad
C
t
PT
Lo
x x 0 0 0 x 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 x 1 0 1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x = Reserved
Bit # (1) Default is “1” for Frames 8-10.
Factory Default Bit Values (2) When enabled, the drive ignores the shear pin
fault during any accel / decel.
Figure 9.24 – Fault Config 1 (238)
240 Fault Clear

Range: 0 = Ready
1 = Clear Faults
2 = Clr Flt Que
Default: 0 = Ready
See also:
Resets a fault and clears the fault queue.
241 Fault Clear Mode
Range: 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Default: 1 = Enabled
See also:
Enables/disables a fault reset (clear faults) attempt from any source. This does
not apply to fault codes, which are cleared indirectly via other actions.
242 Power Up Marker
Range: 0.0000 to 214748.3647 Hr [0.0001 Hr]
Default: Read Only
See also: 244, 246, 248, 250, 252, 254, 256, 258
Snapshot of Life Pwr Up Time captured each time the IPS Tempo is powered
up. Times captured at each fault (Fault x Time) can be compared to this value
for determining when the fault occurred relative to the most recent power up
cycle. This value will rollover to 0 after the IPS Tempo has been powered on for
more than the maximum value shown.
243 Fault 1 Code
245 Fault 2 Code
247 Fault 3 Code
249 Fault 4 Code
251 Fault 5 Code
253 Fault 6 Code
255 Fault 7 Code
257 Fault 8 Code
Range: 0000 to 65535
Default: Read Only
See also: 214, 238
A code that represents a IPS Tempo fault. The codes will appear in these
parameters in the order they occur. Fault 1 Code = the most recent fault.
244 Fault 1 Time

246 Fault 2 Time
248 Fault 3 Time
250 Fault 4 Time
252 Fault 5 Time
254 Fault 6 Time
256 Fault 7 Time
258 Fault 8 Time
Range: 0.0000 to 214748.3647 [0.0001 Hr]
Default: Read Only
See also: 242
The time between initial power up and the occurrence of the associated trip
fault. Can be compared to Power Up Marker for the time from the most recent
power up.
Fault x Time - Power Up Marker = Time difference to the most recent power
up. A negative value indicates a fault occurred before the most recent power up.
A positive value indicates a fault occurred after the most recent power up.
259 Alarm Config 1
Access: 2 Path: Utility>Alarms
See also:
Enables/disables alarm conditions that will initiate a IPS Tempo alarm.
Wa r Th ss
rg e
Str in L OH
In Los rn
tv
Un r Lo p
De ing m
Po t Pw ss
LL 2
1
ch ltag
Dr OL L t
Pre erVo s
Lo nd W d
we rU
to Lo
ib
Ac
a
k er
v O vl
vl
s
Ph s
ou e
A o
An Res
Dr l Inh
Gr Slipp
Mo ase
DB
ad
ce
lg
d
v
k
Int
Br
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 = Condition True
0 = Condition False
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x = Reserved
Bit #
W el
PT Trq L vr
C H ev
nt
OW ve C
ti
Ac
0 = Condition False
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 x = Reserved
Bit #
Figure 9.25 – Alarm Config 1 (259)
261 Alarm Clear

Range: 0 = Ready
1 = Clr Alarm Que
Default: 0 = Ready
See also: 262 - 269
Resets all Alarm1 - 8 Code parameters (262 - 269) to zero.
262 Alarm 1 Code

263 Alarm 2 Code
264 Alarm 3 Code
265 Alarm 4 Code
266 Alarm 5 Code
267 Alarm 6 Code
268 Alarm 7 Code
269 Alarm 8 Code
Range: 0 to 65535 [1]
Default: Read Only
See also: 261
A code that represents a IPS Tempo alarm. The codes will appear in the order
that the alarms occur. The first code in is the first out. See parameters 850-857
for time stamps.
270 DPI Data Rate
Range: 0 = 125 kbps
1 = 500 kbps
Default: 1 = 500 kbps
Access: 2 Path: Communication>Comm Control
See also:
Sets the IPS Tempo rate for attached IPS Tempo peripherals. The IPS Tempo
must be reset for the change in value to be affected.
271 Drive Logic Rslt
Default: Read Only
See also:
The final logic command to the IPS Tempo resulting from the combination of
all port requests and masking functions. Each bit or set of bits represent a
command to the IPS Tempo or follower device. Scales the DPI on maximum
frequency or maximum speed.
Fo rse trl
g ult
ve n
Re Dec
Re l Co
Cle ard
Jo r Fa
Lo Inc
Re 2
Re ID 1
De 0
De l 1
Ac l 2
Ac l 1
Mo l 2
f ID
f ID
ce
ce
ce
ce
rw
ca
Sto t
P
p
a
p
r
MO
Sta
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 = Condition Active
0 = Condition Inactive
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x = Reserved
Bit #
Bits(1)
14 13 12 Description
0 0 0 No Command - Man. Mode
0 0 1 Ref A
0 1 0 Ref 2 (Process/Spd)
1 1 1 Ref 7 (Process/Spd Override)
Figure 9.26 – Drive Logic Rslt (271)
272 Drive Ref Rslt

Range: -/+32767 [1]
Default: Read Only
See also:
Present frequency reference scaled as a DPI reference for peer-to-peer
communications. The value shown is the output prior to the accel/decel ramp
and any corrections supplied by slip comp, PI, etc.
273 Drive Ramp Rslt
Range: -/+32767 [1]
Default: Read Only
See also:
Present frequency reference scaled as a DPI reference for peer-to-peer
communications. The value shown is the value after the accel/decel ramp but
prior to any corrections supplied by slip comp, PI, etc.
274 DPI Port Select
Range: 0 = Not Used
1 = Local HIM
2 = DPI Port 2
3 = DPI Port 3
4 = DPI Port 4
5 = Network
6 = DPI Port 6
Default: 0 = Not Used
See also:
Selects which DPI port reference value will appear in DPI Port Value (275).
275 DPI Port Value
Range: -/+32767 [1]
Default: Read Only
See also:
Value of the DPI reference selected in DPI Port Sel (274).
286 Man Override En

Range: 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
See also:
lk
lB
tw 6
4
IP 3
ca 2
Te l HIM
Ne Port
DP ork
DP Port
DP Port
Lo ort
ina
rm
I
I
I
DP
x x x x x x x x x 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 = Control Disabled
0 = Control Enabled
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x = Reserved
Bit #
Figure 9.27 – Man Override En (286)
Select allows or prevents the activation of Manual Override from the keypad(s)
or defined digital input.
Important: You can only change the value of Man Override En (286) when the
IPS Tempo is stopped.
287 Man Override Own
Default: Read Only
See also:
Indicates the source providing manual control.
lk
lB
tw 6
4
IP 3
ca 2
Te l HIM
Ne Port
DP ork
DP Port
DP Port
Lo ort
ina
rm
I
I
I
DP
x x x x x x x x x 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 = Control Disabled
0 = Control Enabled
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x = Reserved
Bit #
Figure 9.28 – Man Override Own (287)
288 Stop Owner

Default: Read Only
See also: 276 - 285
Modules that are presently issuing a valid stop command.
lk
lB
tw 6
4
IP 3
ca 2
Te l HIM
Ne Port
DP ork
DP Port
DP Port
Lo ort
ina
rm
I
I
I
DP
x x x x x x x x x 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 = Issuing Command
0 = No Command
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x = Reserved
Bit #
Figure 9.29 – Stop Owner
298 DPI Ref Scale

Range: 0 = Max Freq
1 = Max Speed
Default: 0 = Max Freq
See also: 82, 55
299 DPI Fdbk Select

Range: 0 = Output Freq
1 = Command Spd
2 = Output Amps
3 = Torque Amps
4 = Flux Amps
5 = Output Power
6 = Output Volts
7 = DC Bus Volts
8 = Process Ref
9 = Process FB
10 = Process Err
11 = Process Out
12 = %Motor OL
13 = %Drive OL
14 = CommandedTrq
15 = MtrTrqCurRef
16 = Speed Ref
17 = Speed Fdbk
18 = PulseInRef
19 = Reserved
20 = Scale Block 1
21 = Scale Block 2
22 = Scale Block 3
23 = Scale Block 4
24 = Param Cntl
25 = SpdFb NoFilt
Default: 17 = Speed Fdbk
See also:
Selects the data to be copied into the DPI feedback data register.
300 Data In A1 - Link A Word 1
301 Data In A2 - Link A Word 2
Range: 0 to 857 [1]
Access: 2 Path: Communication>Datalinks
See also:
Parameter number whose value will be written from a communications device
data table.
Standard Control = Parameters that can be changed only while the IPS Tempo
is stopped cannot be used as Datalink inputs. Entering a parameter of this type
will disable the link
Vector Control = Will not be updated until IPS Tempo is stopped.
Refer to the appropriate communications option board manual for datalink
information.
302 Data In B1 - Link B Word 1

303 Data In B2 - Link B Word 2
Range: 0 to 857 [1]
See also:
data table.
information.
304 Data In C1 - Link C Word 1
305 Data In C2 - Link C Word 2
Range: 0 to 857 [1]
See also:
data table.
information.
306 Data In D1 - Link D Word 1
307 Data In D2 - Link D Word 2
Range: 0 to 857 [1]
See also:
data table.
information.
308 HighRes Ref

Range: +/–2147418112
Default: 0
See also: 90, 93, 126, 128, 213, 298
Used as a high resolution, 32 bit reference with Datalinks.
310 Data Out A1- Link A Word 1
311 Data Out A2 - Link A Word 2
Range: 0 to 857 [1]
See also:
Parameter number whose value will be written to a communications device data
table.
312 Data Out B1- Link B Word 1
313 Data Out B2 - Link B Word 2
Range: 0 to 857 [1]
See also:
table.
314 Data Out C1- Link C Word 1
315 Data Out C2 - Link C Word 2
Range: 0 to 857 [1]
See also:
table.
316 Data Out D1- Link D Word 1
317 Data Out D2 - Link D Word 2
Range: 0 to 857 [1]
See also:
table.
320 Anlg In Config
Access: 0 Path: Inputs & Outputs>Analog Inputs
See also: 90, 93, 96, 126, 128, 322, 323, 325, 326
Selects the type of input signal being used for analog input 1 and 2. These
inputs can be configured as 10VDC (unipolar or bipolar) or as 4-20mA inputs.
Refer to scaling parameters Analog ln 1 (322 and 323) and Analog ln 2 (325
and 326).
alo 2
n1
An log In
gI
a
An
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 1 1 1 =Current
0 =Voltage
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x =Reserved
Bit #
Analog ln 1 Bit Terminal

0 to 10 VDC or -10 to Bit 0 = 0 1, 2 (17 to 18 not jumpered)
+10 VDC
4 to 20 mA Bit 0 = 1 1, 2 (17 to 18 jumpered)
Analog ln 2 Bit Terminal
0 to 10 VDC or -10 to Bit 1 = 0 3, 4 (19 to 20 not jumpered)
+10 VDC
4 to 20 mA Bit 1 = 1 3, 4 (19 to 20 jumpered)
Figure 9.30 – Anlg ln Config (320)
321 Anlg In Sqr Root

See also:
Enables/disables the square root function for each analog input (independently
of Process Config (124), bit 5 DiffPress FB).
alo 2
n1
An log In
gI
a
An
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 0 0 1 =Enable
0 =Disable
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x =Reserved
Bit #
Figure 9.31 – Anlg in Sqr Root (321)
322 Analog In 1 Hi
Range: 0.000 to 20.000 mA [0.001 mA]
-/+10.000 V [0.001 V]
0.000 to 10.000 V [0.001 V]
Default: 20.000 mA
See also: 91, 92, 90, 93, 96, 126, 128, 320
Analog In 1 Hi sets the highest input value to the analog input 1 scaling block.
Anlg ln Config (320) defines if the input value will be -/+10V or 0-20 mA.
The value of Anlg In Config (320) determines the units in which the parameter
is displayed.
Analog Input Scaling Example

Assume:
Speed Ref A Sel = Analog In 1
Minimum Freq = 0 Hz
Maximum Freq = 60 Hz
Analog In 1 Lo = 4.000 mA
Analog In 1 Hi = 20.000 mA
This is the default setting, where minimum input (4 mA) represents Minimum Speed and maximum
input (20 mA) represents Maximum Speed.
323 Analog In 1 Lo
Range: 0.000 to 20.000 mA [0.001 mA]
-/+10.000 V [0.001 V]
0.000 to 10.000 V [0.001 V]
Default: 4.000 mA
See also: 91, 92
Sets the lowest input value to the analog input 1 scaling block.
If set below 4 mA, Analog ln 1 Error (324) should be “Disabled.”
324 Analog In 1 Error
Range: 0 = Disabled
1 = Fault
2 = Hold Input (use last frequency command)
3 = Set Input Lo (use Minimum Speed as frequency command)
4 = Set Input Hi (use Maximum Speed as frequency command)
5 = Go to Preset1 (use Preset 1 as frequency command)
6 = Hold OutFreq (maintain last output frequency)
See also: 91, 92, 190
Selects IPS Tempo response when an analog signal loss is detected. Signal loss
is defined as an analog signal less than 1 V or 2 mA. The signal loss event ends
and normal operation resumes when the input signal level meets or exceeds 1.5
V or 3 mA.
One of the selections (1=Fault) stops the IPS Tempo on signal loss. All other
choices make it possible for the input signal to return to a usable level while the
IPS Tempo is still running.
ATTENTION: Setting parameter 324 to a value greater than 1

allows the input signal to return to a usable level while the IPS
Tempo is running. If a lost analog signal is restored while the IPS
Tempo is running, the IPS Tempo will ramp to the restored
reference level at the rate specified in Accel Time 1 (140), Accel
Time 2 (141), Decel Time 1 (142), and Decel Time 2 (143). Be
aware that an abrupt speed change may occur depending upon the
new reference level and the rate specified in these parameters.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in severe injury or
loss of life.
325 Analog In 2 Hi
Range: 4.000 to 20.000 mA [0.001 mA]
-/+10.000 V [0.001 V]; 0.000 to 10.000 V [0.001 V]
Default: 20.000 mA
See also: 91, 92
Analog In 2 Hi sets the highest input value to the analog input 2 scaling block.
The value of Anlg In Config (320) determines the units in which the parameter
is displayed.
326 Analog In 2 Lo
Range: 4.000 to 20.000 mA [0.001 mA]
-/+10.000 V [0.001 V]; 0.000 to 10.000 V [0.001 V]
Default: 4.000 mA
See also: 91, 92
Sets the lowest input value to the analog input 2 scaling block.
Anlg ln Config (320) defines if the input value will be -/+10V or 0-20 mA. The
value of Anlg In Config (320) determines the units in which the parameter is
displayed.
If set below 4 mA, Analog ln 2 Error (327) should be “Disabled.”
327 Analog In 2 Error

Range: 0 = Disabled
1 = Fault
2 = Hold Input (use last frequency command)
3 = Set Input Lo (use Minimum Speed as frequency command)
4 = Set Input Hi (use Maximum Speed as frequency command)
5 = Go to Preset1 (use Preset1 as frequency command)
6 = Hold OutFreq (maintain last output frequency)
See also: 91, 92
Selects IPS Tempo response when an analog signal loss is detected. Signal loss
is defined as an analog signal less than 1 V or 2 mA. The signal loss event ends
and normal operation resumes when the input signal level meets or exceeds 1.5
V or 3 mA.
One of the selections (1=Fault) stops the IPS Tempo on signal loss. All other
choices make it possible for the input signal to return to a usable level while the
IPS Tempo is still running.
ATTENTION: Setting parameter 327 to a value greater than 1

allows the input signal to return to a usable level while the IPS
Tempo is running. If a lost analog signal is restored while the IPS
Tempo is running, the IPS Tempo will ramp to the restored
reference level at the rate specified in Accel Time 1 (140), Accel
Time 2 (141), Decel Time 1 (142), and Decel Time 2 (143). Be
aware that an abrupt speed change may occur depending upon the
new reference level and the rate specified in these parameters.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in severe injury or
loss of life.
331 Ain1 SensorUnits

Range: 0 = Percent [%]
1 = GPM Flow [gpm]
FV 2 = m3/Hour Flow [m3/h]
3 = lmb/ Sec Flow [lb/s]
4 = lbm/Min Flow [lb/m]
5 = lmb/Hr Flow [lb/h]
6 = kg/Sec Flow [kg/s]
7 = kg/Min Flow [kg/m]
8 = kg/Hr Flow [kg/h]
9 = PSI Pressure [PSI]
10 = kPa Pressure [kPa]
11 = Bar Pressure [Bar]
12 = Ft Pressure [Ft]
13 = m Pressure [m]
14 = F deg Temp [Fdeg]
15 = C deg Temp [Cdeg]
16 = RPM Speed [rpm]
17 = Hz Speed [Hz]
18 = PSI Level [psi]
19 = Ft Level [Ft]
20 = Inch Level [In]
21 = m Level [m]
22 = cm Level [cm]
23 = ips Vibrate [ips]
24 = mm/s Vibrate [mm/s]
Default: 0 = Percent [%]
Access: 0 Path: Inputs & Outputs>Analog Outputs
See also: 19
Defines the units that are used for analog input 1.
332 Ain1 Sensor High
Range: +/- 9999.9
Default: 100.0
See also: 331
Scales the upper end of the reference and feedback inputs.
The value of Ain1 SensorUnits (331) determines the units in which the
333 Ain2 SensorUnits

1 = GPM Flow [gpm]
FV 2 = m3/Hour Flow [m3/h]
12 = Ft Pressure [Ft]
13 = m Pressure [m]
16 = RPM Speed [rpm]
17 = Hz Speed [Hz]
18 = PSI Level [psi]
19 = Ft Level [Ft]
20 = Inch Level [In]
21 = m Level [m]
22 = cm Level [cm]
23 = ips Vibrate [ips]
24 = mm/s Vibrate [mm/s]

See also: 20
Defines the units that are used for analog input 2.
334 Ain2 Sensor High
Range: +/- 9999.9
Default: 100
See also: 333
Scales the upper end of the reference and feedback inputs.
335 Ain1 Sensor Low
Range: +/- 9999.9
FV Default: 0
See also: 331
Scales the lower end of the reference and feedback inputs.
parameter is displayed
336 Ain2 Sensor Low

Range: +/- 9999.9
FV Default: 0
See also: 333
Scales the lower end of the reference and feedback inputs.
340 Analog Out Config
See also:
Selects the mode for analog outputs.
gO 2
ut1
alo ut
An log O
a
An
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 1 1 1 =Current
0 =Voltage
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x =Reserved
Bit #
Figure 9.32 – Analog Out Config
341 Anlg Out Absolut

See also:
Selects whether the signed value or absolute value of a parameter is used before
being scaled to drive the analog output.
gO 2
ut1
alo ut
An log O
a
An
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 1 1 1 =Absolute
0 =Signed
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x =Reserved
Bit #
Figure 9.33 – Anlg Out Absolute (341)
342 Analog Out1Sel

345 Analog Out2 Sel
Range: 0 = Output Freq
1 = Command Freq
2 = Output Amps
3 = Torque Amps
4 = Flux Amps
5 = Output Power
6 = Output Volts
7 = DC Bus Volts
8 = PI Reference
9 = PI Feedback
10 = PI Error
11 = PI Output
12 = %Motor OL
13 = %Drive OL
14 = CommandedTrq
15 = MtrTqrCurRef
16 = Speed Ref
17 = Speed Fdbk
18 = PulseInRef
19 = Torque Est
20 = Scale Block 1
21 = Scale Block 2
22 = Scale Block 3
23 = Scale Block 4
24 = Param Cntl
25 = SpdFb NoFilt
Default: 0 = Output Freq
See also: 1 - 7, 12, 135 - 138, 219, 220
Selects the source of the value that drives the analog output.
Table 9.5 – Analog Out1/2 Sel
Analog Out1/2 Lo Value

Options P.341 = Signed P.341 = Absolute Analog Out1/2 Hi
0 = Output Freq -Maximum Speed 0 Hz + Maximum Speed
1 = Command Spd -Maximum Speed 0 Hz/RPM + Maximum Speed
2 = Output Amps 0 Amps 0 Amps 200% Rated
3 = Torque Amps -200% Rated 0 Amps 200% Rated
4 = Flux Amps 0 Amps 0 Amps 200% Rated
5 = Output Power 0 kW 0 kW 200% Rated
6 = Output Volts 0 Volts 0 Volts 120% Rated Input Volts
7 = DC Bus Volts 0 Volts 0 Volts 200% Rated Input Volts
8 = PI Reference -100% 0% 100%
9 = PI Feedback -100% 0% 100%
10 = PI Error -100% 0% 100%
11 = PI Output -100% 0% 100%
12 = %Motor OL 0% 0% 100%
13 = %IPS Tempo OL 0% 0% 100%
14 = CommandedTrq -800% Rated 0% 800% Rated
15 = MtrTrqCurRef -200% Rated 0% 200% Rated
16 = Speed Ref -Maximum Speed 0 Hz/RPM + Maximum Speed
17 = Speed Fdbk -Maximum Speed 0 Hz/RPM + Maximum Speed
18 = Pulse ln Ref -25200.0 RPM 0 Hz/RPM + Maximum Speed
19 = Torque Est -800% 0% 800%
20 = Scale Block 1 0% 0% 100%
21 = Scale Block 2 0% 0% 100%
22 = Scale Block 3 0% 0% 100%
23 = Scale Block 4 0% 0% 100%
24 = Param Cntl 0% 0% 100%
25 = SpdFb NoFilt 0% 0% 100%
343 Analog Out1 Hi

346 Analog Out2 Hi
Range: 0.000 to 20.000 mA or -/+10.000 V [0.001 mA or 0.001 V]
Default: 10.000 V
See also: 340, 342
Sets the analog output value when the source value is at maximum.
344 Analog Out1 Lo
347 Analog Out2 Lo
Default: 0.000 V
See also: 340, 342
Sets the analog output value when the source value is at minimum.
354 Analog Out1 Scale

355 Analog Out2 Scale
Range: Analog OutxSel [0.0]
Default: 0.0 (Disable)
See also: 342, 345
Sets the high value for the range of analog out scale.
Entering 0.0 will disable this scale and max scale will be used.
Example: If Analog Outx Sel (342,345) = Commanded Trq, then a value of 150
= 150% scale in place of the default 800%.
The value of Analog Out1 Sel (342) determines the units in which Analog Out1
Scale (354) is displayed.
The value of Analog Out2 Sel (345) determines the units in which Analog Out2
Scale (355) is displayed.
361 Digital In1 Sel
362 Digital In2 Sel
363 Digital In3 Sel
Range: See table 9.6
Default: Read Only
Access: 361= 0 Path: Inputs & Outputs>Digital Inputs
362-363 = 1
See also: 96, 100, 124, 140, 156, 162, 194, 380, 703
Important: Digital inputs 1, 2, and 3 cannot be directly programmed. They

can only be changed via IPS Start Mode (703).
Table 9.6 – Digital Input Selection via IPS Start Mode (703)
Not Used (0) 2-wire (1) 3-wire (2)

Digital In1 Sel (361) Not Used (0) Clear Faults (2) Stop - CF (4)
Digital In2 Sel (362) Not Used (0) Run (7) Start (4)
Digital In3 Sel (363) Not Used (0) Function Loss (3) Function Loss (3)
364 Digital In4 Sel

365 Digital In5 Sel
366 Digital In6 Sel
Range: 0 = Not Used
1 = Enable
2 = Clear Faults1
3 = Function Loss
4 = Stop-CF
5 = Start2
6 = Fwd/Reverse2
7 = Run
8 = Run Forward3
9 = Run Reverse3
10 = Jog12
11 = Jog Forward3
12 = Jog Reverse 3
13 = Stop Mode B
14 = Bus Reg Md B
15 = Speed Sel 1
16 = Speed Sel 2
17 = Speed Sel 3
18 = Man Override
19 = Reserved
20 = Acc2 & Dec2
21 = Accel 2
22 = Decel 2
23 = MOP Inc
24 = MOP Dec
25 = HIM Control
26 = Process En
27 = Process Hold
28 = Process Res
29 = Pwr Loss Lvl
30 = Precharge En
31 = Spd/Trq Sel1
32 = Spd/Trq Sel2
33 = Spd/Trq Sel3
34 = Jog2
35 = Process Inv
36 = Torq Setpt 1
37 = Flt/Micro Pos
38 = Fast Stop
39 = Decel Limit
40 = End Limit
41 = UserSet Sel1
42 = UserSet Sel2
Access: 1 Path: Inputs & Outputs>Digital Inputs
See also: 96, 100, 124, 140, 156, 162, 194, 380
1. When Digital lnx Sel is set to 2 = Clear Faults, the Stop button cannot be used to clear a fault condition.
2. Typical 3-wire Inputs: Only 3-wire functions are allowed. Including 2-wire selections will cause a type 2 alarm.
3. Typical 2-wire Inputs: Only 2-wire functions are allowed. Including 3-wire selections will cause a type 2 alarm.
Assigns an input function to the IPS Tempo’s digital inputs.

Table 9.7 – Speed Select Inputs
Speed Select Inputs (17,16,15)

3 2 1 Reference Source
0 0 0 Reference A (90)
0 0 1 Reference B (93)
0 1 0 Speed Ref 2
0 1 1 Speed Ref 3
1 0 0 Speed Ref 4
1 0 1 Speed Ref 5
1 1 0 Speed Ref 6
1 1 1 Speed Ref 7
Table 9.8 – Spd/Trq Sel # Inputs
Speed/Torque Select Inputs (33, 32, 31)

3 2 1 Reference Source
0 0 0 Zero Torque
0 0 1 Speed Regulator
0 1 0 Torque Regulator
0 1 1 Min Speed/Torque
1 0 0 Max Speed/Torque
1 0 1 Sum Speed/Torque
1 1 0 Absolute
1 1 1 Zero Torque
Table 9.9 – Default Values for Parameters 364-366
Parameter No. Default Value

364 Not Used (0)
365 Not Used (0)
366 Not Used (0)
The input functions are:
1 = Enable: If the input is closed, the IPS Tempo can run (start permissive). If the input is open, the IPS
Tempo will not start.
If the IPS Tempo is already running when this input is opened, the IPS Tempo will coast and indicate
“not enabled” on the HIM (if present). This is not considered a fault condition, and no fault will be
generated.
If multiple enable inputs are configured, the IPS Tempo will not run if any of them are open.
2 = Clear Faults: This function allows an external device to reset IPS Tempo faults through the
terminal block if Logic Source Sel (89) is set to Terminal Blk or All Ports. An open-to-closed transition
on this input will reset the current fault (if any).
If this input is configured at the same time as Stop-Clear Faults, then only the Clear Faults input can
actually cause faults to be reset.
3 = Function Loss: If the function loss input is open, a fault is generated. The function loss input is
active at all times regardless of the selected logic control source.
Important: The function loss input is not intended for a fast output power kill. The IPS Tempo will not
fault until the software detects the change of state of this input. If this input function is not
configured, the fault will not occur.
4 = Stop - CF (Stop - Clear Faults): An open input will always assert a stop command. While the stop
is asserted, the IPS Tempo ready status will be off. A closed input will allow the IPS Tempo to start. An
open-to-closed transition is interpreted as a clear faults request. The IPS Tempo will clear any existing
faults.
If Start is configured, then Stop-Clear Faults must also be configured to prevent a digital input
configuration alarm condition. Stop-Clear Faults is optional in all other circumstances.
5 = Start: An open-to-closed transition generates a run command if the terminal block is the control
source.
If Start is configured, then Stop-Clear Faults must also be configured to prevent a digital input
configuration alarm condition.
7 = Run: An open-to-closed transition on this input generates a run command if the terminal block is
the control source. If the input is open, the IPS Tempo will stop.
10 and 34 = Jog: An open-to-closed transition on this input while the IPS Tempo is stopped causes the
IPS Tempo to start (jog). When the input opens while the IPS Tempo is running (jogging), the IPS
Tempo will stop.
ATTENTION: If a normal IPS Tempo start command is received

while the IPS Tempo is jogging, the IPS Tempo will switch from
jog mode to run mode. The IPS Tempo will not stop, but may change
speed. Failure to observe this precaution could result in severe
bodily injury or loss of life.
The IPS Tempo will not jog while running or while the Stop - Clear Faults input is open. Start has
precedence over jog.
13 = Stop Mode B: This digital input selects between two different IPS Tempo stop modes.
If the input is open, then Stop Mode A selects which stop mode to use. If the input is closed, the Stop
Mode B selects which stop mode to use. If this input function is not configured, then Stop Mode A
selects which stop mode to use.
14 = Bus Regulation Mode B: This digital input function selects how the IPS Tempo will regulate
excess voltage on the DC bus.
If the input is open, then Bus Reg Mode A selects which bus regulation mode to use. If the input is
closed, then Bus Reg Mode B selects which bus regulation mode to use. If this input function is not
configured, then Bus Reg Mode A selects which bus regulation mode to use.
15-17 = Speed Sel 1, 2, 3: One, two, or three digital input functions can be used to select the speed or
process reference used by the IPS Tempo (depending on which mode is active), and they are called
the Speed Reference Select input functions. The current open/closed state of all Speed Reference
Select input functions combine to select which source is the current reference.
There are 7 possible combinations of open/closed states for the three input functions, and thus 7
possible parameters can be selected.
If the Speed Select input functions select Speed Ref A Sel, then the value of that parameter further
selects a reference source. There are a large number of possible selections, including all 6 presets.
If the input functions directly select one of the Reference parameters, then the parameter contains a
frequency that is to be used as the reference.
The Speed Reference Select input function configuration process involves assigning the functionality of
the three possible Speed Reference Select input functions to physical digital inputs. The three Speed
Reference Select inputs functions are called Speed Reference Select 1, Speed Reference Select 2,
and Speed Reference Select 3, and they are assigned to physical inputs using the Digital In”x” Sel
parameters.
Table 9.7 describes the various reference sources that can be selected using all three of the Speed
Select input functions. If any of the three Reference Select input functions are not configured, then the
software will still follow the table, but will treat the unconfigured inputs as if they are permanently open.
Table 9.10 – Effect of Speed Select Input State on Selected Reference
Speed Speed Speed

Select 3 Select 2 Select 1 Parameter that determines reference:
Open Open Open Speed Ref A Sel/Process Ref 1
Open Closed Open Speed/Process Ref 2
Open Closed Closed Speed/Process Ref 3
Closed Open Open Speed/Process Ref 4
Closed Open Closed Speed/Process Ref 5
Closed Closed Open Speed/Process Ref 6
Closed Closed Closed Proc/Spd Override Ref
18 = Man Override: The Manual Override function allows a single control device to assume exclusive
control of reference select.
Manual Override mode can be activated from this configured digital input on the terminal block (inputs
4, 5, or 6 only) or the Auto/Man key on the HIM. When activated, Manual Override mode will cause the
IPS Tempo to immediately transition to Speed mode and exclusive logic control will switch to the
activating device.
No other device can initiate Manual Override mode until the activating device releases it (by opening
the digital input or pressing the Auto/Man key on the HIM). When Manual Override mode is
deactivated, the drive returns to the mode of operation and the logic control source that are determined
by TB Man Ref Sel (96). When the terminal block controls Manual Override mode, the drive reference
cannot be preloaded to the current operating speed.
Any other override modes (i.e. process or speed override) are aborted when Manual Override mode is
activated. Thus, all IPS Tempo monitor functions and timers are reset if the overriding conditions were
corrected.
20 = Acc2 & Dec2: A single input function is used to select between Accel Time 1/Decel Time 1 and
Accel Time 2/Decel Time2.
If the function is open, the IPS Tempo will use Accel Time 1 as the acceleration rate and Decel Time 1
as the deceleration rate. If the function is closed, the IPS Tempo will use Accel Time 2 as the
acceleration rate and Decel Time 2 as the deceleration rate.
21, 22 = Accel 2, Decel 2: One input function (called Accel 2) selects between Accel Time 1 and Accel
Time 2, and another input function (called Decel 2) selects between Decel Time 1 and Decel Time 2.
The open state of the function selects Accel Time 1 or Decel Time 1, and the closed state selects Accel
Time 2 or Decel Time 2.
23, 24 = MOP Increment, MOP Decrement: The MOP is a reference setpoint (called the MOP Value)
that can be incremented and decremented by external devices. These inputs are used to increment
and decrement the Motor Operated Potentiometer (MOP) value inside the IPS Tempo. The MOP value
will be retained through a power cycle.
While the MOP Increment input is closed, the MOP value will increase at rate contained in MOP Rate.
Units for rate are Hz per second.
While the MOP Decrement input is closed, MOP value will decrease at rate contained in MOP Rate.
Units for rate are Hz per second.
If both the MOP Increment and MOP Decrement inputs are closed, the MOP value will stay the same.
In order for the IPS Tempo to use the MOP value as the current speed reference, either Speed Ref A
Sel (90) or Speed Ref B Sel (93) must be set to MOP.
25 = HIM Control: This input provides a mean to override the logic control source selection and can be
used to override control from any port, including the All Ports selection.
An open-to-closed transition of this input sets the control source to the local HIM. If no local HIM is
present, the control source is set to the remote HIM. If no HIM is present at all, the IPS Tempo stops.
When control is set to the HIM, the HIM is granted manual reference (the HIM Ref Preload (193)
configuration is enforced). The IPS Tempo’s active or stopped state is not affected unless no HIM is
present.
On a closed-to-open transition, manual control is released if active. The logic source select override is
removed.
26 = Process En: If this input function is closed, the operation of the Process PI loop will be enabled.
If this input function is open, the operation of the Process PI loop will be disabled. Refer to Process
Control (125), bit 0.
27 = Process Hold: If this input function is closed, the integrator for the Process PI loop will be held at
the current value; that is, it will not increase or decrease.
If this input function is open, the integrator for the Process PI loop will be allowed to change.
28 = Process Res: If this input function is closed, the integrator for the Process PI loop will be reset to
0.
If this input function is open, the integrator for the Process PI loop will integrate normally.
29 = Pwr Loss Lvl: When the DC bus level in the IPS Tempo falls below a certain level, a “powerloss”
condition is created in the IPS Tempo logic. This input allows the user to select between two different
“power loss” detection levels dynamically. If the physical input is closed, then the IPS Tempo will take its
power loss level from a parameter. If the physical input is open (de-energized), then the IPS Tempo will
use a power loss level designated by internal IPS Tempo memory, typically 82% of nominal. If the input
function is not configured, then the IPS Tempo always uses the internal power loss level.
30 = Precharge En: This input function is used to manage disconnection from a common DC bus.
If the physical input is closed, this indicates that the IPS Tempo is connected to common DC bus and
normal precharge handling can occur, and that the IPS Tempo can run (start permissive). If the
physical input is open, this indicates that the IPS Tempo is disconnected from the common DC bus,
and thus the IPS Tempo should enter the precharge state (precharge relay open) and initiate a coast
stop immediately in order to prepare for reconnection to the bus.
If this input function is not configured, then the IPS Tempo assumes that it is always connected to the
DC bus, and no special precharge handling will be done.
31-33 = Spd/Trq Sel#: Refer to Table 9.8.
35 = Process In: Inverts the sign of the PI Error Value.
36 = Torque Setpt1: Selects Torque Setpt1 for Torque Ref A Sel when set. If Torque Setpt1 is not set,
the value selected in Torque Ref A Sel is used.
38 = Fast Stop: When closed, the IPS Tempo will stop with a 0.1 second decel time.
39 = Decel Limit: Reference changed to Speed Ref 1 when activated.
40 = End Limit: Enables a fast stop to zero speed using a zero decel time.
41-42 = UserSet Sel#: 0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled
ATTENTION: Changing parameter 89 to Terminal Blk or

Network while Start At PowerUp is enabled may start the IPS
Tempo if a start command is on from the newly selected logic
source.
operating personnel or damage to the driven equipment. In addition,
the user is responsible for providing suitable audible or visual
alarms or other devices to indicate that this function is enabled and
the IPS Tempo may start at any moment. Failure to observe this
HIM is the selected reference source, but is not the selected control
source. The IPS Tempo will ramp to the reference level provided
by the HIM at the rate specified in Accel Time 1 (140), Accel Time
2 (141), Decel Time 1 (142) and Decel Time 2 (143). Be aware that
Important: Some digital input programming may cause conflicts that result in a Type 2 alarm. For
example, Digital In1 Sel set to 5 (Start) in 3-wire control, and Digital In4 Sel set to 7 (Run)
in 2-wire control.
377 Anlg1 Out Setpt

378 Anlg2 Out Setpt
Default: 4.000 V
See also:
Sets the analog output value from a communication device.
Example: Set Data ln A1 (300) to 377 (value from communication device).
Then set Analog Out1 Sel (342) to 24 = Param Cntl.
379 Dig Out Setpt
Access: 2 Path: Inputs & Outputs>Digital Outputs
See also: 380
Sets the digital output value from a communication device.
Example: Set Data ln B1 (302) to 379. The first three bits of this value will
determine the setting of Digital Outx Sel (380, 384, 388), which should be set
to 30 = Param Cntl.
Dig tal O 3
ita ut2
ut1
t
Dig al Ou
lO
it
i
Dig
x x x x x x x x x x x x x 0 0 0 1 =Output Energized
0 =Output De-energized
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x =Reserved
Bit #
Figure 9.34 – Dig Out Setpt
380 Digital Out1 Sel

Range: 1 = Fault
2 = Alarm
3 = Ready
4 = Run
5 = Forward Run
6 = Reverse Run
7 = Auto Restart
8 = Powerup Run
9 = At Speed
10 = At Freq
11 = At Current
12 = At Torque
13 = At Temp
14 = At Bus Volts
15 = At PI Error
16 = DC Braking
17 = Curr Limit
18 = Economize
19 = Motor Overld
20 = Power Loss
21 = Input 1 Link
22 = Input 2 Link
23 = Input 3 Link
24 = Input 4 Link
25 = Input 5 Link
26 = Input 6 Link
27 = PI Enable
28 = PI Hold
29 = Drive Overld
30 = Param Cntl
31 = Mask 1 AND
32 = Mask 1 OR
33 = Mask 2 AND
34 = Mask 2 OR
35 = Mask 3 AND
36 = Mask 3 OR
37 = Manual Mode
38 = Fast Braking
39 = Speed Fdbk
Default: 380: 1 = Fault
384: 34 = Mask 2 OR
388: 4 = Run
See also: 1-4, 12, 48, 53, 137, 147, 157, 184, 218, 381-383, 385, 386, 390
Selects the IPS Tempo status that will energize an output relay.
381 Digital Out1 Level
Range: 0.0 to 819.2 [0.1]
Default: 0.0
See also: 380
Sets the relay activation level for options 10-15 in Digital Out”x” Sel. Units are
assumed to match the above selection (i.e., At Freq = Hz, At Torque = Amps).
382 Digital Out1 OnTime

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 sec [0.1 sec]
Default: 0.00 sec
See also: 380
Sets the on delay time for the digital outputs. This is the time between the
occurrence of a condition and activation of the relay.
383 Digital Out1 OffTime
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 sec [0.1 sec]
Default: 0.00 sec
See also: 380
Sets the off delay time for the digital outputs. This is the time between the
disappearance of a condition and de-activation of the relay.
392 Dig Out Invert
See also:
Inverts the selected digital output.
Dig tal O 3
ita ut2
ut1
t
Dig al Ou
lO
it
i
Dig
x x x x x x x x x x x x x 0 1 0 1 =Inverted
0 =Not Inverted
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x =Reserved
Bit #
Figure 9.35 – Dig Out Invert
393 Dig Out Param1

Range: 0 = PI Config
1 = PI Status
2 = Drive Sts 1
3 = Drove Sts 2
4 = DriveAlarm1
5 = DriveAlarm2
6 = StartInhibit
7 = DigIn Status
8 = DrvSts1 Filt
9 = DrvSts2 Filt
10 = AlrmSts1 Filt
11= AlrmSts2 Filt
12 = LogicCmdRslt
13 = Stop Owner
14 = Limit Status
15 = PortMakAct
16 = WriteMaskAct
17 = LogicMaskAct
18 = IPS Status
19 = PPM Status
20 = PVM Status
21 = PCM Status
22 = DIM 4 Status
23 = DIM 5 Status
24 = DIM 6 Status
Default: 19 = PPM Status
See also: 394
Selects the value to which the mask [Dig Out Mask1 (394)] will be applied.
394 Dig Out Mask1

See also: 393
Sets the mask that is applied to the selected value in Dig Out Param1 (393). A
bit (AND/OR) is applied. The bit is selected by the Digital Out1 Sel (380) =
MASK 1 AND or MASK 1 OR. All bits with zeros in the mask are ignored.
Bit 4
Bit 5
13
Bit 2
11
Bit 0
1
1
7
1
1
9
8
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 =Mask Enabled
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 =Mask Disabled
x =Reserved
Bit #
Re erved
Re rved
Re rved
Re erved
Re rved
Re rved
Re rved
Bit erved
Bit 3
22
Bit 1
Bit 0
Bit 9
18
17
16
se
se
se
se
se
2
2
1
s
s
Re
Bit
Bit
Bit
x x x x x x x x 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 =Mask Enabled
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 0 =Mask Disabled
x =Reserved
Bit #
Figure 9.36 – Dig Out Mask1
Example:
Mask OR: If any bits in the value are set in the mask, then the output is On.
Selected Value 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
Mask 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
Result Output On (Bit 7 is On)
Mask AND: If all bits in the value are set in the mask, then the output is On.
Selected Value 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
Mask 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
Result Output Off (Bit 7 is Off)
395 Dig Out Param2

1 = PI Status
2 = Drive Sts 1
3 = Drove Sts 2
4 = DriveAlarm1
5 = DriveAlarm2
6 = StartInhibit
7 = DigIn Status
8 = DrvSts1 Filt
9 = DrvSts2 Filt
10 = AlrmSts1 Filt
11= AlrmSts2 Filt
12 = LogicCmdRslt
13 = Stop Owner
14 = Limit Status
15 = PortMakAct
16 = WriteMaskAct
17 = LogicMaskAct
18 = IPS Status
19 = PPM Status
20 = PVM Status
21 = PCM Status
22 = DIM 4 Status
23 = DIM 5 Status
24 = DIM 6 Status
Default: 18 = IPS Status
See also:
396 Dig Out Mask2
Range: See figure 9.36
Default: See figure 9.36
See also:
Bit 4
Bit 5
13
Bit 2
11
Bit 0
1
1
7
1
1
9
8
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 =Mask Enabled
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 =Mask Disabled
x =Reserved
Bit #
Re er ved
Re r ved
Re r ved
Re er ved
Re r ved
Re r ved
Re r ved
Bit erved
Bit 3
22
Bit 1
Bit 0
Bit 9
18
17
16
se
se
se
se
se
2
2
1
s
s
Re
Bit
Bit
Bit
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 0 =Mask Disabled
x =Reserved
Bit #
Example:
Selected Value 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
Mask 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
Selected Value 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
Mask 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
Result Output Off Bit 7 is Off)
397 Dig Out Param3

1 = PI Status
2 = Drive Sts 1
3 = Drive Sts 2
4 = DriveAlarm1
5 = DriveAlarm2
6 = StartInhibit
7 = DigIn Status
8 = DrvSts1 Filt
9 = DrvSts2 Filt
10 = AlrmSts1 Filt
11= AlrmSts2 Filt
12 = LogicCmdRslt
13 = Stop Owner
14 = Limit Status
15 = PortMakAct
16 = WriteMaskAct
17 = LogicMaskAct
18 = IPS Status
19 = PPM Status
20 = PVM Status
21 = PCM Status
22 = DIM 4 Status
23 = DIM 5 Status
24 = DIM 6 Status
Default: 20 = PVM Status
See also:
398 Dig Out Mask3
See also:
Bit 4
Bit 5
13
Bit 2
11
Bit 0
1
1
7
1
1
9
8
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 =Mask Enabled
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 =Mask Disabled
x =Reserved
Bit #
Re er ved
Re r ved
Re r ved
Re er ved
Re r ved
Re r ved
Re r ved
Bit erved
Bit 3
22
Bit 1
Bit 0
Bit 9
18
17
16
se
se
se
se
se
2
2
1
s
s
Re
Bit
Bit
Bit
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 0 =Mask Disabled
x =Reserved
Bit #
Example:
Selected Value 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
Mask 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
Selected Value 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
Mask 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
Result Output Off (Bit 7 is Off)
411 DigIn DataLogic

Range: Refer to figure below
Default: Refer to figure below
See also:
Provides data to the logical operations that will be done with the digital inputs
when parameter 056 is set option “9, DigIn DatLog.”
In4 NDd ta
In3 NDd ta
In2 NDd ta
AN ata
AN ata
ata
O ta
OR ta
O ta
O ta
OR ta
ta
A a
A a
A a
In5 NDd
In1 Dd
Dd
In5 Rda
In4 Rda
In3 da
In2 Rda
In1 Rda
da
O
A
In6
In6
x x 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 = Logical 1
0 = Logical 0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x = Reserved
Bit #
Figure 9.39 – DigIn DataLogic (411)
412 Motor Fdbk Type

Range: 0 = Quadrature
1 = Quad Check
2 = Single Chan
3 = Single Check
Default: 0 = Quadrature
Access: 0 Path: Motor Control>Encoder Setup
See also:
Selects the encoder type - single channel or quadrature. Options 1 and 3 detect
a loss of encoder signal (when using differential inputs) regardless of the
Feedback Select (80) setting.
For FVC Vector mode, use a quadrature encoder only (option 0 or 1).
ATTENTION: When operating the drive with encoder feedback

selected (Feedback Select (80) = 3 (Encoder)), a loss of encoder
signal may produce an overspeed condition. For differential
encoders, Motor Fdbk Type (412) should be selected as option 1 or
3 to detect the loss of an encoder signal. The user is responsible for
ensuring that the driven machinery, all drive-train mechanisms, and
application material are capable of safe operation at the maximum
operating speed of the drive. Overspeed detection in the drive
determines when the drive shuts down. The factory default for
overspeed detection is set to 10.0 Hz (or 300.0 RPM) greater than
the Maximum Speed (82). Failure to observe this precaution could
413 Encoder PPR

Range: 2 to 20000 PPR [1 PPR]
Default: 1024 PPR
See also:
Contains the encoder pulses per revolution. For improved operation in FVC
Vector mode, PPR should meet or exceed (64 x motor poles).
414 Enc Position Fdbk
Range: -/+ 2147483647 [1]
Default: Read Only
See also:
Displays raw encoder pulse count. For single channel encoders, this count will
increase (per rev.) by the amount in Encoder PPR (413). For quadrature
encoders, this count will increase by 4 times the amount defined in Encoder
PPR (413).
415 Encoder Speed

Range: -/+ 420.0 Hz or -/+ 25200.0 RPM [0.1Hz or 0.1 RPM]
Default: Read Only
See also: 79
Provides a monitoring point that reflects speed as seen from the feedback
device. The value of Speed Units (79) determines the units in which the
416 Fdbk Filter Sel
Range: 0 = None
1 = Light
2 = Heavy
Default: 0 = None
See also:
Selects the type of feedback filter desired. “Light” uses a 35/49 radian feedback
filter. “Heavy” uses a 20/40 radian feedback filter.
419 Notch Filter Freq
Range: 0.0 to 500.0 Hz [0.1 Hz]
FV Default: 0.0
See also: 53
Sets the center frequency for an optional 2-pole notch filter. Filter is applied to
the torque command. 0 disables this filter.
420 Notch Filter K
Range: 0.1 to 0.9 Hz [0.1 Hz]
FV Default: 0.3 Hz
See also: 53
Sets the gain for the 2-pole notch filter.
421 Marker Pulse
Range: -/+ 2147483647 [1]
See also:
Latches the raw encoder count at each marker pulse.
422 Pulse ln Scale
Range: 2 to 20000 [1]
FV Default: 64
See also:
Sets the scale factor/gain for the Pulse Input when Encoder Z Chan (423) is set
to Pulse Input. Calculate for desired speed command as follows:
For Hz, [Pulse ln Scale] = Input Pulse Rate (Hz)/Desired Cmd. (Hz)
For RPM, [Pulse ln Scale] = (Input Pulse Rate (Hz)/Desired Cmd.
(Hz))/(120/Motor Poles)
423 Encoder Z Chan

Range: 0 = Pulse Input
1 = Pulse Check
FV 2 = Marker Input
3 = Marker Check
Default: 0 = Pulse Input
See also:
Defines if the input wired to terminals 5 and 6 of the Encoder Terminal Block
will be used as a Pulse or Marker Input. Options 1 and 3 detect a loss of signal
(when using differential inputs) regardless of the Feedback Select (80) setting.
427 Torque Ref A Sel
431 Torque Ref B Sel
Range: 0 = Torque Stpt1
1 = Analog ln 1
2 = Analog ln 2
FV 3-17 = Reserved
18 = DPI Port 1
19 = DPI Port 2
20 = DPI Port 3
21 = Reserved
22 = Network
23 = Reserved
24 = Disabled
25 = Scale Block 1
26 = Scale Block 2
27 = Scale Block 3
28 = Scale Block 4
29 = Torque Stpt2
Default: 427: 0 = Torque Stpt1
431: 24 = Disabled
See also: 53
Selects the source of the external torque reference to the IPS Tempo. How this
reference is used is dependent upon [Speed/Torque Mod].
428 Torque Ref A Hi
432 Torque Ref B Hi
Range: -/+ 800.0% [0.1%]
FV Default: 100.0%
See also: 53
Scales the upper value of the Torque Ref x Sel selection when the source is an
analog input.
429 Torque Ref A Lo
433 Torque Ref B Lo
Range: -/+ 800.0% [0.1%]
FV Default: 0.0%
See also: 53
Scales the lower value of the Torque Ref x Sel selection when the source is an
analog input.
430 Torq Ref A Div

Range: 0.1 to 3276.7 [0.1]
FV Default: 1.0
See also: 53
Defines the value of the divisor for the Torque Ref A Sel (427) selection.
434 Torq Ref B Mult
Range: -/+ 3276.7 [0.1]
FV Default: 1.0
See also: 53
Defines the value of the multiplier for the Torque Ref B Sel (431) selection.
435 Torque Setpoint1
Range: -/+ 800.0% [0.1%]
FV Default: 0.0%
See also: 53
Provides an internal fixed value for Torque Setpoint when Torque Ref Sel is set
to Torque Setpt.
436 Pos Torque Limit
Range: 0.0 to 800.0% [0.1%]
Default: 200.0%
See also: 53
Defines the torque limit for the positive torque reference value. The reference
will not be allowed to exceed this value.
437 Neg Torque Limit
Range: -800.0% to 0.0 [0.1%]
Default: -200.0%
See also: 53
Defines the torque limit for the negative torque reference value. The reference
will not be allowed to exceed this value.
438 Torque Setpoint2
Range: -/+ 800.0% [0.1%]
FV Default: 0.0%
See also:
Provides an internal fixed value for Torque Setpoint when Torque Ref Sel is set
to Torque Setpt2.
440 Control Status

See also: 53
Displays a summary status of any condition that may be limiting either the
current or the torque reference.
Ne rqLi Lim
Po PwrT Lim
im
Ne rqC Lim
rqC im
Po lxCu Lim
Mi Slip Lim
Fld rve ag
Po lip m
Ne wrT m
To eak ts
Ne lxC t
urL
Po TrqL it
gT urL
rqR Sts
sF imi
se ak
sT rq
n S Li
rq
r
sP Li
gF ur
W S
r
nT f
Ma rqCu
Mi rqRe
Ob imLe
Ve ef
sT
lT
x
L
g
Vlt
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 =Condition True
0 =Condition False
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x =Reserved
Bit #
Flu om ot
tor
on eM
x ize
Lim im
vV e
Sta
Dr Brak
Ec has
Vlt oltL
vP
Re
x x x x x x x x x x x 0 0 0 0 0 1 =Condition True
0 =Condition False
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 x =Reserved
Bit #
Figure 9.40 – Control Status
441 Mtr Tor Cur Ref

Range: -/+ 32767.0 Amps [0.1 Amps]
See also: 53
Displays the torque current reference value that is present at the output of
Current Rate Lim (154).
445 Ki Speed Loop
Range: 0.0 to 4000.0 [0.1]
FV Default: 7.8
Access: 2 Path: Speed Config>Speed Regulator
See also: 53, 449, 450
Controls the integral error gain of the speed regulator. The IPS Tempo
automatically adjusts Ki Speed Loop when a non-zero value is entered for
Speed Desired BW (449) or an autotune is performed. Typically, manual
adjustment of this parameter is needed only if system inertia cannot be
determined through an autotune. Speed Desired BW (449) is set to 0 when a
manual adjustment is made to this parameter.
446 Kp Speed Loop

Range: 0.0 to 200.0 [0.1]
FV Default: 6.3
See also: 53, 449, 450
Controls the proportional error gain of the speed regulator. The IPS Tempo
automatically adjusts Kp Speed Loop (446) when a non-zero value is entered
for Speed Desired BW (449) or an auto-tune is performed. Typically, manual
adjustment of this parameter is needed only if system inertia cannot be
determined through an autotune. Speed Desired BW (449) is set to 0 when a
manual adjustment is made to this parameter.
447 Kf Speed Loop
Range: 0.0 to 0.5 [0.1]
FV Default: 0.0
See also: 53
Controls the feed forward gain of the speed regulator. Setting of the Kf gain
greater than zero reduces speed feedback overshoot in response to a step change
in speed reference.
448 Spd Err Filt BW
Range: 0.0 to 2000.0 R/s
FV Default: 200.0 R/s
See also: 53
Sets the bandwidth of a speed error filter used in FVC Vector mode. Setting 0.0
disables the filter.
449 Speed Desired BW
Range: 0.0 to 250.0 Radian/sec [0.1 Radian/sec]
FV Default: 0.0 Radians/sec
See also: 53, 445, 446
Sets the speed loop bandwidth and determines the dynamic behavior of the
speed loop. As bandwidth increases, the speed loop becomes more responsive
and can track a faster changing speed reference.
Adjusting this parameter will cause the IPS Tempo to calculate and change Ki
Speed Loop (445) and Kp Speed Loop (447) gains.
450 Total Inertia
Range: 0.01 to 600.00 sec [0.01 sec]
FV Default: 0.10 secs
See also: 53, 445, 446, 449
Represents the time in seconds for a motor coupled to a load to accelerate from
zero to base speed at rated motor torque. The IPS Tempo calculates Total
Inertia during the autotune inertia procedure.
Adjusting this parameter will cause the IPS Tempo to calculate and change Ki
Speed Loop (445) and Kp Speed Loop (447) gains.
451 Speed Loop Meter

Range: -/+ 800.0% /Hz/RPM [0.1%/Hz/RPM]
See also: 53, 79, 121
Value of the speed regulator output. The value of Speed Units (79) determines
the units in which the parameter is displayed.
459 Process D-Time
Range: 0.00 to 100.00 secs [0.01 sec]
FV Default: 0.00 sec
See also:
Refer to the formula below:
PIOut = KD (Sec) x (dPI Error (%))/(dt (Sec))
464 Process Out Gain
Range: -/+ 8.000 [0.001]
Default: 1.000
See also: 138
Sets the gain factor for Process Output (138).
476 Scale1 ln Value
482 Scale2 ln Value
488 Scale3 ln Value
494 Scale4 ln Value
Range: -/+ 32767.0 [0.1] (Scale1 In Value and Scale2 In Value)
-/+ 32767.000 [0.001] (Scale3 In Value and Scale4 In Value)
Default: 0.0 (Scale1 In Value and Scale2 In Value)
0.000 (Scale3 In Value and Scale4 In Value)
Access: 2 Path: Utility>Scaled Blocks
See also:
Displays the value of the signal being sent to ScaleX ln Value using a link.
477 Scale1 ln Hi
483 Scale2 ln Hi
489 Scale3 ln Hi
495 Scale4 ln Hi
Range: -/+ 32767.0 [0.1] (Scale1 In Hi and Scale2 In Hi)
-/+ 32767.000 [0.001] (Scale3 In Hi and Scale4 In Hi)
Default: 0.0 (Scale1 In Hi and Scale2 In Hi)
0.000 (Scale3 In Hi and Scale4 In Hi)
See also:
Scales the upper value of ScaleX ln Value.
478 Scale1 ln Lo
484 Scale2 ln Lo
490 Scale3 ln Lo
496 Scale4 ln Lo
Range: -/+ 32767.0 [0.1] (Scale1 In Lo and Scale2 In Lo)
-/+ 32767.000 [0.001] (Scale3 In Lo and Scale4 In Lo)
Default: 0.0 (Scale1 In Lo and Scale2 In Lo)
0.000 (Scale3 In Lo and Scale4 In Lo)
See also:
Scales the lower value of ScaleX ln Value.
479 Scale1 Out Hi
485 Scale2 Out Hi
491 Scale3 Out Hi
497 Scale4 Out Hi
Range: -/+ 32767.0 [0.1] (Scale1 Out Hi and Scale2 Out Hi)
-/+ 32767.000 [0.001] (Scale3 Out Hi and Scale4 Out Hi)
Default: 0.0 (Scale1 Out Hi and Scale2 Out Hi)
0.000 (Scale3 Out Hi and Scale4 Out Hi)
See also:
Scales the upper value of ScaleX Out Value.
480 Scale1 Out Lo
486 Scale2 Out Lo
492 Scale3 Out Lo
498 Scale4 Out Lo
Range: -/+ 32767.0 [0.1] (Scale1 Out Lo and Scale2 Out Lo)
-/+ 32767.000 [0.001] (Scale3 Out Lo and Scale4 Out Lo)
Default: 0.0 (Scale1 Out Lo and Scale2 Out Lo)
0.000 (Scale3 Out Lo and Scale4 Out Lo)
See also:
Scales the lower value of ScaleX Out Value.
481 Scale1 Out Value
Range: 0.0 (Scale1 Out Value and Scale2 Out Value)
0.000 (Scale3 Out Value and Scale4 Out Value)
Default: 0.0 (Scale1 Out Value and Scale2 Out Value)
0.000 (Scale3 Out Value and Scale4 Out Value
See also:
Value of the signal being sent out of the Universal Scale Block. Typically this is
used as the source of information and will be linked to another parameter.
595 Port Mask Actv

Default: Read Only
Access: 2 Path: Communication>Security
See also:
tw 6
4
IP 3
ca 2
Ho l HIM
rity
Ne Port
DP ork
DP Port
DP Port
Lo ort
cu
st
I
I
I
DP
Se
0 x x x x x x x x 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 = Active
0 = Not Active
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x = Reserved
Bit #
Figure 9.41 – Port Mask Actv
Bits 0-5 indicate status for DPI port communication. Bit 15 indicates when
security software is controlling the parameter.
596 Write Mask Cfg
Default: 0 x 3E
See also:
tw 6
4
IP 3
ca 2
IM
rity
Ne Port
DP ork
DP Port
DP Port
Lo ort
lH
cu
I
I
DP
Se
0 x x x x x x x x 1 1 1 1 1 1 x 1 = Active
0 = Not Active
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x = Reserved
Bit #
Figure 9.42 – Write Mask Cfg
Enables/disables write access (parameters, links, etc.) for DPI ports. Changes to
this parameter only become effective when power is cycled, the drive is reset or
bit 15 of Write Mask Actv (597) transitions from 1 to 0.
597 Write Mask Actv
Default: Read Only
See also:
Status of write access for DPI ports. When bit 15 is set, network security is
controlling the write mask instead of Write Mask Cfg (596).
tw 6
4
IP 3
ca 2
IM
rity
Ne Port
DP ork
DP Port
DP Port
Lo ort
lH
cu
I
I
DP
Se
0 x x x x x x x x 1 1 1 1 1 1 x 1 = Active
0 = Not Active
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x = Reserved
Bit #
Figure 9.43 – Write Mask Actv
598 Logic Mask Actv

Default: Read Only
See also:
tw 6
4
IP 3
ca 2
Ho l HIM
rity
Ne Port
DP ork
DP Port
DP Port
Lo ort
cu
st
I
I
I
DP
Se
0 x x x x x x x x 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 = Active
0 = Not Active
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x = Reserved
Bit #
Figure 9.44 – Logic Mask Actv
Indicates status of the logic mask for DPI ports.
IPS Tempo Parameters

IPS Tempo Pump Condition Monitor Descriptions
Pump Power Monitor (PPM)

The PPM can be used while operating in either process control mode or speed
control mode to detect pump operation at power levels above or below
pre-determined normal levels. Abnormal levels may indicate operating
conditions that are harmful to the pump and/or the process such as:
• Dry running
• Low flow
• Changes in pumped fluid characteristics
• Blocked lines, filters, and/or heat exchangers
• Uncoupled pump
• Closed suction or discharge valves
• Overload conditions
• Excessive wear or rubbing
Pump Condition Monitor (PCM)

The PCM can be used to detect abnormal pump or process conditions by
monitoring the signal from a sensor connected to one of the IPS Tempo’s
analog input channels. The PCM can then initiate the appropriate action
selected from a list of available response actions. The PCM can be used while
operating in either process control mode or speed control mode. Examples of
monitored conditions include:
• Vibration
• Lube health
• Temperature
• Pressure
• Flow
Process Variable Monitor (PVM)

The PVM can be used while operating in process control mode to detect a
process no longer controllable within the set operating limits of the IPS Tempo.
This may be due to a change in process fluid or system characteristics, loss of
adequate suction, or equipment failure or wear.
Digital Input Monitors 4-6 (DIM4-6)

The DIM can be used in process control mode or speed control mode to detect
and respond to conditions or events that are indicated by discrete (On - Off)
switching devices such as:
• Limit switches
• Level switches
• Pressure switches
• Temperature switches
• Flow switches
• Relay contacts
Parameters
What the Symbol Means
Symbol Meaning
Parameter is specific to the IPS Tempo.
IPS
700 IPS Config

IPS
See also:
ab e
IPS or M p
En od
nit Sto
le
Mo out
e
Tim
x x x x x x x x x x x x x 1 0 0 x =Reserved
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit #
Figure 9.45 – IPS Config
Allows you to manually enable or disable the IPS Tempo functions. Its value
can be changed while the drive is running, unless Manual Override mode is
active.
Bit 0 - IPS Enable
0 = Off = All IPS Tempo monitors are turned Off.
1 = On = All IPS Tempo monitors are turned On.
Bit 1 - Monitor Mode
Specifies the operating mode of the monitor functions while Manual Override is active.
0 = Disabled = Disables all monitors.
1 = Enabled = Changes all monitors to “Message Only.”
Bit 2 - Timeout Stop
0 = Latch = Allows the IPS Tempo to continue to run in the override mode after the Process/Speed
Override retry limit is exceeded, even if the Auto Rstrt Tries (174) is set to “0”.
1 = Stop Drive = Stops the IPS Tempo after the Process/Speed Override retry limit is exceeded.
701 IPS Control Mode

Range: 0 = Speed
IPS
1 = Process
Default: 1 = Process
See also:
Determines the operating mode of the IPS Tempo. Its value can only be
changed while the drive is stopped.
702 IPS Start Delay

Range: 0.0 to 999.9 sec
IPS
Default: 30.0 sec
See also:
Specifies the length of time, after the IPS Tempo is started, before the IPS
Tempo features can become active. It allows the process being controlled to
stabilize before implementing fault or alarm conditions. Its value can only be
changed while the drive is stopped.
703 IPS Start Mode
Range: 0 = Not Used
IPS
1 = 2-wire
2 = 3-wire
Default: 2 = 3-wire
See also:
Allows you to select the type of terminal block signals with which to start the
IPS Tempo. It also causes the definitions of digital inputs 1 to 3 to be changed.
Its value can only be changed while the drive is stopped.
Table 9.11 – IPS Start Mode (703)
Not Used (0) 2-wire (1) 3-wire (2)

Digital In1 Sel (361) Not Used (0) Clear Faults (2) Stop - CF (4)
Digital In2 Sel (362) Not Used (0) Run (7) Start (4)
Digital In3 Sel (363) Not Used (0) Function Loss (3) Function Loss (3)
706 Motor Efficiency

Range: 25.0 to 100.0 [%]
Default: 100%
See also:
The percent of motor efficiency enables the estimation of power to the pump
based on Motor Efficiency (706). 100% will show power to the motor.
707 Energy Cost/kWHr
Range: -/+ 9999.99 $/kWHr
IPS
Default: 0.00 $/kWHr
See also: 729
Displays the local area’s energy cost in dollars per kiloWatt-Hour. The local
cost is used to calculate the Energy Saving (729).
708 Energy PwrRating
Range: 0.00 to 2999.99 HP or kW
IPS
Default: 0.00 HP
See also: 729, 707
Displays the nominal power rating. The Energy PwrRatings (708) and Energy
Cost/kWHr (707) are used to calculate Energy Savings (729).
711 Process Ref Unit

IPS
1 = GPM Flow [GPM Flow]
2 = m3/Hour Flow [m3/h]
12 = Ft Pressure [FtPr]
13 = m Pressure [m-Pr]
16 = RPM Speed [RPM]
17 = Hz Speed [Hz]
18 = PSI Level [PSI]
19 = Ft Level [FtLv]
20 = Inch Level [InLv]
21 = m Level [m-Lv]
22 = cm Level [cmLv]
See also:
Defines the process units that are used for a given analog input or process
reference.
712 Proc Ref Scaler
Range: 0.0 to 9999.9
IPS
Default: 100.0
See also:
Scales the process reference inputs.
720 IPS Status
IPS
Default: Read Only
Access: 2 Path: IPS Config>IPS Status
See also:
ab e
DIM 5 Trig we
PR ver de
IPS Ove de
PC Trig er
En rid
PV rig r
M ive
led
PP Trig er
DIM rig r
DIM Act r
DIM5 Ac e
PC Act e
M T ge
PP Act e
Ma Act e
Sp Ove e
M T ge
6 ge
g
d O rri
g
iv
4 v
ri
M iv
M iv
n iv
M g
r
i
DIM Trig
PV Act
6
C
DIM
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 =Condition True
0 =Condition False
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x =Reserved
Bit #
Figure 9.46 – IPS Status (720)
Displays the status of all monitors in the IPS Tempo.
721 PPM Status

IPS
Default: Read Only
See also:
Hi vr A m
Lo n Tim rm
Ou La er
Hi rigge ve
Lo ff Tim er
cti l
Ou ff Tim r
Lo t Ac h
On er
Mn o Le l
trA ve
dO lr
ve
tp tc
l
Hi Tim
T ti
Tri r
GT i Lev
Sp OvrA
H r
GT gge
tpt
O
L
c
O
Pro
x x x 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 =Condition True
0 =Condition False
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x =Reserved
Bit #
Figure 9.47 – PPM Status (721)
Displays the current operating state of the PPM.
Table 9.12 – PPM Status Bit Descriptions
Bit Number Bit Name Bit Description

0 MntrActive PPM is active
1 GT Lo Level Power is greater than the specified low level
2 GT Hi Level Power is greater than the specified high level
3 Hi Trigger Power is out of range for longer than the limit specified in PPM
HiLimit Time (753)
4 Lo Trigger Power is out of range for longer than PPM LoLimit Time (754)
5 Outpt Active PPM output asserted
6 Outpt Latch PPM output is not auto-resettable
7 Lo Off Timer PPM low timer is active and power is above the low limit
8 Hi Off Timer PPM high timer is active and power is below the high limit
9 Lo On Timer PPM low timer is active and power is below the low limit
10 Hi On Timer PPM high timer is active and power is above the high limit
11 SpdOvr Alrm Speed Override mode is initiated by PPM
12 ProcOvr Alrm Process Override mode is initiated by PPM
722 PPM Hi Calc

723 PPM Lo Calc
Range: 0.00 to 2999.99 [0.01 HP or 0.01 kw]
IPS
Default: Read Only
See also:
Display the current values of the high and low power limits that are calculated
by the IPS Tempo for the Power Monitor. The value of Mtr NP Pwr Units (46)
determines the units in which the parameters are displayed.
724 PCM Status

725 PVM Status
726 DIM4 Status
727 DIM5 Status
728 DIM6 Status
IPS
Default: Read Only
Access: 2 Path: IPS Status>IPS Setup
See also:
Sp vrA le
Hi Ovr A rm
m
Ou La er
Hi rigge ve
cO sab
Lo ff Tim er
cti l
Ou ff Tim r
Lo t Ac h
Hi n Tim r
Mn o Le l
trA ve
On lr
e
O ime
ve
tp tc
l
T ti
Tri r
GT i Lev
H r
Pro reDi
GT gge
T
tpt
O
L
a
O
d
Sh
Lo
x x x 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 =Condition True
0 =Condition False
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x =Reserved
Bit # 1
Bit 13 is not used for PCM Status (724) and PVM Status (725)
Figure 9.48 – PCM Status (724), PVM Status (725), and DIM4-6 Status (726-728) Parameters
Displays the current operating state of the Pump Condition Monitor (PCM),
Process Variable Monitor (PVM), Digital Input Monitor 4 (DIM4), Digital
Input Monitor 5 (DIM5), and Digital Input Monitor 6 (DIM6).
Table 9.13 – PCM, PVM and DIM4-6 Status Bit Descriptions
Bit Number Bit Name Bit Description

0 MntrActive Monitor is active
1 GT Lo Level Monitor signal is greater than the specified low level
2 GT Hi Level Monitor signal is greater than the specified high level
3 Hi Trigger Monitor signal is out of range for longer than the high time
4 Lo Trigger Monitor signal is out of range for longer than the low time
5 Outpt Active Monitor output asserted
6 Outpt Latch Monitor output is not auto-resettable
7 Lo Off Timer Monitor low timer is active and signal is above the low limit
8 Hi Off Timer PPM high timer is active and signal is below the high limit
9 Lo On Timer PPM low timer is active and signal is below the low limit
10 Hi On Timer PPM high timer is active and signal is above the high limit
11 SpdOvr Alrm Speed Override mode is initiated by the monitor
12 ProcOvr Alrm Process Override mode is initiated by the monitor
13 ShareDisable Digital input sharing with the DIM disabled
729 Energy Savings

Range: - 21474835.20 to 21474835.20 $/Hr
IPS
Default: Read Only
See also:
Calculates the savings of the IPS Tempo operation compared to a constant
speed pump. Its value is only updated when the drive is running. The following
equation is used to calculate the instantaneous savings ($/Hr):
Energy Savings (729) ($/Hr) = Energy Cost/kWHr (707) ($/kWHr) x [Energy
PwrRating (708) (kW) - Output Power (7) (kW)]
730 Shaft Power Out

Range: 0.0 to 2400.0 [HP or kW]
IPS
Default: Read Only
See also:
Calculates the power at the motor shaft based on the specified Motor Efficiency
(50). The value of Mtr NP Pwr Units (46) determines the units in which the
parameter is displayed. The following equation is used to calculate the power:
Shaft Power Out (730) = Motor Efficiency (50) x Output Power (7)
741 Process Ref 1
742 Process Ref 2
743 Process Ref 3
744 Process Ref 4
745 Process Ref 5
746 Process Ref 6
Range: 0.0 to 9999.9 [%]
IPS
Access: Refer to table 9.11 Path: Process Config>Process Ref
See also: 79
Provides an internal fixed process command value. The value of Process Ref
Unit (79) determines the units in which the parameter is displayed.
Table 9.14 – Default Values for Process Refs 1-6
Parameter No. Parameter Name Default Access

741 Process Ref 1 10% 0
747 Prc Override Ref

Range: 0.0 to 9999.9 [%]
IPS
Default: 50.0%
See also:
Used as the process reference while the Process Override mode is active.
750 PPM Speed
Range: 10% Maximum Speed (82) - Maximum Speed (82) [0.1 Hz or 0.1 RPM]
IPS
Default: 60.0 Hz
1800.0 RPM
Access: 2 Path: IPS Config>Power Monitor
See also: 751, 752, 761
Pump speed at power levels entered into PPM Hi Level (751) and PPM Lo
Level (752).
751 PPM Hi Level

Range: 0.01 - 999.00 [0.1 kW or 0.1 HP]
IPS
Default: Motor NP Power (45)
See also:
Sets the maximum operating power (at the speed defined by PPM Speed (750))
before an action is taken by the Pump Power Monitor (PPM).
752 PPM Lo Level
Range: 0.01 - 999.00 [0.01 kW or 0.01 HP]
IPS
Default: 0.01 kW or HP
See also:
Sets the minimum operating power (at the speed defined by PPM Speed (750))
before an action is taken by the PPM.
753 PPM HiLimit Time
Range: 0.0 to 600.0 Sec
IPS
Default: 30.0 Sec
See also:
Sets the maximum time that the process can be equal to or above PPM Hi Level
(751) before the selected action is initiated. Power must also be below the PPM
Hi Level (751) for this time period before the high limit condition is auto-reset.
754 PPM LoLimit Time
IPS
Default: 30.0 Sec
See also:
Sets the maximum time that the process can be equal to or below PPM Lo Level
(752) before the selected action is initiated. Power must also be above the PPM
Lo Level (752) for this time period before the low limit condition is auto-reset.
757 PPM Start Delay
IPS
Default: 30.0 Sec
See also:
Sets the length of time the IPS Tempo waits after a Start command before the
PPM is activated. PPM Start Delay (757) is completely independent of and
executes in parallel with IPS Start Delay (702).
Important: PPM limits are disabled during this time.
758 PPM Response

Range: 0 = No Action
IPS
1 = Message Only
2 = Pump Shutdown
3 = Speed Override
4 = Process Override
Default: 0 = No Action
See also:
Selects the action that the PPM takes when an out of limit event occurs.
Important: Depending on your override reference (Spd Override Ref (107)

and Prc Override Ref (747)), if you select “Speed Override” or
“Process Override,” your pump may change speeds.
761 PPM Limits
Range: 0 = Static
IPS
1 = Dynamic
Default: 0 = Static
See also:
Selects whether to allow or prevent the dynamic scaling of the PPM limits
based on affinity laws.
0 = Static = Power limits are fixed values and are not dynamically scaled
1 = Dynamic = Power limits are dynamically calculated based on the IPS Tempo speed (using pump
Affinity Laws)
770 PCM Mode
Range: 0 = Boundary
IPS
1 = Level
Default: 1 = Level
Access: 2 Path: IPS Config>ConditionMonitor
See also:
Sets the PCM operation mode.
The Boundary mode is used to check if a source value is within the range of a
high and low threshold. When the source value is outside of this range, status
bits are updated to indicate this condition.
The Level mode is used to check if a source value has risen above or fallen
below the of threshold levels. Instead of a boundary range, the threshold high
and low values represent a Level 1 and Level 2 threshold.
771 PCM Source
Range: 0 = Anlg1 Value
IPS
1 = Anlg2 Value
2 = Scale Block1
3 = Scale Block2
4= Scale Block 3
5 = Scale Block4
Default: 1= Anlg2 Value
See also:
Selects the source of the signal that the PCM checks.
772 PCM Level 1/Min

Range: -/+ 9999.99
IPS
Default: 0.12 ips
See also:
Specifies the minimum PCM limits in Boundary mode and Level 1 limit in
Level mode.
773 PCM Level 2/Max
Range: -/+ 9999.9 ips
IPS
Default: 0.25 ips
See also:
Specifies the maximum PCM limits in Boundary mode and Level 2 limit in
Level mode.
774 PCM Lvl 1 Action
775 PCM Lvl 2 Action
IPS
1 = Message Only
2 = Pump Shutdown
3 = Speed Override
See also:
Selects the action that the PCM takes when an out of limit event occurs. PCM
Lvl Action (774) defines the action for the PCM when the source is below PCM
Level 1/Min (772) in boundary mode or above PCM Level 1/Min (772) in level
mode. PCM Lvl 2 Action (775) defines the action for the PCM when the source
is above PCM Level 2/Max (773) in boundary mode or above PCM Level
2/Max in level mode.

776 PCM Level 1 Time
777 PCM Level 2 Time
Range: 0.0 to 600.0 Secs
IPS
Default: 5.0 Secs
See also:
Sets the time that the source value for the PCM can be in and out of limit
condition before the programmed action is initiated. PCM Level 1 Time (776)
defines the time delay for the PCM Lvl 1 Action (774) when the source is
below PCM Level 1/Min (772) in boundary mode or above PCM Level 1/Min
(722) in level mode. PCM Level 2 Time (777) defines the time delay for the
PCM Lvl 2 Action (775) when the source is above PCM Level 2/Max (773) in
boundary mode or above PCM Level 2/Max (773) in level mode. If the source
value returns to a normal value before this time, no action is taken.
778 PCM Off Time

IPS
Default: 5.0 Secs
See also:
Specifies the amount of time (for either threshold) that must elapse before the
out of range condition is considered reset.
780 PVM Response
IPS
1 = Message Only
2 = Pump Shutdown
3 = Speed Override
Access: 2 Path: IPS Config>Process Monitor
See also:
Sets the action that the PVM takes when an out of limit event occurs.

781 PVM Threshold
Range: 0.0 to 100.0 [%]
IPS
Default: 5%
See also:
Specifies the positive and negative threshold the process variable being
monitored must remain within before the PVM triggers the specified action.
782 PVM On Time
Range: 0.0 to 600.0 [Secs]
IPS
Default: 5.0 Secs
See also:
Sets the amount of time the process variable being monitored must be outside
the threshold value before the PVM triggers the specified action.
783 PVM Off Time
Range: 0.0 to 600.0 [Secs]
IPS
Default: 5.0 Secs
See also:
Sets the amount of time the process variable being monitored must be inside the
threshold value before the PVM triggers the specified action.
790 DIM Config

IPS
Access: 2 Path: IPS Config>DigInput Monitor
See also:
DIM Sh ed
DIM Inve ed
DIM4 Sha ed
rt
4 I rt
ert
r
6 r
ar
DIM Inve
DIM Sha
nv
6
5
5
DIM
x x x x x x x x x x 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 =Inverted
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 =Not Inverted
x =Reserved
Bit #
Figure 9.49 – DIM Config
Bits 0, 1, and 2 (one for each Digital Input monitor) are used to individually
invert its operation.
Bits 3, 4, and 5 (one for each Digital Input monitor) are used to enable/disable
shared operation with a defined digital input function.
791 DIM 4 Response
IPS
1 = Message Only
2 = Pump Shutdown
3 = Speed Override
See also:
Sets the action that the DIM 4 takes when an out of limit event occurs.

792 DIM 4 On Time
793 DIM 4 Off Time
IPS
Default: 5.0 Secs
See also:
Specify the amount of time required to activate (On Time) or deactivate (Off
Time) the DIM 4.
794 DIM 5 Response

IPS
1 = Message Only
2 = Pump Shutdown
3 = Speed Override
See also:
795 DIM 5 On Time
796 DIM 5 Off Time
IPS
Default: 5.0 Secs
See also:
Time) the DIM 5.
797 DIM 6 Response
IPS
1 = Message Only
2 = Pump Shutdown
3 = Speed Override
See also:
798 DIM 5 On Time
799 DIM 5 Off Time
IPS
Default: 5.0 Secs
See also:
Time) the DIM 6.
800 MPS Enable

Range: 0 = Off
IPS
1 = On
Default: 0 = Off
Access: 2 Path: IPS Config>Auto Set Adj Mon
See also:
Enables or disables the Multi-point Scale Block reference function (Auto
Setpoint Adjustment Monitor (ASAM).
801 MPS Config
IPS
See also:
rcR fEn
n
efE
S P dRe
MP Sp
S
MP
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 1 1 1 =Enabled
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 =Disabled
x =Reserved
Bit #
Figure 9.50 – MPS Config
Sets the type of reference (Process and/or Speed) that is scaled

by the Multi-point Scale Block (Auto Setpoint Adjustment Monitor (ASAM)).
802 MPS Input Value
803 MPS Output Value
Range: 0.00 to 300.00 [%]
IPS
Default: Read Only
See also:
Indicates the present input value that the MPS uses and the resulting output
value.
804 MPS Input 1

806 MPS Input 2
808 MPS Input 3
810 MPS Input 4
812 MPS Input 5
814 MPS Input 6
816 MPS Input 7
818 MPS Input 8
820 MPS Input 9
822 MPS Input 10
Range: 0.00 to 100.00
IPS
Default: See Table 9.13
See also: 701
Specify the profile (conversion of input values to output values) for the selected
process reference or speed reference, which is determined by IPS Control Mode
(701).
Table 9.15 – MPS Input Default Values
Parameter Name Parameter Number Default Value

MPS Input 1 804 10%
MPS Input 2 806 20%
MPS Input 3 808 30%
MPS Input 4 810 40%
MPS Input 5 812 50%
MPS Input 6 814 60%
MPS Input 7 816 70%
MPS Input 8 818 80%
MPS Input 9 820 90%
MPS Input 10 822 100%
805 MPS Output 1

807 MPS Output 2
809 MPS Output 3
811 MPS Output 4
813 MPS Output 5
815 MPS Output 6
817 MPS Output 7
819 MPS Output 8
821 MPS Output 9
823 MPS Output 10
Range: 0.00 to 150.00
IPS
Default: See Table 9.14
See also:
Specify the profile (conversion of input values to output values) for the selected
process reference or speed reference, which is determined by IPS Control Mode
(701).
Table 9.16 – MPS Output Default Values
Parameter Name Parameter Number Default Value

MPS Output 1 805 10%
850 Alarm 1 Time

851 Alarm 2 Time
852 Alarm 3 Time
853 Alarm 4 Time
854 Alarm 5 Time
855 Alarm 6 Time
856 Alarm 7 Time
857 Alarm 8 Time
Range: 0.0 to 214748352.0
IPS
Default: Read Only
See also:
Display the current elapsed time when an alarm or process fault occurs. These
parameters are not saved through a power cycle.
Notes
Chapter 10
Troubleshooting the IPS Tempo

The IPS Tempo provides the following ways to determine the status of the IPS
Tempo and to troubleshoot problems that may occur:
• LEDs on the front of the IPS Tempo
• User-configurable and non-configurable alarms
• User-configurable and non-configurable faults
• Entries in the fault queue
• IPS Tempo status parameters
Verifying that DC Bus

Capacitors are Discharged
The IPS Tempo’s DC bus capacitors retain hazardous voltages after input
power has been disconnected. Perform the following steps before touching any
internal components.
1. Turn off the circuit breaker and lock out input power. Wait 5 minutes.
2. Open the IPS Tempo’s cover.
3. Verify that there is no voltage at the IPS Tempo’s input power terminals.
4. Measure the DC bus potential with a voltmeter while standing on a
non-conductive surface and wearing insulated gloves. Refer to Figure 5.2.
5. Once the IPS Tempo has been serviced, reattach the IPS Tempo’s cover.
6. Reapply input power.
10-2 Troubleshooting the IPS Tempo
Determining IPS Tempo

Status Using the Status
LEDs ➊ POWER
POWER
STS
STS
ESC
PROG
™
SEL
➋ ESC
PROG
™
SEL
AUTO
7 8 9 MAN DISP
AUTO
7 8 9 MAN DISP
4 5 6 JOG
4 5 6 JOG
1 2 3
1 2 3
. 0 +/-
. 0 +/-
PORT
PORT
MOD
MOD
NET A
NET A
NET B
NET B
CAUTION
CAUTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns
Figure 10.1 – Typical Location of Status LED’s
Table 10.1 – Status LED Definitions
Number Name Color State Description

➊ PWR Green Steady Power is applied to the IPS Tempo.
(Power)
➋ STS Green Steady IPS Tempo running; no faults are present.
(Status) Flashing IPS Tempo ready but not running; no faults are present.
Yellow Steady, A continuous type 1 alarm condition exists. Check Drive
IPS Tempo Running Alarm 1 (29).
Flashing, A start inhibit condition exists and the IPS Tempo cannot
IPS Tempo Stopped be started.
Check Start Inhibits (214).
Flashing, An intermittent type 1 alarm condition is occurring.
IPS Tempo Running Check Drive Alarm 1 (29).
Red Steady A non-resettable fault has occurred.
Flashing Fault has occurred. Check Fault x Code or Fault Queue.
➌ PORT Green - Status of DPI Port internal communications (if present).
MOD Yellow - Status of communications module (when installed).
NET A Red - Status of network (if connected).
NET B Red - Status of secondary network
(if connected).
Troubleshooting the IPS Tempo 10-3
IPS Tempo HIM Status Line The IPS Monitors (Digital Input 4 Monitor (DIM4), Digital Input 5 Monitor
Messages (DIM5), Digital Input 6 Monitor (DIM6), Pump Condition Monitors (PCM),
Pump Power Monitor (PPM), and Process Variable Monitor (PVM)) generate
the following messages. They are displayed on the Status Line of the HIM, but
they are not logged into the fault queue.
Table 10.2 – IPS Tempo HIM Status Line Messages
Message Description
DIM4 Hi PrcOv An alternative process variable setpoint is currently in use; conditions exist above the
specified range of the DIM4
DIM4 Lo PrcOv An alternative process variable setpoint is currently in use; conditions exist below the
specified range of the DIM4
DIM4 Hi Shtdn Conditions above the specified range of the monitor have caused the DIM4 to stop the IPS
Tempo
DIM4 Lo Shtdn Conditions below the specified range of the monitor have caused the DIM4 to stop the IPS
Tempo
DIM4 Hi SpdOv When in Speed Mode at the preset RPM, current conditions are above the specified range
of the DIM4
DIM4 Lo SpdOv When in Speed Mode at the preset RPM, current conditions are above the specified range
of the DIM4
DIM4 Hi Warn1 Current conditions are above the specified range of the DIM4
DIM4 Lo Warn1 Current conditions are below the specified range of the DIM4
DIM5 Hi PrcOv An alternative DIM5 setpoint is currently in use; conditions exist above the specified range
of the DIM5
DIM5 Lo PrcOv An alternative DIM5 setpoint is currently in use; conditions exist below the specified range
of the DIM5
Tempo
Tempo
of the DIM5
DIM5 Lo SpdOv When in Speed Mode at the preset RPM, current conditions are below the specified range
of the DIM5
DIM6 Hi PrcOv An alternative DIM6 setpoint is currently in use; conditions exist above the specified range
of the DIM6
DIM6 Lo PrcOv An alternative DIM6 setpoint is currently in use; conditions exist below the specified range
of the DIM6
Tempo
Tempo
of the DIM6
DIM6 Lo SpdOv When in Speed Mode at the preset RPM, current conditions are below the specified range
of the DIM6
PCM Hi PrcOv An alternative PCM setpoint is currently in use; the monitored condition is above “Level 2”
(Level) or “Max” (Boundary)
PCM Lo PrcOv An alternative PCM setpoint is currently in use; the monitored condition is above “Level 1”
(Level) or below “Min” (Boundary)
PCM Hi Shtdn Conditions above the specified range of the monitor have caused the PCM to stop the IPS
Tempo
PCM Lo Shtdn Conditions below the specified range of the monitor have caused the PCM to stop the IPS
Tempo
Table 10.2 – IPS Tempo HIM Status Line Messages
Message Description
PCM Hi SpdOv When in Speed Mode at the preset RPM, current conditions are above “Level 2” (Level) or
“Max” (Boundary)
PCM Lo SpdOv When in Speed Mode at the preset RPM, current conditions are above “Level 1” (Level) or
below “Min” (Boundary)
PCM Hi Warn1 The monitored condition is above “Level 2” (Level) or “Max” (Boundary)
PCM Lo Warn1 The monitored condition is above “Level 1” (Level) or below “Min” (Boundary)
PPM Hi PrcOv An alternative PPM setpoint is currently in use; power is too high.
PPM Lo PrcOv An alternative PPM setpoint is currently in use; power is too low
PPM Hi Shtdn Conditions above the specified range of the monitor have caused the PPM to stop the IPS
Tempo
PPM Lo Shtdn Conditions below the specified range of the monitor have caused the PPM to stop the IPS
Tempo
PPM Hi SpdOv When in Speed Mode at the preset RPM, power is too high
PPM Lo SpdOv When in Speed Mode at the preset RPM, power is too low
PPM Hi Warn1 Current conditions are above the specified range of the PPM; power is too high
PPM Lo Warn1 Current conditions are below the specified range of the PPM; power is too low
PVM Hi PrcOv An alternative process variable setpoint is currently in use; the initial setpoint was not
attainable at the specified maximum RPM
PVM Lo PrcOv An alternative process variable setpoint is currently in use; the initial setpoint was not
attainable at the specified minimum RPM
PVM Hi Shtdn Conditions above the specified range of the monitor have caused the PVM to stop the IPS
Tempo
PVM Lo Shtdn Conditions below the specified range of the monitor have caused the PVM to stop the IPS
Tempo
PVM Hi SpdOv When in Speed Mode at the preset RPM, the initial setpoint was not attainable at the
specified maximum RPM
PVM Lo SpdOv When in Speed Mode at the preset RPM, the initial setpoint was not attainable at the
specified minimum RPM
PVM Hi Warn1 Current condition are above the specified range of the PVM
PVM Lo Warn1 Current conditions are below the specified range of the PVM
1
These HIM Status Line messages are “Message Only.” They appear on the status line while the condition they
are warning against is active, but they do not cause an alarm or fault. When DIM4-6 Response (791, 794, 797,
respectively), PCM Level 1 and Level 2 Action (774 and 775, respectively), PPM Response (758), and PVM
Response (780) are set to “Message Only,” this type of message is displayed. Refer to Chapter 9, Parameter
Descriptions, for more information.
Determining Precharge The precharge board LEDs are located above the Line Type jumper shown in
Board Status (Frames 5 & 6 Figure 10.2.
Only)
3
3
3
1-PH 3-PH
LINE TYPE
JP1 JP2 JP3
3-PH 1-PH
LINE
Precharge TYPE
Board
SPARE 1
SPARE 2
Figure 10.2 – Location of Precharge Status LED (Frame 5 Shown)
Table 10.3 – Precharge Board LED Indicators
Name Color State Description

Power Green Steady Indicates precharge board power supply is operational.
Alarm Yellow Flashing Number in “[ ]” indicates flashes and associated alarm1.
[1] Low line voltage (<90%).
[2] Very low line voltage (<50%).
[3] Low phase (one phase <80% of line voltage).
[4] Frequency out of range or asymmetry (line sync failed).
[5] Low DC bus voltage (triggers ride-through operation).
[6] Input Frequency momentarily out of range (40-65 Hz).
[7] DC bus short circuit detection active.
Fault Red Flashing Number in “[ ]” indicates flashes and associated fault2.
[2] DC bus short (Udc <2% after 20 ms).
[4] Line sync failed or low line (Uac<50% Unom).
1. An alarm condition automatically resets when the condition no longer exists.
2. An fault indicates a malfunction that must be corrected and can only be reset after cycling power.
About Alarms Alarms indicate conditions that may affect IPS Tempo operation or application
performance.
Alarms are automatically cleared when the condition that caused the alarm is
no longer present.
There are three alarm types, as described below.
Table 10.4 – Types of Alarms
Type Alarm Description

➀ User-Configurable These alarms alert the operator of conditions that, if left untreated,
may lead to a fault condition. The IPS Tempo continues to operate
during the alarm condition.
The alarms are enabled or disabled using Alarm Config 1 (259).
The status of these alarms is shown in Drive Alarm 1 (29).
➁ Non-Configurable These alarms alert the operator of conditions caused by improper
programming and prevent the IPS Tempo from starting until the
problem is resolved.
These alarms are always enabled.
The status of these alarms is shown in Drive Alarm 2 (212).
➂ IPS Tempo This type of alarm is specific to the IPS Tempo. Each monitor will have
the capability to cause an alarm (also know as a process fault), which
will be displayed on the Status Line of the HIM. IPS Tempo alarms
behave like typical type 1 faults.
The IPS Tempo indicates alarm conditions in the following ways:

• Ready LED on the IPS Tempo cover (refer to Figure 10.1).
• Alarm name on the LCD HIM. The alarm is displayed as long as the
condition exists. The IPS Tempo automatically clears the alarm when the
condition causing it is removed.
• Alarm status parameters. Two 16-bit parameters, Drive Alarm 1 (29) and
Drive Alarm 2 (212), indicate the status of type 1 and type 2 alarms,
respectively. Refer to chapter 9 for the parameter descriptions.
Alarm Descriptions
Table 10.5 – Alarm Descriptions
Type
No.
Alarm Description
Analog In 5 ➀ An analog input is configured for alarm on signal loss and signal loss has occurred.
Loss
Bipolar 20 ➁ Bidirectional operation is not permitted. One or more of the following digital input functions
Conflict is configured: “Fwd/Reverse,” “Run Forward,” “Run Reverse,” “Jog Forward” or “Jog
Reverse.”
Decel Inhibit 10 ➀ IPS Tempo is being inhibited from decelerating.
Dig In 17 ➁ Digital input functions are in conflict. Combinations marked with a will cause an alarm.
ConflictA
Acc2 / Fwd /
Accel 2 Decel 2 Jog Jog Fwd Jog Rev
Dec2 Rev
Acc2 / Dec2
Accel 2
Decel 2
Jog
Jog Fwd
Jog Rev
Fwd / Rev
Dig In 18 ➁ Digital input functions are in conflict. Combinations marked with a will cause an alarm.
ConflictB
Stop– Run Run Jog Jog Fwd/
Start Run Jog
CF Fwd Rev Fwd Rev Rev
Start
Stop–CF
Run
Run Fwd
Run Rev
Jog
Jog Fwd
Jog Rev
Fwd / Rev
Dig In 19 ➁ More than one physical input has been configured to the same input function. Multiple
ConflictC configurations are not allowed for the following input functions:
Forward/Reverse Run Reverse Bus Regulation Mode B
Speed Select 1 Jog Forward Acc2 / Dec2
Speed Select 2 Jog Reverse Accel 2
Speed Select 3 Run Decel 2
Run Forward Stop Mode B
DIM4 Prc 63 ➀ “DIM4 Hi PrcOv” = An alternative process variable setpoint is currently in use; conditions
Override ➂ exist above the specified range of the DIM4.
“DIM4 Lo PrcOv” = An alternative process variable setpoint is currently in use; conditions
exist below the specified range of the DIM4.
DIM4 Spd 62 ➀ “DIM4 Hi SpdOv” = When in Speed Mode at the preset RPM, current conditions are above
Override the specified range of the DIM4.
➂
“DIM4 Lo SpdOv” = When in Speed Mode at the preset RPM, current conditions are below
the specified range of the DIM4.
Override exist above the specified range of the DIM5.
➂
Type
No.
Alarm Description
➂
“DIM5 Lo SpdOv” = When in Speed Mode at the preset RPM, current conditions are below
Override exist above the specified range of the DIM6.
➂
➂
“DIM6 Hi SpdOv” = When in Speed Mode at the preset RPM, current conditions are below
Drive OL 8 ➀ The calculated IGBT temperature requires a reduction in PWM carrier frequency. If IPS
Level 1 Tempo OL Mode (150) is disabled and the load is not reduced, an overload fault will
eventually occur.
Drive OL 9 ➀ The calculated IGBT temperature requires a reduction in Current Limit. If IPS Tempo OL
Level 2 Mode (150) is disabled and the load is not reduced, an overload fault will eventually occur.
Flux Amps 26 ➁ The calculated or measured Flux Amps value is not within the expected range. Verify motor
Ref Rang data and rerun motor tests.
Ground 15 ➀ Ground current has exceeded the level set in Gnd Warn Level (177).
Warn
Home Not 34 ➀ Configurable alarm set in parameter 259, bit 17. When set to “1”, this alarm is displayed
Set when any of the following occur:
• parameter 88 is set to “7” (Pos/Spd Prof)
• on power up and parameter 88 = “7”
• recall user sets and parameter 88 = “7”
Alarm is cleared when:
• setting parameter 88 to a value other than “7”
• reset defaults
• parameter 259, bit 17 is cleared
• a digital input is configured as “Set Home” and input is True
• parameter 705, bit 9 is “Enabled”
• parameter 700, bit 13 (At Home) is “Enabled” - position regulator will set this bit if device
is “home”
ln Phase 13 ➀ The DC bus ripple has exceeded the level set in Phase Loss Level (545).
Loss
IR Volts 25 ➁ The IPS Tempo autotuning default is Calculate and the value calculated for IR Drop Volts is
Range not in the range of acceptable values. This alarm should clear when all motor nameplate
data is properly entered.
Ixo Vlt Rang 28 ➁ Motor leakage inductance is out of range.
Load Loss 14 Output torque current is below Load Loss Level (187) for a time period greater than Load
Loss Time (188).
MaxFreq 23 ➁ The sum of Maximum Speed (82) and Overspeed Limit (83) exceeds Maximum Freq (55).
Conflict Raise Maximum Freq (55) or lower Maximum Speed (82) and/or Overspeed Limit (83) so
that the sum is less than or equal to Maximum Freq (55).
Motor 12 The value at the thermistor terminals have been exceeded.
Thermistor
Motor Type 21 ➁ Motor Type (90) has been set to Sync PM or Sync Reluc, and one or more of the following
Cflct exist:
• Torque Perf Mode = “Sensrls Vect,” “SV Economizer” or “Fan/Pmp V/Hz.”
• Flux Up Time is greater than 0.0 secs.
• Speed Mode is set to “Slip Comp.”
• Autotune = “Static Tune” or “Rotate Tune.”
Type
No.
Alarm Description
NP Hz 22 ➁ Fan/pump mode is selected in Torq Perf Mode (53), and the ratio of Motor NP Hertz (43) to
Conflict Maximum Freq (55) is greater than 26.
PCM Prc 59 ➀ “PCM Hi PrcOv” = An alternative PCM setpoint is currently in use; the monitored condition
Override is above “Level 2” (Level) or “Max” (Boundary).
➂
“PCM Lo PrcOv” = An alternative PCM setpoint is currently in use; the monitored condition
is above “Level 1” (Level) or below “Min” (Boundary).
PCM Spd 58 ➀ “PCM Hi SpdOv” = When in Speed Mode at the preset RPM, current conditions are above
Override “Level 2” (Level) or “Max” (Boundary).
➂
“PCM Lo SpdOv” = When in Speed Mode at the preset RPM, current conditions are above
“Level 1” (Level) or below “Min” (Boundary).
Power Loss 3 ➀ IPS Tempo has sensed a power line loss.
PPM Prc 57 ➀ “PPM Hi PrcOv” = An alternative PPM setpoint is currently in use; power is too high.
Override ➂ “PPM Lo PrcOv” = An alternative PPM setpoint is currently in use; power is too low.
PPM Spd 56 ➀ “PPM Hi SpdOv” = When in Speed Mode at the preset RPM, power is too high.
Override ➂ “PPM Lo SpdOv” = When in Speed Mode at the preset RPM, power is too low.
Precharge 1 ➀ IPS Tempo is in the initial DC bus precharge state.
Actv
PTC Conflict 31 ➁ PTC is enabled for Analog ln 1, which is configured as a 0-20 mA current source in Anlg ln
Config (320).
PVM Prc 61 ➀ “PVM Hi PrcOv” = An alternative process variable setpoint is currently in use; the initial
Override ➂ setpoint was not attainable at the specified maximum RPM.
“PVM Lo PrcOv” = An alternative process variable setpoint is currently in use; the initial
setpoint was not attainable at the specified maximum RPM.
PVM Spd 60 ➀ “PVM Hi SpdOv” = When in Speed Mode at the preset RPM, the initial setpoint was not
Override attainable at the specified maximum RPM.
➂
“PVM Lo Spd Ov” = When in Speed Mode at the preset RPM, the initial setpoint was not
attainable at the specified minimum RPM.
Sleep Config 29 ➁ Sleep/Wake configuration error. With Sleep-Wake Mode (178) = Direct, possible causes
include: IPS Tempo is stopped and Wake Level < Sleep Level. “Stop=CF”, “Run,” “Run
Forward” and “Run Reverse” is not configured in Digital lnx Sel.
Speed Ref 27 ➁ Speed Ref x Sel or Process Ref Sel is set to “Reserved.”
Cflct
Start At 4 ➀ Start At Powerup (168) is enabled. IPS Tempo may start at any time within 10 seconds of
Powerup IPS Tempo powerup.
TB Man Ref 30 ➁ Occurs when:
Cflct “Auto/Manual” is selected (default) for Digital ln3 Sel (363) and TB Man Ref Sel (96) has
been reprogrammed.
No other use for the selected analog input may be programmed.
Example: If TB Man Ref Sel is reprogrammed to “Analog ln 2,” all of the factory default uses
for “Analog ln 2” must be reprogrammed.
To correct:
Verify/reprogram the parameters that reference an analog input or Reprogram Digital ln3 to
another function or “Unused.”
TorqProve 49 ➁ When TorqProve Cnfg is enabled, Motor CntlSel, Speed FB Select, and Motor Fdbk Type
Cflct must be properly set.
Under- 2 ➀ The bus voltage has dropped below a predetermined value.
Voltage
VHz Neg 24 ➁ Custom V/Hz mode has been selected in Torq Perf Mode (53) and the V/Hz slope is
Slope negative.
Waking 11 ➀ The Wake timer is counting toward a value that will start the IPS Tempo.
Table 10.6 – Alarm Names Cross-Referenced by Alarm Numbers
No. 1 Alarm No.1 Alarm No. 2 Alarm

1 Precharge Active 18 Dig ln ConflictB 32 Brake Slipped
2 UnderVoltage 19 Dig ln ConflictC 49 Torq Prove Cflct
3 Power Loss 20 Bipolar Conflict 56 PPM Spd Override
4 Start At PowerUp 21 Motor Type Conflict 57 PPM Prc Override
5 Analog In Loss 22 NP Hz Conflict 58 PCM Spd Override
6 IntDBRes OvrHeat 23 MaxFreq Conflict 59 PCM Retry Limit
8 IPS Tempo OL Level 1 24 VHz Neg Slope 60 PVM Spd Override
9 IPS Tempo OL Level 2 25 IR Volts Range 61 PVM Retry Limit
10 Decel Inhibit 26 FluxAmps Ref Rang 62 DIM4 Spd Override
11 Waking 27 Speed Ref Cflct 63 DIM4 Retry Limit
12 Motor Thermistor 28 Ixo Vlt Rang 64 DIM5 Spd Override
13 ln Phase Loss 34 Home Not Set 65 DIM5 Retry Limit
14 Load Loss 29 Sleep Config 66 DIM6 Spd Override
15 Ground Warn 30 TB Man Ref Cflct 67 DIM6 Retry Limit
17 Dig In ConflictA 31 PTC Conflict
1.Alarm numbers not listed are reserved for future use.
2.Alarm numbers not listed are reserved for future use.
About Faults Faults indicate conditions within the IPS Tempo that require immediate
attention. The IPS Tempo responds to a fault by initiating a coast-to-stop
sequence and turning off output power to the motor.
In addition, some faults are auto-resettable, non-resettable, and/or
user-configurable as described below.
Table 10.7 – Fault Types
Type
Fault Description
➀ Auto-Reset/Run If the IPS Tempo is running when this type of fault occurs, and Auto Rstrt
Tries (174) is set to a value greater than 0, a user-configurable timer, Auto
Rstrt Delay (175) begins. When the timer reaches zero, the IPS Tempo
attempts to automatically reset the fault. If the condition that caused the
fault is no longer present, the fault will be reset and the IPS Tempo will be
restarted.
➁ Non-Resettable This type of fault normally requires IPS Tempo or motor repair. The cause
of the fault must be corrected before the fault can be cleared. The fault will
be reset on power up after repair.
➂ User-Configurable These faults can be enabled/disabled to either annunciate or ignore a fault
condition using Fault Config 1 (238).
➃ IPS Tempo This type of fault is specific to the IPS Tempo. Each monitor will have the
ability to initiate a fault. These faults will cause a pop-up window on the
HIM, which describes the fault condition and adds an entry into the fault
queue. Press ESC on the HIM to clear the pop-up window.
Pressing ESC on the HIM does not reset the fault; it merely clears the
pop-up window.
The IPS Tempo indicates faults in the following ways:

• Status LEDs on the IPS Tempo control panel (refer to Determining IPS
Tempo Status Using the Status LEDs on page 10-2).
• IPS Tempo status parameters Drive Status 1 (209) and Drive Status 2 (210).
• Entries in the fault queue (refer to About the Fault Queue).
• Pop-up screen on the LCD HIM. The screen displays:
- Fault number
- Fault name
- Time that has elapsed since fault occurred.
About the Fault Queue

The IPS Tempo automatically retains a history of faults that have occurred in
the fault queue. The fault queue is accessed using the HIM.
The fault queue holds the 16 most recent faults. The last fault to occur is
indicated in queue entry #1. As new faults are logged into the queue, existing
fault entries are shifted (for example, entry #1 will move to entry #2). Once the
queue is full, older faults are discarded from the queue as new faults occur.
All entries in the fault queue are retained if power is lost.
The Time Stamp

For each entry in the fault queue, the system also displays a fault code and time
stamp value. The time stamp value is the value of an internal IPS
Tempo-under-power timer at the time of the fault. The value of this timer is
copied to PowerUp Marker (242) when the IPS Tempo powers up. The fault
queue time stamp can then be compared to the value in PowerUp Marker to
determine when the fault occurred relative to the last IPS Tempo power up.
The time stamp is cleared when the fault queue is cleared.
Clearing Faults
A fault condition can be cleared by the following:
ESC
1. Press to acknowledge the fault and remove the fault pop-up from the
PROG
LCD HIM screen.

2. Address the condition that caused the fault. The cause must be corrected
before the fault can be cleared.
3. After corrective action has been taken, clear the fault using one of the
following:
- Setting Fault Clear (240) to Clear Faults (1).
- Issuing a Stop-Clear Faults command from the control source.
Resetting faults will clear the faulted status indication. If any fault condition
still exists, the fault will be latched, and another entry made in the fault queue.
Note that performing a fault reset does not clear the fault queue. Clearing the
fault queue is a separate action. Refer to the Fault Clear (240) parameter
description.
Fault Descriptions and Corrective Actions

Table 10.8 describes IPS Tempo faults and corrective actions. It also
indicates if the fault is
➀ Auto-resettable
➁ Non-resettable
➂ User-configurable
➃ IPS Tempo
Table 10.8 – Fault Descriptions and Corrective Actions
Type
Fault No. Description Action
Analog In Loss 29 ➀ An analog input is configured to fault on 1. Check parameters.
➂ signal loss. A signal loss has occurred. 2. Check for broken/loose connections at
Configure with Anlg In 1, 2 Loss (324, inputs.
327).
Anlg Cal Chksum 108 The checksum read from the analog Replace IPS Tempo.
calibration data does not match the
checksum calculated.
Auto Rstrt Tries 33 ➂ IPS Tempo unsuccessfully attempted to Correct the cause of the fault and manually
reset a fault and resume running for the clear.
programmed number of Auto Rstrt Tries
(174).
Enable/disable with Fault Config 1 (238).
AutoTune Aborted 80 The autotune procedure was canceled by Restart procedure.
the user or a fault occurred.
Auxiliary Input 2 ➀ Input is open. Check remote wiring.
Cntl Bd Overtemp 55 The temperature sensor on the Main 1. Check Main Control Board fan.
Control Board detected excessive heat. 2. Check surrounding air temperature.
3. Verify proper mounting/cooling.
DB Resistance 69 Resistance of the internal DB resistor is Replace resistor.
out of range.
Decel Inhibit 24 ➂ The IPS Tempo is not following a 1. Verify input voltage is within IPS Tempo
commanded deceleration because it is specified limits.
attempting to limit bus voltage. 2. Verify system ground impedance
follows proper grounding techniques.
3. Disable bus regulation and/or add
dynamic brake resistor and/or extend
deceleration time.
DIM4 Retry Limit 147 ➁ Conditions outside of the specified range Check the HIM Status Message.
➃ of the monitor have caused the DIM4 to “DIM4 Hi Prc Ovr/DIM4 Hi Prc Ovr”; check
exceed the specified auto-reset limit. for:
1. The condition being monitored at digital
input 4.
“DIM4 Lo Prc Ovr/DIM4 Lo Prc Ovr”; check
for:
input 4.
DIM4 Shutdown 146 ➀ Conditions outside the specified range of Check the HIM Status Message
➃ the monitor have caused the DIM4 to stop “DIM4 Hi Shtdn”; check for:
the IPS Tempo. 1. The condition being monitored at digital
input 4.
“DIM4 Lo Shtdn”; check for:
input 4.
Type
No.
Fault Description Action
DIM 5 Retry Limit 149 ➁ Conditions outside of the specified range Check the HIM Status Message.
input 5
for:
input 5
DIM5 Shutdown 148 ➀ Conditions outside the specified range of Check the HIM Status Message.
➃ the monitor have caused the DIM5 to stop “DIM5 Hi Shtdn”; check for:
the IPS Tempo. 1. The condition being monitored at digital
input 5.
input 5.
DIM6 Retry Limit 151 ➁ Conditions outside of the specified range Check the HIM Status Message
input 6.
for:
input 6.
DIM6 Shutdown 150 ➀ Conditions outside the specified range Check the HIM Status Message
➃ have caused the DIM6 to stop the IPS “DIM6 Hi Shtdn”; check for:
Tempo. 1. The condition being monitored at digital
input 6.
input 6.
Drive OverLoad 64 IPS Tempo rating of 90% for 1 minute or Reduce load or extend Accel Time (140).
150% for 3 seconds has been exceeded.
Drive Powerup 49 No fault displayed. Used as a Power Up Marker in the Fault Queue indicating that the
IPS Tempo power has been cycled.
Encoder Loss 91 Required differential encoder. One of the 1. Check wiring.
2 encoder channel signals is missing. 2. Replace encoder.
Encoder Quad Err 90 Both encoder channels changed state 1. Check for externally induced noise.
within one clock cycle. 2. Replace encoder.
Excessive Load 79 Motor did not come up to speed in the 1. Uncouple load from motor.
allotted time. 2. Repeat Autotune (61).
Faults Cleared 52 No fault displayed. Used as a marker in the Fault Queue indicating that the fault clear
function was performed.
Flt QueueCleared 51 No fault displayed. Used as a marker in the Fault Queue indicating that the clear
queue function was performed.
FluxAmpsRef 78 The value for flux amps determined by 1. Reprogram Motor NP FLA (42) with the
Rang the autotune procedure exceeds the correct motor nameplate value.
programmed Motor NP FLA (42). 2. Repeat Autotune (61).
Ground Fault 13 ➀ A current path to Earth ground greater Check the motor and external wiring to the
than 25% of IPS Tempo rating. IPS Tempo output terminals for a grounded
condition.
Hardware Fault 93 Hardware enable is disabled (jumpered 1. Check jumper.
high) but logic pin is still low. 2. Replace Main Control Board.
Type
No.
Hardware Fault 130 Gate array load error. 1. Cycle power.
2. Replace Main Control Board.
Hardware Fault 131 Dual port failure. 1. Cycle power.
Hardware PTC 18 Motor PTC (positive temperature 1. Verify proper PTC connection.
coefficient) sensor overtemp 2. Motor is overheated; reduce load.
Heatsink OvrTemp 8 ➀ Heatsink temperature exceeds 100% of 1. Verify that maximum ambient
IPS Tempo Temp. temperature has not been exceeded.
2. Check fan.
3. Check for excess load.
HW OverCurrent 12 ➀ The IPS Tempo output current has Check programming. Check for excess
exceeded the hardware current limit. load, improper DC boost setting, DC brake
volts set too high or other causes of excess
current.
I/O Comm Loss 121 ➁ I/O Board lost communication with the 1. Check connector.
Main Control Board. 2. Check for induced noise.
3. Replace I/O board of Main Control
Board.
I/O Failure 122 I/O was detected, but failed the powerup Replace Main Control Board.
sequence.
I/O Board 120 Incorrect I/O board identified. Restore I/O board to original configuration,
Mismatch or If new configuration is desired, reset
fault.
Incompat MCB-PB 106 ➁ IPS Tempo rating information stored on Load compatible version files into IPS
the power board is incompatible with the Tempo.
Main Control board.
Input Phase Loss 17 The DC bus ripple has exceed a preset Checking incoming power for a missing
level. phase/blown fuse.
IR Volts Range 77 The IPS Tempo autotuning default is Re-enter motor nameplate data.
Calculate, and the value calculated for IR
Drop Volts is not in the range of
acceptable values.
IXo VoltageRange 87 Voltage calculated for motor inductive 1. Check for proper motor sizing.
impedance exceeds 25% of Motor NP 2. Check for correct programming of
Volts (41). Motor NP Volts (41).
3. Additional output impedance may be
required.
Load Loss 15 IPS Tempo output torque current is below 1. Verify connections between motor and
Load Loss Level for a time greater than load.
Load Loss Time. 2. Verify level and time requirements.
Motor Overload 7 ➀ Internal electronic overload trip. An excessive motor load exists. Reduce
➂ Enable/disable with Fault Config 1 (238). load so IPS Tempo output current does not
exceed the current set by Motor NP FLA
(42).
Motor Thermistor 16 Thermistor output is out of range. 1. Verify that thermistor is connected.
2. Motor is overheated. Reduce load.
NVS I/O 109 EEprom checksum error. 1. Cycle power and repeat function.
Checksum 2. Replace Main Control Board.
NVS I/O Failure 90 EEprom I/O error. 1. Cycle power and repeat function.
Output Phase 21 Current in one or more phases has been Check the IPS Tempo and motor wiring.
Loss lost or remains below a preset level. Check for phase-to-phase continuity at the
motor terminals. Check for disconnected
motor leads.
Type
No.
OverSpeed Limit 25 ➀ Functions such as slip compensation or Remove excessive load or overhauling
bus regulation have attempted to add an conditions or increase Overspeed Limit
output frequency adjustment greater than (83).
that programmed in Overspeed Limit
(83).
OverVoltage 5 ➀ DC bus voltage exceeded maximum Monitor the AC line for high line voltage or
value. transient conditions. Bus overvoltage can
also be caused by motor regeneration.
Extend the decel time or install dynamic
brake option.
Parameter 100 ➁ The checksum read from the board does 1. Restore defaults.
Chksum not match the checksum calculated. 2. Reload user set if used.
Params Defaulted 48 The IPS Tempo was commanded to write 1. Clear the fault or cycle power to the IPS
default values to EEPROM. Tempo.
2. Program the IPS Tempo parameters as
needed.
PCM Retry Lim 143 ➁ Conditions outside of the specified range Check the HIM Status Message.
➃ of the monitor have caused the PCM to “PCM Lo Prc Ovr/PCM Lo Spd Ovr”
exceed the specified auto-reset limit. (Monitored sensor value above “Level 1”
(Level) or “Min” (Boundary)):
1. Check the condition monitored by the
PCM.
2. Check the PCM Settings.
“PCM Hi Prc Ovr/PCM Hi Spd Ovr”
(Monitored sensor value above “Level 2”
(Level) or “Max” (Boundary)):
PCM.
PCM Shutdown 142 ➀ Conditions outside the specified range of Check the HIM Status Message.
➃ the monitor have caused the PCM to “PCM Lo Shtdn” (Monitored sensor value
shutdown the drive. above “Level 1” (Level) or “Min”
(Boundary)):
PCM.
“PCM Hi Shtdn” (Monitored sensor value
above “Level 2” (Level) or “Max”
(Boundary)):
PCM.
Phase U to Grnd 38 A phase-to-ground fault has been 1. Check the wiring between the IPS
Phase V to Grnd 39 detected between the IPS Tempo and Tempo and motor.
motor in this phase. 2. Check motor for grounded phase.
Phase W to Grnd 40
3. Replace IPS Tempo.
Phase UV Short 41 Excessive current has been detected 1. Check the motor and IPS Tempo output
Phase VW Short 42 between these two output terminals. terminal wiring for a shorted condition.
2. Replace IPS Tempo.
Phase UW Short 43
Port 1-6 DPI Loss 81- DPI port stopped communicating. 1. If module was not intentionally
86 An attached peripheral with control disconnected, check wiring to the port.
capabilities via Logic Source Sel (89) (or Replace wiring, port expander,
HIM control) was removed. modules, Main Control board or
The fault code indicates the offending complete IPS Tempo as required.
port number (81 = port 1, etc.) 2. Check HIM connection.
Type
No.
Port 1-6 Adapter 71- The communications card has a fault.
Check the DPI device event queue and
76 corresponding fault information for the
device.
Power Down 111 ➀ Indicates a checksum error in reading Restore all parameters to correct values. If
Csum ➂ non-volatile memory. All parameters set problem persists, replace Main Control
to default values. Board
Power Loss 3 ➀ DC bus voltage remained below 85% of Monitor the incoming AC line for low
➂ nominal for longer than Power Loss Time voltage or line power interruption.
(185).
Enable/disable with Fault Config 1 (238).
Power Unit 70 One or more of the output transistors 1. Check for damaged output transistors.
were operating in the active region 2. Replace IPS Tempo.
instead of desaturation. This can be
caused by excessive transistor current or
insufficient base IPS Tempo voltage.
PPM Retry Lim 141 ➁ Conditions outside of the specified range Check the HIM Status Message.
➃ of the monitor have caused the PPM to “PPM Hi Prc Ovr/PPM Hi Prc Ovr” (Power
exceed the specified auto-reset limit. is too high); check for
1. Pump operation past BEP/End or
Curve.
2. Mechanical rubbing.
3. Excessive pump seal drag.
4. Buildup/corrosion on the impeller/inside
pump casing.
5. Process/system changes.
6. PPM settings.
“PPM Lo Prc Ovr/PPM Lo Spd Ovr” (Power
is too low); check for:
1. Pump blockage/closed vales.
2. Low/no flow.
3. Broken coupling.
5. PPM settings.
PPM Shutdown 140 ➀ Conditions outside the specified range of Check the HIM Status Message.
➃ the monitor have caused the PPM to “PPM Hi Shtdn (Power is too high); check
shutdown the IPS Tempo. for
1. Pump operation past BEP/End or
Curve.
2. Mechanical rubbing.
3. Excessive pump seal drag.
4. Buildup/corrosion on the impeller/inside
pump casing.
6. PPM settings.
“PPM Lo Shtdn” (Power is too low); check
for:
1. Pump blockage/closed vales.
2. Low/no flow.
3. Broken coupling.
5. PPM settings.
Pulse ln Loss 92 Z channel is selected as a pulse input 1. Check wiring.
and no signal is present. 2. Replace pulse generator.
Type
No.
PVM Retry Lim 145 ➁ Conditions outside of the specified range Check the HIM Status Message.
➃ of the monitor have caused the PVM to “PVM Hi Prc Ovr/PVM Hi Spd Ovr (Speed
exceed the specified auto-reset limit. is too high); check for:
1. Pump blockage/closed valves.
2. De-coupled pump.
3. Inadequate/loss of pump function.
5. Operating off pump curve.
6. Excessive pump wear.
7. PVM settings.
“PVM Lo Prc Ovr/PVM Lo Spd Ovr (Speed
is too low); check for:
1. Improper process variable setpoint.
2. Improper pump curve operating point.
4. Valve positioning.
5. PVM Settings.
PVM Shutdown 144 ➀ Conditions outside the specified range of Check the HIM Status Message.
the monitor have caused the PVM to “PVM Hi Shtdn” (Speed is too high); check
➃
shutdown the IPS Tempo. for:
1. Pump blockage/closed valves.
2. De-coupled pump.
3. Inadequate/loss of pump suction.
4. Process/system change.
5. Excessive pump wear.
“PVM Lo Shtdn” (Speed is too low); check
for:
1. Improper process variable setpoint.
2. Improper pump curve operating point.
3. Process/system change.
4. Valve positioning.
5. PVM settings.
Pwr Brd Chksum1 104 The checksum read from the EEPROM Clear the fault or cycle power to the IPS
does not match the checksum calculated Tempo.
from the EEPROM data.
Pwr Brd Chksum2 105 ➁ The checksum read from the board does 1. Cycle power to the IPS Tempo.
not match the checksum calculated. 2. If problem persists, replace IPS Tempo.
Replaced 107 ➁ Main Control Board was replaced and 1. Restore defaults.
MCB-PB parameters were not programmed. 2. Reprogram parameters.
Shear Pin 63 ➂ Programmed Current Lmt Val (148) has Check load requirements and Current Lmt
been exceeded. Val (148) setting.
Enabled/disable with Fault Config 1 (238).
Software Fault 88 Microprocessor handshake error. Replace Main Control Board.
Software Fault 89 Microprocessor handshake error. Replace Main Control Board.
SW OverCurrent 36 ➀ The IPS Tempo output current has Check for excess load, improper DC boost
exceeded the software current. setting. DC brake volts set too high.
Type
No.
Trnsistr OvrTemp 9 ➀ Output transistors have exceeded their Check for proper temperature and flow rate
maximum operating temperature. of coolant.
UnderVoltage 4 ➀ DC bus voltage fell below the minimum Monitor the incoming AC line for low
➂ value of 407V DC at 400/480V input or voltage or power interruption.
204V DC at 200/240V input.
Enable/disable with Fault Config 1(233).
UserSet1 Chksum 101 ➁ The checksum read from the user set Re-save user set.
UserSet2 Chksum 102 ➁ does not match the checksum calculated.
UserSet3 Chksum 103 ➁
Table 10.9 – Fault Names Cross-Referenced by Fault Number
No.1 Fault No. 1 Fault No1 Fault

2 Auxiliary Input 42 Phase VW Short 101-103 UserSetX Chksum
3 Power Loss 43 Phase UW Short 104 Pwr Brd Chksum1
4 UnderVoltage 48 Params Defaulted 105 Pwr Brd Chksum2
5 OverVoltage 49 Drive PowerUp 106 Incompat MCB-PB
7 Motor Overload 51 Flt QueueCleared 107 Replaced MCB-PB
8 Heatsink OvrTemp 52 Faults Cleared 108 Anlg Cal Chksum
9 Trnsistr OvrTemp 55 Cntl Bd OverLoad 111 Power Down Csum
12 HW OverCurrent 63 Shear Pin 120 I/O Mismatch
13 Ground Fault 64 Drive OverLoad 121 I/O Comm Loss
15 Load Loss 69 DB Resistance 122 I/O Failure
16 Motor Thermistor 70 Power Unit 130 Hardware Fault
17 Input Phase Loss 71-76 Port 1-6 Net Loss 140 PPM Shutdown
18 Hardware PTC 77 IR Volts Range 141 PPM Retry Lim
20 TorqProv Spd Band 78 FluxAmpsRef Rang 142 PCM Shutdown
21 Output Phase Loss 79 Excessive Load 143 PCM Retry Lim
24 Decel Inhibit 80 AutoTune Aborted 144 PVMShutdown
25 OverSpeed Limit 81-86 Port 1-6 DPI Loss 145 PVM Retry Lim
28 See Manual 87 IXo VoltageRange 146 DIM4 Shutdown
33 Auto Rstrt Tries 88 Software Fault 147 DIM4 Retry Lim
36 SW OverCurrent 89 Software Fault 148 DIM5 Shutdown
38 Phase U to Grnd 90 Encoder Quad Err 149 DIM5 Retry Lim
29 Analog In Loss 91 Encoder Loss 150 DIM6 Retry Lim
39 Phase V to Grnd 92 Pulse In Loss 151 DIM6 Shutdown
40 Phase W to Grnd 93 Hardware Fault
41 Phase UV Short 100 Parameter Chksum
1.Fault numbers not listed are reserved for future use.
Testpoint Parameter Select testpoint with Testpoint X Sel (234, 236). Values can be viewed with
Testpoint X Data (235, 237)
Table 10.10 – Test Point Codes and Functions
Number1 Description Default

01 DPI Error Status 0
02 Heatsink Temp 0
03 Active Cur Limit 0
04 Active PWM Freq 4
05 Lifetime MegaWatt Hours2 0
06 Life Run Time 0
07 Life Pwr Up Time 0
08 Life Pwr Cycles 0
09 Life MW-HR Fract 2 0
10 MW-HR Fract Unit 2 0
11 MCN Life Time 0
12 Raw Analog ln 1 0
13 Raw Analog ln 2 0
16 CS Msg Rx Cnt 0
17 CS Msg Tx Cnt 0
18 CS Timeout Cnt 0
19 CS Msg Bad Cnt 0
22 PC Msg Rx Cnt 0
23 PC Msg Tx Cnt 0
24-29 PC1-6 Timeout Cnt 0
30 CAN BusOff Cnt 0
31 No. of Analog Inputs 0
32 Raw Temperature 0
33 MTO Norm Mtr Amp 0
34 DTO-Cmd Frequency 0
35 DTP-Cmd Cur Lim 0
36 DTO-Cmd DC Hold 0
37 Control Bd Temp 0.0
38 Junction Temp 0.0
39 Gnd Warn Level 0.0
40 In Phase LossLvl 0
1. Enter in Testpoint x Sel.
2. Use the equation below to calculate total Lifetime MegaWatt Hours.
⎛ ---------------------------------------------
Value of Code 9
- ¥ 0.1⎞ + Value of Code 5 = Total Lifetime Megawatt Hours
⎝ Value of Code 10 ⎠
Common Symptoms and

Corrective Actions ATTENTION: DC bus capacitors retain hazardous voltages after
Table 10.11 – IPS Tempo Does Not Start from Start, Run or Jog Inputs Wired to the Terminal Block
Indication(s) Cause(s) Corrective Action

Flashing red Ready IPS Tempo is faulted. Clear fault:
LED. • Press stop.
• Cycle power.
• Set Fault Clear (240) to 1.
• “Clear Faults” on the HIM Diagnostic Menu.
Incorrect operation Incorrect input wiring. Wire inputs correctly and/or install jumper.
from the terminal • 2-wire control requires Run
block. input.
• 3-wire control requires Start
and Stop inputs
• Jumper from terminal 25 to 26
is required.
Incorrect digital input Program Digital In”x” Sel (361-366) for correct inputs.
programming.
• Mutually exclusive choices Start or Run programming may be missing.
have been made.
• 2-wire and 3-wire
programming may be
conflicting.
• Exclusive functions may have
multiple inputs configured.
• Stop if factory default and is
not wired or is open.
Flashing yellow Ready Incorrect digital input Program Digital In”x” Sel (361-366) to resolve conflicts.
LED and DigIn CflctB programming. Remove multiple selections for the same function.
indication on LCD HIM. • Mutually exclusive choices Install stop button to apply a signal at stop terminal.
Drive Status 2 (210) have been made.
shows type 2 alarm(s). • 2-wire and 3-wire
programming may be
conflicting.
• Exclusive functions may have
multiple inputs configured.
• Stop if factory default and is
not wired or is open.
Table 10.12 – IPS Tempo Does Not Start or Jog from HIM
Indication Cause(s) Corrective Action

None IPS Tempo is programmed for 2-wire If 2-wire control is required, no action is
control. HIM start is disabled for 2-wire necessary.
control. If 3-wire control is required, program Digital
Inx Sel (361-366) for correct inputs.
Flashing or steady red Active fault. Reset fault.
Ready LED.
Flashing yellow Ready Enable input is open. Close terminal block enable input.
LED. The terminal block stop input is open Close terminal block stop input.
and control source is set to All Ports.
Start inhibit bits are set. Check status in Start Inhibits (214).
Table 10.13 – IPS Tempo Does Not Respond to Changes in Speed Command

LCD HIM Status Line No value is coming from the source of 1. If the source is an analog input, check
indicates “At Speed” and the command. wiring and use a meter to check for
output is 0 Hz. presence of signal.
2. Check Commanded Speed for correct
source.
None Incorrect reference source has been 1. Check Speed Ref Source (213) for the
programmed. source of the speed reference.
2. Reprogram Speed Ref A Sel (90) for
correct source.
None Incorrect reference source is being 1. Check Drive Status 1 (209), bits 12 - 15
selected via remote device or digital for unexpected source selections.
inputs. 2. Check Dig In Status (216) to see if inputs
are selecting an alternate source.
3. Reprogram digital inputs to correct
Speed Sel x option.
Table 10.14 – Motor and/or IPS Tempo Will Not Accelerate to Commanded Speed

Acceleration time is Incorrect value in Accel Time “x” (140, Reprogram Accel Time “x” (140, 141).
excessive. 141).
IPS Tempo is forced into Excess load or short acceleration Check Drive Status 2 (210), bit 10 to see if
current limit, slowing or time. the IPS Tempo is in current limit.
stopping acceleration. Remove excess load or reprogram Accel
Time “x” (140, 141).
Speed command source or Improper speed command. Check for the proper speed command using
value is not as expected. the steps in Table 10.13.
Programming is preventing Incorrect programming. Check Maximum Speed (82) and Maximum
the IPS Tempo output from Freq (55) to insure that speed is not limited
exceeding limiting values. by programming.
Table 10.15 – Motor Operation is Unstable

None Motor data was incorrectly entered or 1. Correctly enter motor nameplate data.
autotune was not performed. 2. Perform static or rotate autotune
procedure (61).
Table 10.16 – IPS Tempo Will Not Reverse Motor Direction

None Digital input is not selected for Check Digital In”x” Sel. Choose correct input
reversing control. and program for reverse.
Digital input is incorrectly wired. Check input wiring.
A bipolar analog speed command 1. Use meter to check that an analog input
input is incorrectly wired or signal is voltage is present.
absent. 2. Check wiring. Positive voltage commands
forward direction.
Table 10.17 – Stopping the IPS Tempo Results in a Decel Inhibit Fault

Decel Inhibit fault screen. The bus regulation feature is enabled 1. Reprogram bus regulation (parameters
LCD status line indicates and is halting deceleration due to 161 and 162) to eliminate any Adjust
Faulted. excessive bus voltage. Excess bus Freq selection.
voltage is normally due to excessive 2. Disable bus regulation (parameters 161
regenerated energy or unstable AC line and 162) and add a dynamic brake.
input voltages. 3. Correct AC input line instability or add an
Internal timer has halted IPS Tempo isolation transformer.
operation.
4. Reset IPS Tempo.
Replacement Parts
Table 10.18 – Replacement Parts List

ControlNet Communication Module 20-COMM-C
DeviceNet Communication Module 20-COMM-D
EtherNet/IP Communication Module 20-COMM-E
Interbus Communication Module 20-COMM-I
PROFIBUS Communication Module 20-COMM-P
Remote I/O Communication Module 20-COMM-R
RS-485 DF1 Communication Module 20-COMM-S
Full Numeric HIM E1KYPD-FN-BH
Remote Mounted Nema 4 HIM E1KYPD-N4-BH
Blank HIM 20-HIM-A0
24 VDC Input Regulator Board1 20B-VECTB-C0-BH
115 VAC Input Regulator Board1 20B-VECTB-D0-BH
Removable Control I/O Terminal Block SK-G9-TB1-S1
Removable Encoder Terminal Block SK-G9-TB1-ENC1
1. The IPS Tempo is shipped with one of the above regulator options. The user can purchase one of the
above options to field replace a damaged board or to change the digital input voltage from 24 VDC to
115 VAC (or vice versa).
Troubleshooting the IPS The LCD HIM provides immediate visual notification of alarm or fault
Tempo Using the LCD HIM conditions as well as the following diagnostic information:
• Entries in the fault queue
• Fault parameters
• IPS Tempo status parameters
• Selected device version and status information
• HIM version information
Accessing the Fault Queue

As described in section , the IPS Tempo automatically retains a history of
the last 16 faults that have occurred in the fault queue.
To access the fault queue, select Faults>View Fault Queue from the Diagnostics
Menu off of the main screen.
Diagnostics Diagnostics Faults

Alarms Alarms View Fault Queue
Faults Faults Clear Faults
Drive Status Drive Status Clear Flt Queue
Device Select Device Select
Device Name Device Name
STARTUP PARAM DIAG SEL STARTUP PARAM DIAG SEL FAULTS ALARMS SEL
View Fault Queue

F01:Faults Cleared
F02:Decel Inhibit
F03:Undervoltage
F04:Port 1 DPI Loss
F05:Function Loss
Fault Queue 1
FltQ # 01
FltCode:52
Faults Cleared
Accumulated Time
319:40:03.000
Figure 10.3 – Accessing the Fault Queue
Notes
Appendix A
Technical Specifications
Frames
Category 0-6 7-10 Specification
Agency ✔ ✔ Listed to UL508C and CAN/CSA-C2.2 No. 14-M91.
Certification Configured drives may be UL508A
✔ Marked for all applicable European Directives

EMC Directive (2004/108/EC)
EN 61800-3 Adjustable Speed electrical power drive systems
Low Voltage Directive (2006/95/EC)
EN 50178 Electronic Equipment for use in Power Installations
✔ Certified to IES 61800-3.
N223
✔ Certified to ATEX directive 94/9/EC. Group II Category (2) GD Applications with ATEX Approved Motors.
II (2) G D
The drive is also designed to meet the following specifications:

✔ ✔ NFPA 70 - US National Electrical Code
✔ NEMA ICS 7.1 - Safety Standards for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation, and Operation of Adjustable Speed Drive Systems
✔ IEC 146 - International Electrical Code
✔ CMAA Specification #70 (Crane Manufacturers of America Association)
✔ SEMIF47
✔ RINA (Registo Italiano Navale - marine certification)
Category Specification
Protection 600V 600V
Drive 200-208V 240V 380/400V 480V Frames 0-4 Frames 5-6
AC Input Overvoltage Trip: 285VAC 285VAC 570VAC 570VAC 716VAC 818VAC
AC Input Undervoltage Trip: 120VAC 138VAC 233VAC 280VAC 345VAC 345VAC
Bus Overvoltage Trip: 405VDC 405VDC 810VDC 810VDC 1013VDC 1162VDC
Bus Undervoltage Shutoff/Fault: 153VDC 153VDC 305VDC 305VDC 381VDC 437VDC
Nominal Bus Voltage: 281VDC 324VDC 540VDC 648VDC 810VDC 932VDC
All Drives
Heat Sink Thermistor: Monitored by microprocessor overtemp trip
Drive Overcurrent Trip
Software Overcurrent Trip: 200% of rated current (typical)
Hardware Overcurrent Trip: 220-300% of rated current (dependent on drive rating)
Line transients: up to 6000 volts peak per IEEE C62.41-1991
Control Logic Noise Immunity: Showering arc transients up to 1500V peak
Power Ride-Thru: 15 milliseconds at full load
Logic Control Ride-Thru: 0.5 seconds minimum, 2 seconds typical
Ground Fault Trip: Phase-to-ground on drive output
Short Circuit Trip: Phase-to-phase on drive output
Electrical Voltage Tolerance: See page A-5 for full power and operating range.
Input Frequency Tolerance: 47-63 Hz.
Input Phases: Three-phase input provides full rating for all drives. Single-phase operation (Frames 5-7 Only) provides 50% of rated
current. Single phase operation of the drive is not currently rated under the UL 508C listing. Rockwell Automation has
verified that single phase operation with output current derated by 50% of the three-phase ratings will meet all safety
requirements.
Displacement Power Factor: 0.98 across entire speed range.
Efficiency: 97.5% at rated amps, nominal line volts.
Maximum Short Circuit Rating: 200,000 Amps symmetrical.
Actual Short Circuit Rating: Determined by AIC rating of installed fuse/circuit breaker.
A-2 Technical Specifications
Environment Altitude: 1000 m (3300 ft) max. without derating
Maximum Surrounding Air Temperature without
Derating - IP20, NEMA/UL Type Open:
Frames 0-6 0 to 50 degrees C (32 to 122 degrees F), typical. See pages 4-9 through 4-12 for exceptions.
Frames 7-10 0 to 40 degrees C (32 to 104 degrees F) for chassis (heatsink)
0 to 65 degrees C (32 to 149 degrees F) for control
Storage Temperature (all const.): –40 to 70 degrees C (–40 to 158 degrees F)
Atmosphere: Important: Drive must not be installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains volatile or corrosive gas,
vapors or dust. If the drive is not going to be installed for a period of time, it must be stored in an area where it will not be
exposed to a corrosive atmosphere.
Relative Humidity: 5 to 95% non-condensing
Shock: 15G peak for 11ms duration (±1.0 ms)
Vibration: 0.152 mm (0.006 in.) displacement, 1G peak
Sound: Frame Fan Speed Sound Level Note: Sound pressure level is measured at 2 meters.
0 30 CFM 58 dB
1 30 CFM 59 dB
2 50 CFM 57 dB
3 120 CFM 61 dB
4 190 CFM 59 dB
5 200 CFM 71 dB
6 300 CFM 72 dB
7 756 CFM 74 dB
8 1200 CFM 78 dB
9 2800 CFM 82 dB
10 Inverter 1850 CFM 78 dB
10 Converter 1200 CFM 78 dB
Control Method: Sine coded PWM with programmable carrier frequency. Ratings apply to all drives (refer to the Derating Guidelines in the
PowerFlex Reference Manual). The drive can be supplied as 6 pulse or 18 pulse in a configured package.
Carrier Frequency: 2, 4, 8 & 10 kHz. Drive rating based on 4 kHz (see pages 4-9 through 4-12 for exceptions).
Output Voltage Range: 0 to rated motor voltage
Output Frequency Range: Standard Control – 0 to 400 Hz., Vector Control – 0 to 420 Hz
Frequency Accuracy
Digital Input: Within ±0.01% of set output frequency.
Analog Input: Within ±0.4% of maximum output frequency.
Frequency Control: Speed Regulation - w/Slip Compensation (Volts per Hertz Mode)
0.5% of base speed across 40:1 speed range
40:1 operating range
10 rad/sec bandwidth
Speed Regulation - w/Slip Compensation (Sensorless Vector Mode)
Speed Regulation - w/Feedback (Sensorless Vector Mode)
Speed Control: Speed Regulation - w/o Feedback (Vector Control Mode)
Speed Regulation - w/Feedback (Vector Control Mode)
Torque Regulation: Torque Regulation - w/o Feedback ±5%, 600 rad/sec bandwidth
Torque Regulation - w/Feedback ±2%, 2500 rad/sec bandwidth
Selectable Motor Control: Sensorless Vector with full tuning. Standard V/Hz with full custom capability. PF700 adds Vector Control.
Stop Modes: Multiple programmable stop modes including - Ramp, Coast, DC-Brake, Ramp-to-Hold and S-curve.
Accel/Decel: Two independently programmable accel and decel times. Each time may be programmed from 0 - 3600 seconds in 0.1
second increments.
Intermittent Overload: 110% Overload capability for up to 1 minute
150% Overload capability for up to 3 seconds
Current Limit Capability: Proactive Current Limit programmable from 20 to 160% of rated output current. Independently programmable proportional
and integral gain.
Electronic Motor Overload Protection: Class 10 protection with speed sensitive response. Investigated by U.L. to comply with N.E.C. Article 430. U.L. File
E59272, volume 12.
Technical Specifications A-3
Control Digital/Analog Input Latency Motor Control Latency
(continued) Signal Min. Max Typical
Digital Input Start FVC 8.4 ms 10.4 ms 8.4 ms
SVC 9.2 ms 16.0 ms 9.2 ms
Stop FVC 10.0 ms 12.4 ms 10.4 ms
SVC 10.0 ms 12.0 ms 10.4 ms
Analog Input Torque FVC 772 μs 1.06 ms 840 μs
(at 4 kHz PWM)
Torque FVC 1.008 ms 1.46 ms 1.256 ms
(at 2 kHz PWM)
Speed FVC 4.6 ms 8.6 ms 4.8 ms
Speed SVC 4.8 ms 12.4 ms 6.4 ms
Encoder Type: Incremental, dual channel
Supply: 12V, 250 mA. 12V, 10 mA minimum inputs isolated with differential transmitter, 250 kHz maximum.
Quadrature: 90°, ±27 degrees at 25 degrees C.
Duty Cycle: 50%, +10%
Requirements: Encoders must be line driver type, quadrature (dual channel) or pulse (single channel), 8-15V DC output (4-6V DC when
jumpers are in 5V position), single-ended or differential and capable of supplying a minimum of 10 mA per channel.
Maximum input frequency is 250 kHz. The Encoder Interface Board accepts 12V DC square-wave with a minimum high
state voltage of 7.0V DC. With the jumpers in the 5V position, the encoder will accept a 5V DC square-wave with a
minimum high state voltage of 3.0V DC. In either jumper position, the maximum low state voltage is 0.4V DC.
Watts Loss (Rated Load, Speed & PWM) (1)

Table A.1 – IP20, NEMA/UL Type 1 – Frames 0-6
Voltage ND HP/kW External Watts Internal Watts Total Watts Loss
240V 0.5 9 37 46
1 22 39 61
2 38 39 77
3 57 41 98
5 97 82 179
7.5 134 74 208
10 192 77 269
15 276 92 368
20 354 82 436
25 602 96 698
30 780 96 876
40 860 107 967
50 1132 138 1270
60 1296 200 1496
75 1716 277 1993
100 1837 418 2255
400V 0.37 11 42 53
0.75 19 44 63
1.5 31 45 76
2.2 46 46 93
4 78 87 164
5.5 115 79 194
7.5 134 84 218
11 226 99 326
15 303 91 394
18.5 339 102 441
22 357 103 459
30 492 117 610
37 568 148 717
45 722 207 930
55 821 286 1107
55 1130 397 1527
90 1402 443 1845
110 1711 493 2204
132 1930 583 2513
480V 0.5 11 42 53
1 19 44 63
2 31 45 76
3 46 46 93
5 78 87 164
7.5 115 79 194
10 134 84 218
15 226 99 326
20 303 91 394
25 339 102 441
30 357 103 459
40 492 117 610
50 568 148 717
60 722 207 930
75 821 286 1107
100 1130 397 1527
125 1402 443 1845
150 1711 493 2204
200 1930 583 2513
600V 0.5 9 37 46
1 14 40 54
2 25 40 65
3 41 42 83
5 59 83 142
7.5 83 75 157
10 109 77 186
15 177 93 270
20 260 83 343
25 291 95 385
30 324 95 419
40 459 109 569
50 569 141 710
60 630 195 825
75 1053 308 1361
100 1467 407 1874
125 1400 500 1900
150 1668 612 2280
(1) Worst case condition including Vector Control board, HIM and Communication Module.
Technical Specifications A-5
Table A.2 – IP20, NEMA/UL Type 1 – Frames 7-10

HP Rating Dissipation (Watts)
AC Input
Frame
Chassis Control
Voltage ND HD (heatsink) (front of backplane) Total
400/480V 7 250 200 3422 514 3936
250 250 4224 618 4842
8 300 250 3125 569 3694
350 300 3588 681 4269
400 350 4284 336 4620
450 400 4850 1000 5850
500 450 5278 2010 7288
9 600 500 6772 2675 9447
10 700 600 8595 2339 10934
Voltage Tolerance
Nominal Line Nominal Motor Drive Full Power Drive Operating
Drive Rating Voltage Voltage Range Range
200-240 200 200* 200-264 180-264
208 208 208-264
240 230 230-264
380-480 380 380* 380-528 342-528
400 400 400-528
480 460 460-528
500-600 600 575* 575-660 432-660
(Frames 0-4 Only)
500-600 600 575* 575-660 475-759
(Frames 5 & 6 Only)
Drive Full Power Range = Nominal Motor Voltage to Drive Rated Voltage +10%.
Rated current is available across the entire Drive Full Power Range
Drive Operating Range = Lowest* Nominal Motor Voltage –10% to Drive Rated Voltage +10%.
Drive Output is linearly derated when Actual Line Voltage is less than the
Nominal Motor Voltage
HP @ Motor (Drive Output)
Derated Power Range

Full Power Range
Drive Operating Range
Nominal Motor Voltage -10% Drive Rated Voltage

Nominal Motor Voltage Drive Rated Voltage +10%
Actual Line Voltage (Drive Input)
Example:
Calculate the maximum power of a 5 HP, 460V motor connected to a 480V rated
drive supplied with 342V Actual Line Voltage input.
• Actual Line Voltage / Nominal Motor Voltage = 74.3%
• 74.3% × 5 HP = 3.7 HP
• 74.3% × 60 Hz = 44.6 Hz
At 342V Actual Line Voltage, the maximum power the 5 HP, 460V motor can
produce is 3.7 HP at 44.6 Hz.
5 HP
HP @ Motor (Drive Output)
3.7 HP
342V 480V
460V 528V
Actual Line Voltage (Drive Input)
Notes
Appendix B
Logic Command/Status Words
Appendix B provides information on Logic Command and Logic Status Words.

Important: If block transfers are programmed to continuously write
information to the drive, care must be taken to properly format the
block transfer. If attribute 10 is selected for the block transfer,
values will be written only to RAM and will not be saved by the
IPS Tempo. This is the preferred attribute for continuous transfers.
If attribute 9 is selected, each program scan will complete a write
to the IPS Tempos non-volatile memory (EEprom). Since the
EEprom has a fixed number of allowed writes, continuous block
transfers will quickly damage the EEprom. Do not assign attribute
9 to continuous block transfers.
Logic Command Words

Logic Bits
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Command Description
X Stop1 0 = Not Stop
1 = Stop
X Start 1,2 0 = Not Start
1 = Start
X Jog 0 = Not Jog
1 = Jog
X Clear Faults 0 = Not Clear Faults
1 = Clear Faults
X Local Control 0 = No Local Control
1 = Local Control
X MOP 0 = Not Increment
Increment 1 = Increment
X X Accel Rate 00 = No Command
01 = Use Accel Time 1
11 = Use Present Time
X X Decel Rate 00 = No Command
11 = Use Present Time
X X X Reference 000 = No Command
Select3 001 = Ref 1 (Ref A Select)
010 = Ref 2 (Ref B Select)
011 = Ref 3 (Process/Spd)
111 = Ref 7 (Process/Spd/Override)
X MOP 0 = Not Decrement
Decrement 1 = Decrement
1. A “0 = Not Stop” condition (logic 0) must first be present before a “1 = Start” condition will start the IPS Tempo. The start
command acts as a momentary Start command. A “1” will start the IPS Tempo, but returning to “0” will not stop the IPS Tempo.
2. This start will not function if a digital input (parameters 361-366) is programmed for a 2-wire control (option 7, 8, or 9).
3. This Reference Select will not function if a digital input (361-366) is programmed for “Speed Sel 1, 2, or 3” (option 15, 16, or 17).
B-2 Logic Command/Status Words
Logic Status Word

Logic Bits
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Command Description
X Ready 0 = Not Ready
1 = Ready
X Active 0 = Not Active
1 = Active
X Accel 0 = Not Accelerating
1 = Accelerating
X Decel 0 = Not Decelerating
1 = Decelerating
X Alarm 0 = No Alarm
1 = Alarm
X Fault 0 = No Fault
1 = Fault
X At Speed 0 = Not at Reference
1 = At Reference
X X X Local Control 000 = Port 0 (TB)
001 = Port 1
010 = Port 2
011 = Port 3
100 = Port 4
101 = Port 5
110 = Reserved
111 = No Local
X X X X Reference 0000 = Ref A Auto
Source 0001 = Ref B Auto
0010 = Ref 2 Auto (Process/Spd)
1000 = Term Blk Manual Override
1001 = DPI 1 Manual Override
1110 = Reserved Override
1111 = Jog Ref
Appendix C
Record of User Sets
The following table lists the complete set of IPS Tempo parameters in
alphabetical order.
Data
No. Parameter Name Path (File>Group) Range Default Units User Setting
140 Accel Time 1 Dynamic Control>Ramp Rates 0.0 to 3600.0 10.0 Sec
141 Accel Time 2 Dynamic Control>Ramp Rates 0.0 to 3600.0 10.0 Sec
19 Ain1 Scaled Val Monitor>Metering 0.0 to 99999.9 Read Only --
20 Ain2 Scaled Val Monitor>Metering 0.0 to 99999.9 Read Only --
332 Ain1Sensor High Input & Outputs>AnalogInputs +/- 9999.9 100.0 --
335 Ain1 Sensor Low Inputs & Outputs>AnalogInputs +/- 9999.9 0 --
331 Ain1 Sensor Units Input & Outputs>AnalogInputs 0 to 24 0 --
334 Ain2 Sensor High Input & Outputs>AnalogInputs 0.0 to 9999.9 100.0 --
336 Ain2 Sensor Low Inputs & Outputs>AnalogInputs +/- 9999.9 0 --
333 Ain2 Sensor Units Input & Outputs>AnalogInputs 0 to 24 0 --
229 Alarm 1 @ Fault Utility>Diagnostics Note 3 Read Only --
230 Alarm 2 @ Fault Utility>Diagnostics Note 3 Read Only --
850 Alarm 1 Time Utility>Alarms 0.0 to 214748352.0 Read Only Hrs
261 Alarm Clear Utility>Alarms 0 to 1 0 --
262 Alarm Code 1 Utility>Alarms 0 to 65535 Read Only --
259 Alarm Config 1 Utility>Alarms Note 3 Note 3 --
324 Analog In 1 Error Inputs & Outputs>Analog Inputs 0 to 6 Disabled --
322 Analog In 1 Hi Inputs & Outputs>Analog Inputs 0.000 to 20.000 mA, 20.000 mA mA or Volts
+/- 10.000 V, 0.0 to
10.000 V
323 Analog In 1 Lo Inputs & Outputs>Analog Inputs 0.000 to 20.000 mA, 4.000 mA mA or Volts
+/- 10.000 V, 0.0 to
10.000 V
325 Analog In 2 Hi Inputs & Outputs>Analog Inputs 4.000 to 20.000 mA, 20.000 mA mA or Volts
-/+ 10.000, 0.000 to
10.000 V
326 Analog In 2 Lo Inputs & Outputs>Analog Inputs 4.000 to 20.000 mA, 4.000 mA mA or Volts
-/+ 10.000, 0.000 to
10.000 V
C-2 Record of User Sets
Data
327 Analog In 2 Error Inputs & Outputs>Analog Inputs 0 to 6 0 --
16 Analog In1 Value Monitor>Metering 0.000 to 20.000 mA Read Only mA or Volts
or +/- 10.000 V
17 Analog In2 Value Monitor>Metering 0.000 to 20.000 mA Read Only mA or Volts
or +/- 10.000 V
343 Analog Out1 Hi Inputs & Outputs>Analog Outputs 0.000 to 20.000 mA 10.000 V mA or Volts
or +/- 10.000 V
344 Analog Out1 Lo Inputs & Outputs>Analog Outputs 0.000 to 20.000 mA 0.000 V mA or Volts
or +/- 10.000 V
342 Analog Out1 Sel Inputs & Outputs>Analog Outputs 0 to 25 0 --
346 Analog Out2 Hi Inputs & Outputs>Analog Outputs 0.000 to 20.000 mA 10.000 V mA or Volts
or +/- 10.000 V
347 Analog Out2 Lo Inputs & Outputs>Analog Outputs 0.000 to 20.000 mA 0.000 V mA or Volts
or +/- 10.000 V
345 Analog Out2 Sel Inputs & Outputs>Analog Outputs 0 to 25 0 --
320 Anlg In Config Inputs & Outputs>Analog Inputs Note 3 Note 3 --
321 Anlg In Sqr Root Inputs & Outputs>Analog Inputs Note 3 Note 3 --
354 Anlg Out1 Scale Inputs & Outputs>Analog Outputs Note 4 0.0 --
377 Anlg Out1 Setpt Inputs & Outputs>Analog Outputs 0.000 to 20.000 mA 4.000 V mA or Volts
or +/- 10.000 V
355 Anlg Out2 Scale Inputs & Outputs>Analog Outputs Note 4 0.0 --
378 Anlg Out2 Setpt Inputs & Outputs>Analog Outputs 0.000 to 20.000 mA 4.000 V mA or Volts
or +/- 10.000 V
341 Anlg Out Absolut Inputs & Outputs>Analog Outputs Note 3 Note 3 --
340 Anlg Out Config Inputs & Outputs>Analog Outputs Note 3 Note 3 --
175 Auto Rstrt Delay IPS Config>IPS Setup 0.5 to 10800.0 1.0 Secs
174 Auto Rstrt Tries IPS Config>IPS Setup 0 t0 9 0 --
61 Autotune Motor Control>Torq Attributes 0 to 3 3 --
66 Autotune Torque Motor Control>Torq Attributes 0.0 to 150 50 %
72 Break Frequency Motor Control>Volts per Hertz Note 4 Note 4 Hz
71 Break Voltage Motor Control>Volts per Hertz Note 4 Note 4 VAC
165 Bus Reg Kd Dynamic Control>Stop/Brake Modes 0 to 10000 1000 --
160 Bus Reg Ki Dynamic Control>Stop/Brake Modes 0 to 5000 450 --
164 Bus Reg Kp Dynamic Control>Stop/Brake Modes 0 to 10000 1500 --
161 Bus Reg Mode A Dynamic Control>Stop/Brake Modes 0 to 4 0 --
162 Bus Reg Mode B Dynamic Control>Stop/Brake Modes 0 to 4 0 --
2 Commanded Speed Monitor>Metering Note 4 Read Only Hz
24 Commanded Torque Monitor>Metering +/- 800.0 Read Only %
56 Compensation Motor Control>Torq Attributes Note 3 Note 3
440 Control Status Monitor>Metering Note 3 Read Only --
29 Control SW Ver Monitor>Drive Data 0.000 to Read Only --
35.000
149 Current Lmt Gain Dynamic Control>Load Limits 0 to 5000 250 --
147 Current Lmt Sel Dynamic Control>Ramp Rates 0 to 2 0 --
148 Current Lmt Val Dynamic Control>Load Limits Note 1 Note 4 Amps
154 Current Rate Lim Dynamic Control>Load Limits 1.0 to 800.0 400.0 %
300 Data In A1 - Link A Word 1 Communication>Datalinks 0 to 611 0 --
301 Data In A2 - Link A Word 2 Communication>Datalinks 0 to 611 0 --
302 Data In B1 - Link B Word 1 Communication>Datalinks 0 to 611 0 --
303 Data In B2 - Link B Word 2 Communication>Datalinks 0 to 611 0 --
304 Data In C1 - Link C Word 1 Communication>Datalinks 0 to 611 0 --
305 Data In C2 - Link C Word 2 Communication>Datalinks 0 to 611 0 --
306 Data In D1 - Link D Word 1 Communication>Datalinks 0 to 611 0 --
307 Data In D2 - Link D Word 2 Communication>Datalinks 0 to 611 0 --
Record of User Sets C-3
Data
310 Data Out A1 - Link A Word 1 Communication>Datalinks 0 to 611 0 --
311 Data Out A2 - Link A Word 2 Communication>Datalinks 0 to 611 0 --
312 Data Out B1 - Link B Word 1 Communication>Datalinks 0 to 611 0 --
313 Data Out B2 - Link B Word 2 Communication>Datalinks 0 to 611 0 --
314 Data Out C1 - Link C Word 1 Communication>Datalinks 0 to 611 0 --
315 Data Out C2 - Link C Word 2 Communication>Datalinks 0 to 611 0 --
316 Data Out D1 - Link D Word 1 Communication>Datalinks 0 to 611 0 --
317 Data Out D2 - Link D Word 2 Communication>Datalinks 0 to 611 0 --
163 DB Resistor Type Dynamic Control>Stop/Brake Modes 0 to 2 2 --
145 DB While Stopped Dynamic Control>Stop/Brake Modes 0 to 1 0 --
158 DC Brake Level Dynamic Control>Stop/Brake Modes Note 4 Note 4 Amps
157 DC Brake Lvl Sel Dynamic Control>Stop/Brake Modes 0 to 2 0 --
159 DC Brake Time Dynamic Control>Stop/Brake Modes 0.0 to 90.0 0.0 Secs
13 DC Bus Memory Monitor>Metering Note 4 Read Only VDC
12 DC Bus Voltage Monitor>Metering Note 4 Read Only VDC
142 Decel Time 1 Dynamic Control>Ramp Rates 0.0 to 3600.0 10.0 Sec
143 Decel Time 2 Dynamic Control>Ramp Rates 0.0 to 3600.0 10.0 Sec
411 DigIn DataLogic Inputs & Outputs>Digital Inputs Note 3 Note 3 --
216 Dig In Status Utility>Diagnostics Note 3 Read Only --
Inputs & Outputs>Digital Inputs
217 Dig Out Status Utility>Diagnostics Note 3 Read Only --
Inputs & Outputs>Digital Outputs
381 Dig Out1 Level Inputs & Outputs>Digital Outputs 0.0 to 819.2 0.0 --
383 Dig Out1 OffTime Inputs & Outputs>Digital Outputs 0.00 to 600.00 0.0 --
382 Dig Out1 OnTime Inputs & Outputs>Digital Outputs 0.00 to 600.00 0.00 Secs
392 Dig Out Invert Inputs & Outputs>Digital Outputs Note 3 Note 3 --
394 Dig Out Mask1 Inputs & Outputs>Digital Outputs Note 3 Note 3 --
396 Dig Out Mask2 Inputs & Outputs>Digital Outputs Note 3 Note 3 --
398 Dig Out Mask3 Inputs & Outputs>Digital Outputs Note 3 Note 3
393 Dig Out Param1 Inputs & Outputs>Digital Outputs 0 to 31 19 --
379 Dig Out Setpt Inputs & Outputs>Digital Outputs Note 3 Note 3 --
217 Dig Out Status Inputs & Outputs>Digital Outputs Note 3 Read Only --
361 Digital In1 Sel Inputs & Outputs>Digital Inputs Note 4 Note 4 --
364 Digital In4 Sel Inputs & Outputs>Digital Inputs 0 to 42 10 --
380 Digital Out1 Sel Inputs & Outputs>Digital Outputs 1to 39 1 --
790 DIM Config IPS Config>DigInput Monitor Note 4 Note 4 --
793 DIM 4 Off Time IPS Config>DigInput Monitor 0.0 to 600.0 5.0 Secs
792 DIM 4 On Time IPS Config>DigInput Monitor 0.0 to 600.0 5.0 Secs
791 DIM 4 Responce IPS Config>DigInput Monitor 0 to 4 0 --
726 DIM4 Status IPS Config>IPS Status Note 3 Read Only --
Data
794 DIM 5 Responce IPS Config>DigInput Monitor 0 to 4 0 --
727 DIM5 Status IPS Config>IPS Status Note 3 Read Only --
797 DIM 6 Response IPS Config>DigInput Monitor 0 to 4 0 Secs
728 DIM6 Status IPS Config>IPS Status Note 3 Read On;y --
270 DPI Data Rate Communication>Comm Control 0 to 1 1 kbps
299 DPI Fdbk Select Communication>Comm Control 0 to 25 17 --
274 DPI Port Select Communication>Comm Control 0 to 6 0 --
275 DPI Port Value Communication>Comm Control -/+ 32767 Read Only --
298 DPI Ref Select Communication>Comm Control 0 to 1 0 --
211 Drive Alarm 1 Utility>Diagnostics Note 3 Read Only --
Utility>Alarms
212 Drive Alarm 2 Utility>Diagnostics Note 3 Read Only --
Utility>Alarms
203 Drive Checksum Utility>IPS Tempo Memory 0 to 65535 Read Only --
271 Drive Logic Rslt Communication>Comm Control Note 3 Read Only --
219 Drive OL Count Utility>Diagnostics 0.0 to 100.0 Read Only %
150 Drive OL Mode Dynamic Control>Load Limits 0 to 3 3 --
273 Drive Ramp Rslt Communication>Comm Control -/+ 32767 Read Only --
272 Drive Ref Rslt Communication>Comm Control -/+ 32767 Read Only --
209 Drive Status 1 Utility>Diagnostics Note 3 Read Only --
218 Drive Temp Utility>Diagnostics 0 to 100.0 Read Only degC
152 Droop RPM @ FLA Dynamic Control>Load Limits 0.0 to 200.0 0.0 RPM
204 Dyn UserSet Cnfg Utility>IPS Tempo Memory Note 3 Note 3 --
205 Dyn UserSet Sel Utility>IPS Tempo Memory Note 3 Note 3 --
206 Dyn UserSet Actv Utility>IPS Tempo Memory Note 3 Read Only --
14 Elapsed kWh Monitor>Metering 0 to 429496729.5 Read Only kWh
9 Elapsed MWh Monitor>Metering 0.0 to 214748352.0 Read Only MWh
10 Elapsed Run Time Monitor>Metering 0.0 to 241748352.0 Read Only Hrs
413 Encoder PPR Motor Control>Encoder Setup 2 to 20000 1024 PPR
415 Encoder Speed Motor Control>Encoder Setup -/+20 Hz or -/+ Read Only Hz or RPM
25200.0 RPM
423 Encoder Z Chan Motor Control>Encoder Speed 0 to 3 0 --
414 Enc Pos Feedback Motor Control>Encoder Setup -/+ 2147483647 Read Only --
707 Energy Cost/kWHr Motor Control>Motor Data -/+ 9999.99 0.00 $/kWhr
708 Energy PwrRating Motor Control>Motor Data 0.00 to 2999.99 0.00 HP HP or kW
729 Energy Savings Monitor>Metering Note 4 Read Only $/Hr
243 Fault 1 Code Utility>Faults 0000 to 65535 Read Only --
244 Fault 1 Time Utility>Faults 0.0000 to Read Only Hrs
214748.3647
214748.3647
214748.3647
214748.3647
Data
214748.3647
214748.3647
214748.3647
214748.3647
225 Fault Amps Utility>Diagnostics Note 4 Read Only Amps
226 Fault Bus Volts Utility>Diagnostics Note 4 Read Only VDC
240 Fault Clear Utility>Faults 0 to 2 0 --
241 Fault Clear Mode Utility>Faults 0 to 1 1 --
238 Fault Config 1 Utility>Faults Note 3 Note 3 --
224 Fault Speed Utility>Diagnostics Note 4 Read Only Hz or RPM
416 Fdbk Filter Sel Motor Control>Speed Feedback 0 to 2 0 --
166 Flux Braking Dynamic Control>Stop/Brake Modes 0 to 1 0 --
5 Flux Current Monitor>Metering Note 4 Read Only Amps
63 Flux Current Ref Motor Control>Torq Attributes Note 4 Note 2 Amps
57 Flux Up Mode Motor Control>Torq Attributes 0 to 1 0 --
58 Flux Up Time Motor Control>Torq Attributes 0.000 to 5.000 0.000 Secs
169 Flying Start En Dynamic Control>Restart Modes 0 to 1 0 --
170 Flying Start Gain Dynamic Control>Restart Modes 20 to 32767 4000 --
177 Gnd Warn Level Dynamic Control>Power Loss 1.0 to 5.0 3.0 Amps
308 HighRes Ref Communication>Datalinks -/+ 2147418112 0 --
67 Inertia Autotune Motor Control>Torq Attributes 0 to 1 0 --
700 IPS Config IPS Config>IPS Setup Note 3 Note 3 --
701 IPS Control Mode IPS Config>IPS Setup 0 to 1 1 --
702 IPS Start Delay IPS Config>IPS Setup 0.0 to 999.9 30.0 Secs
703 IPS Start Mode IPS Config>IPS Setup 0 to 2 2 --
720 IPS Status IPS Config>IPS Status Note 3 Read Only --
62 IR Voltage Drop Motor Control>Torq Attributes Note 4 Note 2 VAC
64 Ixo Voltage Drop Motor Control>Torq Attributes 0.00 to 230.0, 460.0, Note 2 VAC
or 575.0
100 Jog Speed 1 Speed Command>Discrete Speeds Note 4 10.0 Hz or 300.0 Hz or RPM
RPM
108 Jog Speed 2 Speed Command>Discrete Speeds Note 4 10.0 Hz or 300.0 Hz or RPM
RPM
447 Kf Speed Loop Speed Command>Speed Regulator 0.0 to 0.5 0.0 --
445 Ki Speed Loop Speed Command>Speed Regulator 0.0 to 4000.0 7.8 --
446 Kp Speed Loop Speed Command>Speed Regulator 0.0 to 200.0 6.3 --
201 Language Utility>IPS Tempo Memory 0 to 5, 7, 10 0 --
215 Last Stop Source Utility>Diagnostics 0 to 13 Read Only --
198 Load Frm Usr Set Utility>IPS Tempo Memory 0 to 3 0 --
187 Load Loss Level Dynamic Control>Restart Modes 0.0 to 800.0 200.0 %
188 Load Loss Time Dynamic Control>Restart Modes 0.0 to 30.0 0.0 Secs
598 Logic Mask Actv Communication>Security Note 3 Read Only --
89 Logic Source Sel Speed Command>Control Src Select 0 to 7 1 --
286 Man Override En Speed Config>Speed Reference Note 3 Note 3 --
287 Man Override Own Utility>Diagnostics Note 3 Read Only --
421 Marker Pulse Motor Control>Speed Feedback -/+ 2147483647 Read Only --
Data
55 Maximum Freq Motor Control>Torq Attributes 5.0 to 420.0 90.0 or 130.0 Hz
82 Maximum Speed Speed Command>Spd Mode & Limits 5.0 to 400.0 Hz or Note 4 Hz or RPM
75.0 to 24000.0
RPM
54 Maximum Voltage Motor Control>Torq Attributes Note 4 Note 2 VAC
81 Minimum Speed Speed Command>Spd Mode & Limits Note 4 0.0 Hz
11 MOP Reference Monitor>Metering Note 4 Read Only Hz
195 MOP Rate Utility>MOP Config Note 4 1.0 Hz/sec or Hz/sec or
30.0 RPM/sec RPM/sec
53 Motor Cntl Sel Motor Control>Torq Attributes 0 to 4 0 --
706 Motor Efficiency Motor Control>Motor Data 25.0 to 100.0 100 %
412 Motor Fdbk Type Motor Control>Encoder Setup 0 to 3 0 --
42 Motor NP FLA Motor Control>Motor Data Note 4 Note 2 Amps
43 Motor NP Hertz Motor Control>Motor Data 5.0 to 400.0 Note 2 Hz
45 Motor NP Power Motor Control>Motor Data 0.00 to 1000.00 1.00 HP
44 Motor NP RPM Motor Control>Motor Data 60.0 to 25200.0 1740 RPM
41 Motor NP Volts Motor Control>Motor Data Note 4 Note 2 VAC
220 Motor OL Count Utility>Diagnostics 0.0 to 100.0 Read Only %
48 Motor OL Factor Motor Control>Motor Data 0.20 to 2.00 1.00 --
47 Motor OL Hertz Motor Control>Motor Data Note 4 Motor NP Hz/3 Hz
50 Motor OL Mode Motor Control>Motor Data Note 3 Note 3 --
49 Motor Poles Motor Control>Motor Data 2 to 40 4 --
40 Motor Type Motor Control>Motor Data 0 to 2 0 --
801 MPS Config IPS Config>Auto Set Adj Mon Note 3 Note 3 --
800 MPS Enable IPS Config>Auto Set Adj Mon 0 to 1 0 --
804 MPS Input 1 IPS Config>Auto Set Adj Mon 0.00 to 100.00 10 %
802 MPS Input Value IPS Config>IPS Status 0.00 to 300.00 Read Only %
805 MPS Output 1 IPS Config>Auto Set Adj Mon 0.00 to 150.00 10 %
803 MPS Output Value IPS Config>IPS Status 0.00 to 300.00 Read Only %
46 Mtr NP Pwr Units Motor Control>Motor Data 0 to 3 Note 2
221 Mtr OL Trip Time Utility>Diagnostics 0.0 to 99999 Read Only --
437 Neg Torque Limit Monitor>Metering -800.0 -200.0 %
419 Notch Filter Freq Motor Control>Speed Feedback 0.0 to 500.0 0.0 Hz
420 Notch Filter K Motor Control>Speed Feedback 0.1 to 0.9 0.3 Hz
193 HIM Ref Preload Utility>HIM Ref Config 0 to 1 Enabled --
3 Output Current Monitor>Metering Note 4 Read Only Amps
Data
1 Output Freq Monitor>Metering +/- 400.0 Read Only Hz
7 Output Power Monitor>Metering 0.0 to 2400.0 Read Only kW
8 Output Powr Fctr Monitor>Metering 0.00 to 1.00 Read Only --
6 Output Voltage Monitor>Metering Note 4 Read Only VAC
83 Overspeed Limit Speed Command>Spd Mode & Limits 0.0 to 20.0 Hz or 0.0 10.0 Hz or 300.0 Hz or RPM
to 600.0 RPM RPM
196 Param Access Lvl Utility>IPS Tempo Memory 0 to 2 0 --
772 PCM Level 1/Min IPS Config>ConditionMonitor -/+ 9999.99 0.12 ips
773 PCM Level 2/Max IPS Config>ConditionMonitor -/+ 9999.99 0.25 ips
776 PCM Level 1 Time IPS Config>ConditionMonitor 0.0 to 600.0 5.0 Secs
777 PCM Level 2 Time IPS Config>ConditionMonitor 0.0 to 600.0 5.0 Secs
774 PCM Lvl 1 Action IPS Config>ConditionMonitor 0 to 4 0 --
775 PCM Lvl 2 Action IPS Config>ConditionMonitor 0 to 4 0
770 PCM Mode IPS Config>ConditionMonitor 0 to 1 1 --
778 PCM Off Time IPS Config>ConditionMonitor 0.0 to 600.0 5.0 Secs
771 PCM Source IPS Config>ConditionMonitor 0 to 5 1 --
724 PCM Status IPS Config>IPS Setup Note 3 Read Only --
595 Port Mask Act Communication>Security Note 3 Read Only --
436 Pos Torque Limit Monitor>Metering 0.0 to 800.0 200.0 %
186 Power Loss Level Dynamic Control>Power Loss 0.0 to 999.9 0.0 Volts
184 Power Loss Mode Dynamic Control>Stop/Power Loss 0 to 5 0 --
185 Power Loss Time Dynamic Control>Stop/Power Loss 0.0 to 60.0 0.0 Secs
167 Power Up Delay Dynamic Control>Restart Modes 0.0 to 10800.0 0.0 Secs
242 Power Up Marker Utility>Faults 0.0000 to Read Only Hrs
214748.3647
722 PPM Hi Calc IPS Config>IPS Status Note 4 Read Only HP or kW
751 PPM Hi Level IPS Config>Power Monitor 0.01 to 999.00 Note 4 HP or kW
753 PPM HiLimit Time IPS Config>Power Monitor 0.0 to 600.0 30.0 Secs
723 PPM Lo Calc IPS Config>IPS Status Note 4 Read Only HP or kW
752 PPM Lo Level IPS Config>Power Monitor 0.01 to 999.00 0.01 HP or kW
754 PPM LoLimit Time IPS Config>Power Monitor 0.0 to 600.0 30.0 Secs
761 PPM Limits IPS Config>Power Monitor 0 to 1 0 --
758 PPM Response IPS Config>Power Monitor 0 to 4 0 --
750 PPM Speed IPS Config>Power Monitor Note 4 60.0 Hz or Hz or RPM
1800.0 RPM
757 PPM Start Delay IPS Config>Power Monitor 0.0 to 600.0 30.0 Secs
721 PPM Status IPS Config>IPS Status Note 3 Read Only --
747 Prc Override Ref Process Config>Process Ref Note 4 50.0 %
139 Process BW Filt Process Config>Prcess Setup 0.0 to 240.0 0.0 Radians
124 Process Config Process Config>Process Setup Note 3 Note 3 --
125 Process Control Process Config>Process Setup Note 3 Note 3 --
459 Process D-Time Process Config>Process Setup 0.00 to 100.00 0.00 Secs
137 Process Err Out Process Config>Process Status -/+ 200.0 Read Only %
136 Process FB Out Process Config>Process Status -/+ 100.0 Read Only --
128 Process FB Sel Process Config>Process Feedback 0 to 1 0 --
132 Process Hi Limit Speed Command>Process Setup -/+ 400.0 Hz or -/+ Note 4 Hz or %
800.0%
129 Process I-Time Process Config>Process Setup 0.00 to 100.00 2.00 Secs
131 Process Lo Limit Process Config>Process Setup -/+ 400.0 Hz or -/+ Note 4 Hz or %
800.0%
464 Process Out Gain Process Config>Process Setup -/+ 8.000 1.000 --
138 Process Output Process Config>Process Status -/+ 100.0 Hz or -/+ Read Only Hz or %
800.0%
133 Process Preload Process Config>Process Setup Note 4 0.0 Hz or 100% Hz or %
Data
130 Process P-Gain Process Config>Process Setup 0.00 to 100.00 1.00 --
741 Process Ref 1 Process Config>Process Ref Note 4 10 %
135 Process Ref Out Process Config>Process Status -/+ 100.0 Read Only %
712 Proc Ref Scaler Process Config>Process Ref 0.0 to 9999.9 100.0 --
126 Process Ref Sel Process Config>Process Ref 0 to 16 9 --
127 Process Ref Src Process Config>Process Status 0 to 16 9 --
Utility>Diagnostics
711 Process Ref Unit Process Config>Process Ref 0 to 22 0 --
134 Process Status Process Config>Process Status Note 3 Read Only --
18 PTC HW Value Monitor>Metering 0.00 to 5.00 Read Only Volts
422 Pulse ln Scale Motor Control>Encoder Setup 2 to 2000 64 --
783 PVM Off Time IPS Config>Process Monitor 0.0 to 600.0 5.0 Secs
782 PVM On Time IPS Config>Process Monitor 0.0 to 600.0 5.0 Secs
780 PVM Response IPS Config>Process Monitor 0 to 4 0 --
725 PVM Status IPS Config>IPS Status Note 3 Read Only --
781 PVM Threshold IPS Config>IPS Status 0.0 to 100.0 5 %
151 PWM Frequency Dynamic Control>Load Limits 2 to 10 Note 2 kHz
22 Ramped Speed Monitor>Metering +/- 400.0 or +/- Read Only Hz or RPM
24000.0 RPM
28 Rated Amps Monitor>IPS Tempo Data 0.0 to 6553.5 Read Only Amps
26 Rated kW Monitor>IPS Tempo Data 0.00 to 3000.00 Read Only kW
27 Rated Volts Monitor>IPS Tempo Data 0.0 to 65535.0 Read Only VAC
153 Regen Power Lim Dynamic Control>Load Limits -800.0 to 0.0 -50.0 %
200 Reset Meters Utility>IPS Tempo Memory 0 to 2 0 --
197 Reset To Defalts Utility>IPS Tempo Memory 0 to 3 0 --
70 Run Boost Motor Control>Volts per Hertz Note 4 Note 2 VAC
146 S Curve % Dynamic Control>Ramp Rates 0 to 100 0 %
194 Save MOP Ref Utility>MOP Config Note 3 Note 3 --
192 Save HIM Ref Utility>HIM Ref Config Note 3 Note 3 --
199 Save To User Set Utility>IPS Tempo Memory 0 to 3 0 --
730 Shaft Power Out Monitor>Metering 0.0 to 2400.0 Read Only HP or kW
477 Scale 1 ln Hi Utility>Scaled Blocks -/+ 32767.0 0.0 --
478 Scale 1 ln Lo Utility>Scaled Blocks -/+ 32767.0 0.0 --
476 Scale 1 ln Value Utility>Scaled Blocks -/+ 32767.00 0.0 --
479 Scale 1 Out Hi Utility>Scaled Blocks -/+ 32767.0 0.0 --
480 Scale 1 Out Lo Utility>Scaled Blocks -/+ 32767.0 0.0 --
481 Scale 1 Out Value Utility>Scaled Blocks -/+ 32767.0 0.0 --
Data
189 Shear Pin Time Dynamic Control>Load Limits 0.0 to 30.0 0.0 Secs
87 Skip Freq Band Speed Command>Spd Mode & Limits 0.0 to 30.0 0.0 Hz
84 Skip Frequency 1 Speed Command>Spd Mode & Limits Note 4 0.0 Hz
182 Sleep Level Dynamic Control>Restart Modes Note 4 5.000 mA, 5.000 mA or Volts
V
183 Sleep Time Dynamic Control>Restart Modes 0.0 to 1000.0 1.0 Secs
8 Sleep-Wake Mode Dynamic Control>Restart Modes 0 to 2 0 --
179 Sleep-Wake Ref Dynamic Control>Restart Modes 1 to 2 2 --
122 Slip Comp Gain Speed Command>Slip Comp 1.0 to 100.0 40.0 --
121 Slip RPM @ FLA Speed Command>Slip Comp 0.0 to 1200.0 Note 2 RPM
123 Slip RPM Meter Speed Command>Slip Comp -/+ 300.0 Read Only RPM
448 Spd Err Filt BW Speed Command>Speed Regulator 0.0 to 2000.0 200.0 R/s
21 Spd Fdbk No Filt Monitor>Metering -- Read Only Hz
107 Spd Override Ref Speed Config>Speed Ref Vals Note 4 60.0 Hz or 900 Hz or RPM
RPM
449 Speed Desired BW Speed Command>Speed Regulator 0.0 to 250.0 0.0 R/s
80 Speed FB Select Speed Command>Spd Mode & Limits 0 to 5 1 --
25 Speed Feedback Monitor>Metering +/- 400.0 or +/- Read Only Hz or RPM
24000.0 RPM
451 Speed Loop Meter Speed Command>Speed Regulator -/+ 800.0 Read Only HZ/RPM
101 Speed Ref 1 Speed Config>Speed Ref Vals Note 4 5.0 Hz or 150 Hz or RPM
RPM
RPM
RPM
RPM
RPM
RPM
91 Speed Ref A Hi Speed Command>Speed References Note 4 Note 4 Hz or RPM
92 Speed Ref A Lo Speed Command>Speed References Note 4 0.0 Hz or RPM
90 Speed Ref A Sel Speed Command>Control Src Select 1 to 30 18 --
Speed Command>Speed References
94 Speed Ref B Hi Speed Command>Speed References Note 4 Note 4 Hz or RPM
95 Speed Ref B Lo Speed Command>Speed References Note 4 0.0 Hz or RPM
93 Speed Ref B Sel Speed Command>Control Src Select 1 to 30 9 --
Speed Command>Speed References
213 Speed Ref Source Utility>Diagnostics 0 to 43 Read Only --
23 Speed Reference Monitor>Metering +/- 400.0 or +/- Read Only Hz or RPM
24000.0 RPM
88 Speed/Torque Mod Speed Command>Spd Mode & Limits 0 to 6 1 --
79 Speed Units Speed Command>Spd Mode & Limits 0 to 3 1 --
168 Start At Powerup Dynamic Control>Stop/Restart Modes 0 to 1 0 --
214 Start Inhibits Utility>Diagnostics Note 3 Read Only --
Data
69 Start/Acc Boost Motor Control>Volts per Hertz Note 4 Note 2 VAC
227 Status 1 @ Fault Utility>Diagnostics Note 3 Read Only --
228 Status 2 @ Fault Utility>Diagnostics Note 3 Read Only --
223 Status 3@ Fault Utility>Diagnostics Note 3 Read Only --
155 Stop Mode A Dynamic Control>Stop/Brake Modes 0 to 4 0 --
156 Stop Mode B Dynamic Control>Stop/Brake Modes 0 to 4 0 --
288 Stop Owner Utility>Diagnostics Note 3 Read Only --
59 SV Boost Filter Motor Control>Torq Attributes 0 to 32767 500 --
97 TB Man Ref Hi Speed Command>Speed References Note 4 Note 4 Hz or RPM
98 TB Man Ref Lo Speed Command>Speed References Note 4 0.0 Hz or RPM
96 TB Man Ref Sel Speed Command>Speed References 1 to 17 2 --
235 Testpoint 1 Data Utility>Diagnostics -/+ 2147483648 Read Only --
234 Testpoint 1 Sel Utility>Diagnostics 0 to 65535 499 --
237 Testpoint 2 Data Utility>Diagnostics -/+ 2147483648 Read Only --
236 Testpoint 2 Sel Utility>Diagnostics 0 to 65535 499 --
4 Torque Current Monitor>Metering Note 4 Read Only Amps
441 Torque Current Ref Monitor>Metering -/+ 32767.0 Read Only Amps
427 Torque Ref A Sel Motor Control>Torq Attributes 0 to 29 427:0 = Torque --
Stpt1, 431: 24 =
Disabled
428 Torque Ref A Hi Motor Control>Torq Attributes +/- 800.0 100.0 %
429 Torque Ref A Lo Motor Control>Torq Attributes -/+ 800.0 0.0 %
430 Torque Ref A Div Motor Control>Torq Attributes 0.1 to 3276.7 1.0 --
431 Torque Ref B Sel Motor Control>Torq Attributes 0 to 29 427:0 = Torque --
Stpt1, 431: 24 =
Disabled
432 Torque Ref B Hi Motor Control>Torq Attributes +/- 800.0 100.0 %
433 Torque Ref B Lo Motor Control>Torq Attributes -/+ 800.0 0.0 %
434 Torque Ref B Mult Motor Control>Torq Attributes -/+ 3276.7 1.0 --
435 Torque Setpoint 1 Motor Control>Torq Attributes -/+ 800.0 0.0 %
438 Torque Setpoint 2 Motor Control>Torq Attributes -/+ 800.0 0.0 %
450 Total Inertia Speed Command>Speed Regulator 0.01 to 600.00 0.10 Secs
116 Trim % Setpoint Speed Command>Speed Trim -/+ 200 0.0 %
119 Trim Hi Speed Command>Speed Trim Note 4 60 Hz or 1800 Hz or RPM
RPM
117 Trim In Select Speed Commands>Speed Trim 0 to 30 2 --
120 Trim Lo Speed Command>Speed Trim Note 4 0.0 Hz
118 Trim Out Select Speed Command>Speed Trim Note 3 Note 3 --
180 Wake Level Dynamic Control>Restart Modes Note 4 6.000 mA, 6.000 mA or Volts
V
181 Wake Time Dynamic Control>Restart Modes 0.0 to 1000.0 0.0 Secs
597 Write Mask Actv Communication>Security Note 3 Read Only --
596 Write Mask Cfg Communication>Security Note 3 Note 3 --
202 Voltage Class Utility>IPS Tempo Memory 0 to 5 Note 2 --
Note 1: The range is model dependant.
Note 2: The default value is model dependant or based on the rating of the IPS Tempo.
Note 3: This parameter is a bit parameter. Refer to the IPS Tempo User Guide for more information.
Note 4: The value of the range and/or default depends on the setup of other parameters.
Index
A Anlg2 Out Setpt (378), 9-83, 9-86

Auto Rstrt Delay (175), 9-40
AC Line I/O board Auto Rstrt Tries (174), 9-38
description, 2-8 Autotune (61), 9-11
AC Supply Autotune Torque (66), 9-12
Resistive Grounded, 3-2 Avoidance frequency, see Skip Frequency
Unbalanced, 3-2
Ungrounded, 3-2
Accel Time 1 (140), 9-31 B
Accel Time 2 (141), 9-31
Agency Certification, A-1 Break Frequency (72), 9-14
Ain 1 Scaled Val (19), 9-4 Break Voltage (71), 9-13
Ain 2 Scaled Val (20), 9-4 Bus Reg Kd (165), 9-37
Ain1 Sensor High (332), 9-72, 9-73, 9-74 Bus Reg Ki (160), 9-35
Ain1 SensorUnits (331), 9-72 Bus Reg Kp (164), 9-37
Ain2 Sensor High (334), 9-73 Bus Reg Mode A (161), 9-35
Ain2 SensorUnits (333), 9-73 Bus Reg Mode B (162), 9-35
Alarm 1 @ Fault (229), 9-58
Alarm 1 Time (850), 9-117 C
Alarm 2 @ Fault (230), 9-58
Alarm 2 Time (851), 9-117 CE Conformity, 2-1
Alarm 3 Time (852), 9-117 circuit breakers, 4-8
Alarm 4 Time (853), 9-117 Commanded Speed (2), 9-2
Alarm 5 Time (854), 9-117 Commanded Torque (24), 9-5
Alarm 6 Time (855), 9-117 Common Mode Capacitors, 3-2
Alarm 7 Time (856), 9-117 Communication Options, 2-7
Alarm 8 Time (857), 9-117 communication port, DPI, 2-8
Alarm Config 1 (259), 9-61 Compensation (56), 9-10
Alarms contactors, using input/output, 4-3
about, 10-3 Control and Motor Wiring Diagram, 6-8
descriptions, 10-7 Control and Signal Inputs, 6-2
Analog In 1 Hi (322), 9-69 Control Status (440), 9-96
Analog In 1 Lo (323), 9-69 Control SW Ver (29), 9-6
Analog In 1 Loss (324), 9-69 Current Lmt Gain (149), 9-32
Analog In 2 Hi (325), 9-70 Current Lmt Sel (147), 9-32
Analog In 2 Lo (326), 9-70 Current Lmt Val (148), 9-32
Analog In 2 Loss (327), 9-71 Current Rate Lim (154), 9-33
Analog In1 Value (16), 9-4
Analog In2 Value (17), 9-4
Analog In3 Value, 9-4 D
Analog Out Config (340), 9-74
Analog Out1 Hi (343), 9-76 Data In A1 - Link A Word 1 (300), 9-65
Analog Out1 Lo (344), 9-76 Data In A2 - Link A Word 2 (301), 9-65
Analog Out1 Scale (354), 9-77 Data In B1 - Link B Word 1 (302), 9-66
Analog Out1 Sel (342), 9-75 Data In B2 - Link B Word 2 (303), 9-66
Analog Out2 Hi (346), 9-76 Data In C1 - Link C Word 1 (304), 9-66
Analog Out2 Lo (347), 9-76 Data In C2 - Link C Word 2 (305), 9-66
Analog Out2 Scale (355), 9-77 Data In D1 - Link D Word 1 (306), 9-66
Analog Out2 Sel (345), 9-75 Data In D2 - Link D Word 2 (307), 9-66
Anlg In Config (320), 9-67 Data Out A1- Link A Word 1 (310), 9-67
Anlg In Sqr Root (321), 9-68 Data Out A2 - Link A Word 2 (311), 9-67
Anlg Out Absolut (341), 9-74 Data Out B1- Link B Word 1 (312), 9-67
Anlg1 Out Setpt (377), 9-83 Data Out B2 - Link B Word 2 (313), 9-67
Data Out C1- Link C Word 1 (314), 9-67
Index-2
Data Out C2- Link C Word 2 (315), 9-67 Flange Mount, 3-18
Data Out D1- Link D Word 1 (316), 9-67 Distribution Systems, 3-2
Data Out D2- Link D Word 2 (317), 9-67 Resistive Grounded, 3-2
DB Resistor Type (163), 9-36 Unbalanced, 3-2
DB While Stopped (145), 9-31 Ungrounded, 3-2
DC Brake Level (158), 9-34 DPI communication port, 2-8
DC Brake Lvl Sel (157), 9-34 DPI Data Rate (270), 9-62
DC Brake Time (159), 9-35 DPI Port Select (274), 9-63
DC Bus Memory (13), 9-3 DPI Ports, 2-7
DC Bus Voltage (12), 9-3 DPI Ref Scale (298), 9-65
DC bus voltage measuring points, 10-1 Drive
DC bus, verifying capacitor voltage, 10-1 identifying by model number, 2-1
Decel Time 1 (142), 9-31 mounting, 4-1
Decel Time 2 (143), 9-31 Drive Checksum (203), 9-47
Diagnostic Parameters, 10-19 Drive Components
I/O control cassette locations, 2-6
Dig In Status (216), 9-54
terminal block locations, 2-3
Dig Out Invert (392), 9-85
Drive Connections, 2-7
Dig Out Mask (394), 9-87, 9-88, 9-90
Drive Dimensions
Dig Out Param (393), 9-86 bottom view dimensions, 3-14
Dig Out Setpt (379), 9-83 dimensions and weights, 3-10
Dig Out Status (217), 9-55 Drive Logic Rslt (271), 9-62
DigIn DataLogic (411), 9-91 Drive Ramp Rslt (273), 9-63
Digital In1 Sel (361), 9-77 Drive Status 1 (209), 9-50
Digital In4 Sel (364), 9-78 DriveExplorer, 2-8
Digital In5 Sel (365), 9-78 DriveTools SP, 2-8
Digital In6 Sel (366), 9-78 Droop RPM @ FLA (152), 9-33
Digital Input Monitors, 9-102 Dyn UserSet Cnfg (202), 9-48
Digital Out1 Level (381), 9-84 Dyn UsrSet Actv (206), 9-50
Digital Out1 OffTime (383), 9-85 Dyn UsrSet Sel (205), 9-49
Digital Out1 OnTime (382), 9-85
Digital Out1 Sel (380), 9-84, 9-85, 9-98, 9-99
Digital Out2 Level (385), 9-84 E
Digital Out2 OffTime (387), 9-85
Digital Out2 OnTime (386), 9-85 Editing Parameters, 2-8
Digital Out2 Sel (384), 9-84 Elapsed kWh (14), 9-4
Digital Out3 Level (389), 9-84 Elapsed MWh (9), 9-3
Digital Out3 OffTime (391), 9-85 Elapsed Run Time (10), 9-3
Digital Out3 OnTime (390), 9-85 EMC
Digital Out3 Sel (388), 9-84 Directive, 2-2
DIM 4 Off Time (793), 9-113 ENC Position Fdbk (414), 9-92
DIM 4 On Time (792), 9-113 Encoder PPR (413), 9-92
DIM 4 Response (791), 9-113 Encoder Speed (415), 9-93
DIM 5 Off Time (796), 9-114 Encoder Z Chan (423), 9-94
DIM 5 On Time (795), 9-114 Energy Cost/kWHr (707), 9-104
DIM 5 On Time (798), 9-114 Energy PwrRatings (708), 9-104
DIM 5 Response (794), 9-114 Energy Savings (729), 9-107
DIM 6 Response (797), 9-114 Environmental conditions, 3-9
DIM Config (790), 9-113
DIM4 Status (726), 9-107 F
DIM5 Status (727), 9-107
DIM6 Status (728), 9-107 Fault Amps (225), 9-57
Dimensions Fault Bus Volts (226), 9-57
Index-3
Fault Clear (240), 9-60 starting the drive, 7-12

Fault Clear Mode (241), 9-60 stopping the drive, 7-12
Fault Config 1 (238), 9-59 troubleshooting the drive, 10-23
Fault queue
accessing using LCD HIM, 10-23
time stamp, 10-11
I
Fault Speed (224), 9-56
I/O Terminal Block, 6-3
Faults
Inertia Autotune (67), 9-13
about, 10-10
clearing, 10-11 input contactors, using, 4-3
descriptions and corrective actions, 10-12 Input wiring, installing
fault queue, 10-11 isolation transformer, 5-4
Fdbk Filter Sel (416), 9-93 line reactor, 5-4
Flange Mount Dimensions, 3-18 Installation
site, requirements for, 3-1
Flux Braking (166), 9-37
IPS, 9-103
Flux Current (5), 9-2
IPS Start Delay (702), 9-104
Flux Current Ref (63), 9-12
IPS Start Mode (703), 9-104
Flux Up Mode (57), 9-11
IPS Status (720), 9-105
Flux Up Time (58), 9-11
IPS Tempo Status Line Messages, 10-4
Flying Start En (169), 9-38
IR Voltage Drop (62), 9-12
Flying StartGain (170), 9-38
Ixo Voltage Drop (64), 9-12, 9-13
fuses, 4-8
G J
Jog Speed 1 (100), 9-22
Gnd Warn Level (177), 9-40
Jog Speed 2 (108), 9-23
Grounding, 4-1
H K
key descriptions, LCD HIM, B-1
HighRes Ref (308), 9-67
Kf Speed Loop (447), 9-97
HIM Ref Preload (193), 9-45
Ki Speed Loop (445), 9-96
HIM Status Line Messages, 10-3
Kp Speed Loop (446), 9-97
HIM, LCD
cables, 7-1
connections, 7-1 L
controlling the drive, 7-11
display description, 7-3, B-1 Language (201), 9-47
display time out period setting, 7-6 Last Stop Source (215), 9-54
fast power up, 7-6
LCD HIM, see HIM, LCD
fault queue, accessing, 10-23
Line reactor, 5-4
HIM reference, displaying and changing, 7-10
installing and removing, 7-2 Load Frm Usr Set (198), 9-46
jogging the drive, 7-12 Load Loss Level (187), 9-44
key descriptions, 7-4, B-1 Load Loss Time (188), 9-44
loading and saving user sets, 7-9 Logic, 9-101
logic and reference source, selecting, 7-12 Logic Mask Actv (598), 9-101
menu structure, 7-5, B-1 Logic Source Sel (89), 9-18
monitoring the drive, 7-10 Low Voltage Directive, 2-2
parameters, viewing and adjusting, 7-7
process display screen, customizing, 7-11
resetting the display, 7-6 M
reverse video, selecting, 7-6
screen contrast, adjusting, 7-6 Man Override En (286), 9-64
selecting a device, 7-7 Man Override Own (287), 9-64
Index-4
Marker Pulse (421), 9-93 N

Maximum Freq (55), 9-9
Maximum Speed (82), 9-15 Neg Torque Limit (437), 9-95
Maximum Voltage (54), 9-9 Notch Filter Freq (419), 9-93
Minimum Speed (81), 9-15 Notch Filter K (420), 9-93
Model numbers, 2-1
MOP Rate (195), 9-45
MOP Reference (11), 9-3 O
Motor Cntl Sel (53), 9-9
output contactors, using, 4-3
Motor Efficiency (706), 9-104
Output Current (3), 9-2
Motor Fdbk Type (412), 9-92
Output Freq (1), 9-2
Motor NP FLA (42), 9-6
Output Power (7), 9-3
Motor NP Hertz (43), 9-7
Output Powr Fctr (8), 9-3
Motor NP Power (45), 9-7
Output Voltage (6), 9-2
Motor NP RPM (44), 9-7
Overspeed Limit (83), 9-16
Motor NP Volts (41), 9-6
Motor OL Count (220), 9-55
Motor OL Factor (48), 9-8 P
Motor OL Hertz (47), 9-7
Motor OL Mode (50), 9-8 Param Access Lvl (196), 9-45
Motor Poles (49), 9-8 Parameters
Motor Type (40), 9-6 cross-referenced by name, ?? to C-10
MOVs, 3-2 PCM Level 1 Time (776), 9-111
MPS Config (801), 9-115 PCM Level 1/Min (772), 9-111
MPS Enable (800), 9-115 PCM Level 2 Time (777), 9-111
MPS Input 1 (804), 9-116 PCM Level 2/Max (773), 9-111
MPS Input 10 (822), 9-116 PCM Lvl 1 Action (774), 9-111
MPS Input 2 (806), 9-116 PCM Lvl 2 Action (775), 9-111
MPS Input 3 (808), 9-116 PCM Mode (770), 9-110
MPS Input 4 (810), 9-116 PCM Off Time (778), 9-112
MPS Input 5 (812), 9-116 PCM Source (771), 9-110
MPS Input 6 (814), 9-116 PCM Status (724), 9-107
MPS Input 7 (816), 9-116 Phase V Amps (23), 9-5, 9-18
MPS Input 8 (818), 9-116 PI Output Gain (464), 9-98
MPS Input 9 (820), 9-116 Port, 9-100
MPS Input Value (802), 9-115 Port Mask Actv (595), 9-100
MPS Output 1 (805), 9-117 Pos Torque Limit (436), 9-95
MPS Output 10 (823), 9-117 Power Enclosure Ratings, 2-1
MPS Output 2 (807), 9-117 Power Loss Level (186), 9-43
MPS Output 3 (809), 9-117 Power Loss Mode (184), 9-42
MPS Output 4 (811), 9-117 Power Loss Time (185), 9-43
MPS Output 5 (813), 9-117 Power Up Marker (242), 9-60
MPS Output 6 (815), 9-117 power wire sizes, 4-3
MPS Output 7 (817), 9-117 Powerup Delay (167), 9-37
MPS Output 8 (819), 9-117 PPM Hi Calc (722), 9-106
MPS Output 9 (10), 9-117 PPM Hi Level (751), 9-109
MPS Output Value (803), 9-115 PPM HiLimit Times (753), 9-109
Mtr NP Pwr Units (46), 9-7 PPM Limits (761), 9-110
Mtr OL Trip Time (221), 9-55 PPM Lo Calc (723), 9-106
Mtr Tor Cur Ref (441), 9-96 PPM Lo Level (752), 9-109
PPM LoLimit Times (754), 9-109
PPM Responses (758), 9-110
PPM Speed (750), 9-108
PPM Status (721), 9-106
Index-5
PPM StrtDelay (757), 9-109 S

Prc Override Ref (747), 9-108
Proc Ref Scaler (712), 9-105 S Curve % (146), 9-32
Process BW Fit (139), 9-31 Save HIM Ref (192), 9-44
Process Config (124), 9-26 Save MOP Ref (194), 9-45
Process Control (125), 9-27 Save To User Set (199), 9-46
Process Err Out (137), 9-30 Scale1 ln Hi (477), 9-98
Process FB Out (136), 9-30 Scale1 ln Lo (478), 9-99
Process FB Sel (128), 9-28 Scale1 ln Value (476), 9-98
Process Hi Limit (132), 9-29 Scale1Out Hi (479), 9-99
Process I-Time (129), 9-29 Scale1Out Lo (480), 9-99
Process Lo Limit (131), 9-29 Scale1Out Value (481), 9-99
Process Output (138), 9-31 Scale2 ln Hi (483), 9-98
Process P-Gain (130), 9-29 Scale2 ln Lo (484), 9-99
Process Preload (133), 9-29 Scale2 ln Value (482), 9-98
Process Ref 1 (741), 9-108 Scale2 Out Hi (485), 9-99
Process Ref 2 (742), 9-108 Scale2 Out Lo (486), 9-99
Process Ref 3 (743), 9-108 Scale2 Out Value (487), 9-99
Process Ref 4 (744), 9-108 Scale3 ln Hi (489), 9-98
Process Ref 5 (745), 9-108 Scale3 ln Lo (490), 9-99
Process Ref 6 (6), 9-108 Scale3 ln Value (488), 9-98
Process Ref 6 (746), 9-108 Scale3 Out Hi (491), 9-99
Process Ref Out (135), 9-30 Scale3 Out Lo (492), 9-99
Process Ref Sel (126), 9-28 Scale3 Out Value (493), 9-99
Process Ref Src (127), 9-28 Scale4 ln Hi (495), 9-98
Process Ref Unit (711), 9-105 Scale4 ln Lo (496), 9-99
Process Status (134), 9-30 Scale4 ln Value (494), 9-98
Process Variable Monitor, 9-102 Scale4 Out Hi (497), 9-99
PTC HW Value (18), 9-4 Scale4 Out Lo (498), 9-99
Pulse Input Ref (99), 9-22 Scale4 Out Value (499), 9-99
Pulse ln Scale (422), 9-93 Shaft Power Out (730), 9-108
Pump Condition Monitor, 9-102 Shear Pin Time (189), 9-44
Pump Power Monitor, 9-102 Site
PVM Off Time (783), 9-112 environmental conditions, 3-9
PVM On Time (782), 9-112 requirements for, 3-1
PVM Response (780), 9-112 Skip Freq Band (87), 9-16
PVM Status (725), 9-107 Skip Frequency 1 (84), 9-16
PVM Threshold (781), 9-112 Skip Frequency 2 (85), 9-16
PWM Frequency (151), 9-33 Skip Frequency 3 (86), 9-16
Sleep Level (182), 9-41
Sleep Time (183), 9-42
R Sleep-Wake Mode (178), 9-40
Sleep-Wake Ref (179), 9-41
Ramped Speed (22), 9-5
Slip Comp Gain (122), 9-25
Rated Amps (28), 9-6
Slip RPM @ FLA (121), 9-25
Rated kW (26), 9-5
Slip RPM Meter (123), 9-25
Rated Volts (27), 9-6
Software
Regen Power Limit (153), 9-33 DriveExplorer, 2-8
Replacement parts, 10-22 DriveTools SP, 2-8
Reset Meters (200), 9-47 Spd Err Filt BW (448), 9-97
Reset To Defalts (197), 9-46 Spd Fdbk No Filt (21), 9-5
Resistive Grounded Distribution Systems, 3-2 Spd Override Ref (107), 9-23
Resistive Grounded Supply, 3-2 Specifications
Run Boost (70), 9-13 Agency Certification, A-1
Index-6
Control, A-2 Testpoint 2 Sel (236), 9-59

Electrical, A-1 Time stamp, fault queue, 10-11
Encoder, A-3 Torq Ref A Div (430), 9-95
Environment, A-2 Torq Ref B Mult (434), 9-95
Protection, A-1 Torque Current (4), 9-2
Speed Desired BW (449), 9-97 Torque Ref A Hi (428), 9-94
Speed FB Select (80), 9-14 Torque Ref A Lo (429), 9-94
Speed Feedback (25), 9-5 Torque Ref A Sel (427), 9-94
Speed Loop Meter (451), 9-98 Torque Ref B Hi (432), 9-94
Speed Ref 1 (101), 9-22, 9-108 Torque Ref B Lo (433), 9-94
Speed Ref 2 (102), 9-22 Torque Ref B Sel (431), 9-94
Speed Ref 3 (103), 9-22 Torque Setpoint1 (435), 9-95
Speed Ref 4 (104), 9-22 Torque Setpoint2 (438), 9-95
Speed Ref 5 (105), 9-22 Total Inertia (450), 9-97
Speed Ref 6 (106), 9-22 Trim % Setpoint (116), 9-23
Speed Ref 7 (107), 9-108 Trim Hi (119), 9-25
Speed Ref A Hi (91), 9-19 Trim In Select (117), 9-24
Speed Ref A Lo (92), 9-20 Trim Lo (120), 9-25
Speed Ref A Sel (90), 9-19 Trim Out Select (118), 9-24
Speed Ref B Hi (94), 9-21 Troubleshooting
Speed Ref B Lo (95), 9-21 common symptoms and corrective
Speed Ref B Sel (93), 9-20 actions, 10-20
Speed Ref Source (213), 9-53 using the LCD HIM, 10-23
Speed Reference (23), 9-5
Speed Reference Control, 6-9
Speed Units (79), 9-14 U
Speed/Torque Mod (88), 9-17
Unbalanced Distribution Systems, 3-2
Start At PowerUp (168), 9-37
Unbalanced/Ungrounded Supply, 3-2
Start Inhibits (214), 9-54
Ungrounded Distribution Systems, 3-2
Start/Acc Boost (69), 9-13
Status 1 @ Fault (227), 9-57
Status 2 @ Fault (228), 9-57 V
Status 3 @ Fault (223), 9-56
Status LEDs, 10-2 Voltage Class (202), 9-47
Status Line Mode Descriptions, 7-3
Stop Mode A (155), 9-34
Stop Mode B (156), 9-34
W
Stop Owner (288), 9-64 Wake Level (180), 9-41
Stopping, 6-1 Wake Time (181), 9-41
Stopping the drive, 6-1 Wiring Examples
SV Boost Filter (59), 9-11 Encoder, 6-4
I/O, 6-6
T Wiring requirements, drive, 3-24
Write, 9-100
TB Man Ref Hi (97), 9-21 Write Mask Actv (597), 9-100, 9-103
TB Man Ref Lo (98), 9-22 Write Mask Cfg (596), 9-100
TB Man Ref Sel (96), 9-21
Terminal Block
I/O, 6-3
Wire Size
Power, 5-3
Testpoint 1 Data (235), 9-59
Testpoint 1 Sel (234), 9-59
Testpoint 2 Data (237), 9-59
U.S. Allen-Bradley Drives Technical Support - Tel: (1) 262.512.8176, Fax: (1) 262.512.2222, Email: support@drives.ra.rockwell.com, Online: www.ab.com/support/abdrives
www.rockwellautomation.com
Power, Control and Information Solutions Headquarters

Americas: Rockwell Automation, 1201 South Second Street, Milwaukee, WI 53204 USA,Tel: (1) 414.382.2000, Fax: (1) 414.382.4444
Europe/Middle East/Africa: Rockwell Automation, Vorstlaan/Boulevard du Souverain 36, 1170 Brussels, Belgium,Tel: (32) 2 663 0600, Fax: (32) 2 663 0640
Asia Pacific: Rockwell Automation, Level 14, Core F, Cyberport 3, 100 Cyberport Road, Hong Kong,Tel: (852) 2887 4788, Fax: (852) 2508 1846
Publication 20B-UM004C-EN-P - July, 2008 P/N 379526-P03

Supersedes 20B-UM004B-EN-P dated June, 2008 Copyright © 2008 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in USA.

IPS Tempo: User Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

IPS Tempo: User Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

IPS Tempo: User Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

IPS Tempo™

WARNING: Identifies information about practices or

ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices or

Shock Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment

Burn Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment

Chapter 2 About the IPS Tempo

Chapter 3 Mounting, Grounding, and Wire Routing

Chapter 4 Wiring Requirements for the IPS Tempo

Chapter 5 Installing Power Wiring

Chapter 6 Installing Regulator Board Control Wiring

Chapter 7 Using the LCD HIM

Chapter 8 Programming Basics

Chapter 9 Parameter Descriptions

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting the IPS Tempo

Appendix A Technical Specifications

Appendix B Logic Command/Status Words

Appendix C Record of User Sets

ATTENTION: You must read these instructions prior to installing,

This manual is intended for qualified electricians familiar with installing,

About the IPS Tempo

Brake Brake Resistor

Figure 2.1 – Identifying the IPS Tempo by Model Number

Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC)

Essential Requirements for CE Compliance

First Environment Restricted

IPS Tempo Components and Terminal Block Locations

➍ Use 75C Wire Only

Frames 0 & 1 Frame 2 / PE

Figure 2.2 – Typical Terminal Block Locations - Frames 0-6

PE & MOV Wire

Figure 2.3 – Typical Terminal Block Locations - Frames 7-10

Refer to pages 2-3 and 2-4 for typical locations.

No. Name Frame Description

➌ AUX Terminal 0-4 Auxiliary Control Voltage

I/O Control Cassette

Table 2.3 – I/O Cassette and Terminal Block Locations

Number Name Description

Removing the I/O Control Cassette

Use 75C Wire Only

Table 2.5 – IPS Tempo Connection Descriptions

Number Connector Description

Description Model Number

Description Model Number

Description Model Number

Mounting, Grounding, and Wire Routing

This chapter provides information that must be considered when planning an

ATTENTION: Only qualified electrical personnel familiar with

Verifying Power Module Input Ratings Match Available Power

ATTENTION: To guard against personal injury and/or equipment

Unbalanced, Ungrounded, Resistive or B Phase Grounded Distribution

Disconnecting MOVs, Common Mode Capacitors and Input Filter Capacitors

Frame Jumper Component Jumper Location No.

BR1 B V/T2 W/T3 PE R/L1 S/L2 T/L3

AUX IN+ AUX OUT–

(I/O Cassette Removed)

Table 3.2 – Jumper/Wire Removal - Frames 7-10

Frame Jumper/Wire Location

Input Power Conditioning